Pentra DX 120-Raa027ben

Technical manual
HORIBA ABX SAS

B.P. 7290
34184 MONTPELLIER Cedex 4 - FRANCE
P/n: RAA027BEN
Contents
1 - Introduction
1. Revision ..................................................................................................................2
2. Legal Information ..................................................................................................3
3. Operational Conditions .........................................................................................5
4. Instrument’s labels ................................................................................................9
5. Instrument general cleaning ..............................................................................12
6. Warning and precautions ...................................................................................13
7. Specifications ......................................................................................................15
8. Instrument description & technology (Pentra DX 120) ....................................18
9. Reagent specifications .......................................................................................19
10. Printer .................................................................................................................20
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 0-1
Contents
2 - Hydraulic & pneumatic principles
1. Pneumatic circuit ..................................................................................................2
2. Compressor ...........................................................................................................3
3. Membrane pump ...................................................................................................3
4. Air cylinders ...........................................................................................................4
5. Liquid valves ..........................................................................................................7
6. Hydraulic circuit ..................................................................................................11
7. Hydraulic specifications (Pentra DX 120 only) ..................................................27
8. Pneumatic diagrams ...........................................................................................28
Technical Manual
0-2 RAA027BEN
Contents
3 - Electric & Electronic principles
1. Power supply module ...........................................................................................3
2. Electronic boards ................................................................................................10
3. Electronic boards description ............................................................................11
4. Flat cables list ......................................................................................................58
5. Wirings .................................................................................................................59
6. Electronic principles ...........................................................................................88
7. Synoptics ...........................................................................................................102
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 0-3
Contents
4 - Analysis cycle technology
1. Startup ....................................................................................................................2
2. Analysis cycle description ....................................................................................4
3. Technology ............................................................................................................8
4. Mechanic principles & description ....................................................................25
Technical Manual
0-4 RAA027BEN
Contents
5 - Software versions
1. Software versions and compatibilities ................................................................2
2. Technical notes .....................................................................................................5
3. «Assistance» menu description ...........................................................................7
4. Command interpreter (Shell) ................................................................................9
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 0-5
Contents
6 - Output format
1. Connection between Analyzer and Pentra ML ...................................................2
2. Connection to laboratory .....................................................................................6
Technical Manual
0-6 RAA027BEN
Contents
7 - Troubleshooting
1. Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................2
2. Error message file .................................................................................................6
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 0-7
Contents
8 - Maintenance
1. Maintenance procedures .....................................................................................2
2. Service technician maintenance & adjustments ................................................3
3. Procedures ..........................................................................................................14
RAS400B: Installation
RAS401B: Every 4 month maintenance
RAS402A: Yearly maintenance
RAS403B: Power supply module check & adjustment
RAS404A: Compressor maintenance
RAS405A: Grabber cleaning
RAS406B: Stepper motors adjustment
RAS407A: Piercer & Grabber mechanical adjustment
RAS408B: Internal BC reader & Tube detector adjustment
RAS409A: Pressure/Vacuum adjustment
RAS410A: Sampling valve maintenance
RAS411A: Commutation valve maintenance
RAS412A: Sample detection cells adjustment
RAS413A: HGB Blank adjustment
RAS414B: WBC/RBC/PLT Gain adjustment
RAS415B: LMNE adjustments
RAS416B: Temperature adjustment
RAS417A: Bubbling check & adjustment
RAS418A: BASO result adjustment
RAS419A: WBC Balance adjustment
RAS420A: RETIC Flowcell adjustment
RAS421A: RETIC Resistive gain adjustment
RAS422B: RETIC Results & Correlation final adjustment
RAS423A: PMT Replacement & adjustment
RAS424B: ERB adjustment
RAS425A: Instrument decontamination
RAS426A: Vacuum/Pressure tank maintenance
RAS427A: External barcode reader setup
RAS428B: LASER Optical bench replacement
RAS429A: LMNE Flowcell replacement
RAS430A: LASER Optical bench board replacement
RAS431A: Motor power board replacement
RAS432A: Membrane pump dismantling
RAS433B: RETIC Flowcell replacement
RAS434A: Open/Close tube correlation
RAS435B: Control blood Open/Close tube correlation
RAS436A: Calibration
RAS439A: Soft pneumatic
RAS440A: Check up after intervention
Technical Manual
0-8 RAA027BEN
Contents
9 - Exploded views
1. Pneumatical door assy .........................................................................................4
2. Counting chambers ..............................................................................................5
3. Regulated and waste chambers ..........................................................................6
4. Regulated Vacuum chamber #1 assy ..................................................................7
6. Waste chamber assy .............................................................................................9
7. Vacuum filters ......................................................................................................10
8. Optical bench ......................................................................................................11
9. Pneumatical door chain ......................................................................................11
10. LMNE Heater .....................................................................................................12
11. BASO Heater ......................................................................................................12
12. Heating and cell boards ....................................................................................13
13. Waste tray ..........................................................................................................13
14. Dispenser assy ..................................................................................................14
15. Liquid valves ......................................................................................................15
16. Regulators assy .................................................................................................16
17. Bubbling kit ........................................................................................................16
18. RBC Chamber ....................................................................................................17
19. BASO chamber ..................................................................................................17
20. WBC/HGB chamber ..........................................................................................18
21. HGB coaxial connector .....................................................................................18
22. BASO Chamber electrode assy .......................................................................19
23. RBC Chamber electrode assy ..........................................................................19
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 0-9
Contents
24. WBC/HGB Chamber assy .................................................................................20
25. WBC/HGB Chamber cover ...............................................................................20
26. LMNE syringes ..................................................................................................21
27. Syringe motor assy ...........................................................................................22
28. Syringe assy .......................................................................................................23
29. Flowcell output shielding .................................................................................23
30. LMNE Chamber coaxe ......................................................................................24
31. Preamplifier board ............................................................................................25
32. Electro-pneumatic switch ................................................................................25
33. Piercer assy .......................................................................................................26
34. Manual sampling ...............................................................................................27
35. Distribution board .............................................................................................28
36. Piercing air cylinder ..........................................................................................28
37. Barcode assy .....................................................................................................29
38. Tube detection assy ..........................................................................................29
39. Sampling valve ..................................................................................................30
40. Commutation valve assy ..................................................................................30
41. Grabber ..............................................................................................................31
42. Grabber mechanism assy .................................................................................31
43. Piercer motor .....................................................................................................32
44. Rotation mechanism assy ................................................................................32
45. Rotation motor assy .........................................................................................33
46. Ejection motor assy ..........................................................................................33
47. Loading assy ......................................................................................................34
48. Compressor .......................................................................................................35
Technical Manual
0 - 10 RAA027BEN
Contents
49. Compressor fan .................................................................................................36
50. Pressure Regulators .........................................................................................36
51. Vacuum regulator ..............................................................................................37
52. Manometer assy ................................................................................................37
53. HP filter ..............................................................................................................38
54. Tankers ..............................................................................................................38
55. Connection plate ...............................................................................................39
56. Power supply .....................................................................................................40
57. Detection cell .....................................................................................................41
58. Laser bench board ............................................................................................41
59. Hard disk ............................................................................................................42
60. Optical distribution board ................................................................................42
61. Instrument cover ...............................................................................................43
62. Manual sampling needle protection ................................................................44
63. Waste straw .......................................................................................................44
64. Diluent straws ....................................................................................................45
65. External barcode reader ...................................................................................46
66. PMT ....................................................................................................................46
67. Flange connector tubings (Pentra DX 120) .....................................................47
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 0 - 11
Contents
Technical Manual
0 - 12 RAA027BEN
Introduction
1 - Introduction
1. Revision ..................................................................................................................2
2. Legal Information ..................................................................................................3

2.1. Declaration of Conformity ..................................................................................................... 3
2.2. Notice of liability ................................................................................................................... 3
2.3. Potential hazards .................................................................................................................. 3
2.4. Graphics ............................................................................................................................... 4
2.5. Trademarks ........................................................................................................................... 4
2.6. Copyright 2006 HORIBA ABX SAS ...................................................................................... 4
3. Operational Conditions .........................................................................................5

3.1. Environment .......................................................................................................................... 5
3.2. Location ................................................................................................................................ 5
3.3. Grounding ............................................................................................................................. 5
3.4. Humidity/temperature conditions ......................................................................................... 6
3.5. Electromagnetic environment check .................................................................................... 6
3.6. Main supply .......................................................................................................................... 6
3.7. Environmental protection ..................................................................................................... 7
3.8. Transportation and storage conditions ................................................................................ 7
3.9. Installation ............................................................................................................................ 7
3.10. Fuse replacement ............................................................................................................... 8
4. Instrument’s labels ................................................................................................9

4.1. Instrument labels .................................................................................................................. 9
4.2. Biological risks labels ......................................................................................................... 11
5. Instrument general cleaning ..............................................................................12

5.1. Instrument external cleaning .............................................................................................. 12
5.2. Instrument internal cleaning ............................................................................................... 12
6. Warning and precautions ...................................................................................13

6.1. Limited guarantee ............................................................................................................... 13
6.2. Safety Precautions ............................................................................................................. 14
7. Specifications ......................................................................................................15
7.1. Technical specifications ..................................................................................................... 15
7.2. Physical specifications ....................................................................................................... 17
8. Instrument description & technology (Pentra DX 120) ....................................18
9. Reagent specifications .......................................................................................19
10. Printer .................................................................................................................20
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 1-1
Introduction
Revision
1. Revision
Index Reference Section Date
A RAA027AEN Creation 01/01/06
B RAA027BEN ALL 04/2010
This document applies to the latest higher software version.

When a subsequent software version changes the information in this document, a new issue will be
released.
Technical Manual
1-2 RAA027BEN
Introduction
Legal Information
2. Legal Information
2.1. Declaration of Conformity
This instrument responds to the Standards and Directives named in the Declaration of Conformity.
Latest version of the CE Declaration of Conformity for this instrument is available on www.horiba.com
2.2. Notice of liability
The Information in this manual is distributed on an "As Is" basis, without warranty. While every
precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual, HORIBA Medical will not assume any
liability to any persons or entities with respect to loss or damage, caused or alleged to be caused directly
or indirectly by not following the instructions contained in this manual, or by using the computer software
and hardware products described herein in a manner inconsistent with our product labeling.
2.3. Potential hazards
To alert the operator of potentially hazardous conditions, one of the headings which are described below
is provided wherever necessary throughout this text.
Flags a procedure that if not followed properly, can prove to be extremely hazardous to either
the operator or the environment or both.
Emphasizes an operating procedure that must be followed to avoid possible damage to the
instrument or erroneous test results.
Emphasizes important information especially helpful to the operator before, during or after a
specific operational function.
Gives a summary of what can be achieved if the task is performed.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 1-3
Introduction
Legal Information
2.4. Graphics
All graphics including screens and printouts, photographs are for illustration purposes only and are not
contractual.
2.5. Trademarks
Other product names mentioned within this publication may be trademarks or registered trademarks
oftheir respective owners.
2.6. Copyright 2006 HORIBA ABX SAS
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
HORIBA Medical.
HORIBA ABX SAS

Rue du Caducée - Parc Euromédecine
34184 MONTPELLIER Cedex 4 - FRANCE
Tel: + 33 (0)4 67 14 15 16
Fax: + 33 (0)4 67 14 15 17
Technical Manual
1-4 RAA027BEN
Introduction
Operational Conditions
3. Operational Conditions
3.1. Environment
■ The operation of the Pentra DX 120 - Pentra DF 120 should be restricted to indoor location use only!
Instrument is operational at an altitude of maximum 2000 m (6561 ft).
■ The instrument is designed for safety from voltages surges according to INSTALLATION CATEGORY
II and POLLUTION DEGREE 2 (IEC 61010-1).
■ Please contact your local representative for information regarding operation locations, when it does
not comply with the recommended specifications.
3.2. Location
■ Place your instrument on a clean and leveled table or workbench.
Keep in mind that the instrument and printer weigh approximately 200 Kgs (440 lbs).
■ Avoid exposure to sunlight.

■ Methanol use on the SPS Evolution, requires that the laboratory is well ventilated (methanol vapours).
■ Place your instrument where it is not exposed to water or vapor.
■ Place your instrument where it is free from vibration or shock.
■ Place your instrument where an independent power receptacle can be used.
■ Use a receptacle different from the one used by a device that easily generates noise such as a
centrifuge, etc.
■ Provide a space of at least 20 cm (8 inches) at the back of the instrument for arranging the power cable
and tubings..
The power switch and input voltage supply connection should always be accessible. When
positioning the system for operational use, leave the required amount of space for easy
accessibility to these items.
3.3. Grounding
Proper grounding is required when installing the system. Check the wall outlet ground (Earth) for proper
grounding to the facilities electrical ground. If you are unsure of the outlet grounding, contact your
facilities engineer to verify the proper outlet ground.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 1-5
Introduction
3.4. Humidity/temperature conditions
Instrument operating temperature:

from +16°C (+61°F) to +34°C (+93°F), with a relative humidity of 80% maximum, without condensation.
If the instrument is stored at a temperature lower than 10°C (50°F), it should stand for one hour at a
normal room temperature before use.
Temperature gradient:
2°C (35°F) every three hours.
Pentra DF 120: Reticulocytes temperature range: ~8°C
Pentra DX 120
3.5. Electromagnetic environment check
■ The instrument has been designed to produce less than the accepted level of electromagnetic
interference in order to operate in conformity with its destination, allowing the correct operation of
other instruments also in conformity with their destination.
■ In case of suspected electromagnetic noise, check that the instrument has not been placed in the
proximity of electromagnetic fields or short wave emissions, e.g. Radar, X-rays, Scanners, Cell phones,
etc.
3.6. Main supply
■ Grounding is required. Check that the earth wall-plug is correctly connected to the laboratory
grounding system. If there is no such system a ground stake should be used.
■ Use only main supply cable delivered with the Pentra DX 120 - Pentra DF 120.
■ Main supply voltage fluctuations must not exceed +/-10% of the nominal voltage.
■ Pentra DX 120 - Pentra DF 120 connections to supply are done by an HORIBA Medical representative.
Technical Manual
1-6 RAA027BEN
Introduction
3.7. Environmental protection
Used Accessories and Consumables Disposal

Disposable used accessories and consumables must be collected by a laboratory specialized in
elimination and recycling of this kind of material according to the local legislation.
Instrument disposal
This product should be disposed of and recycled at the end of the useful life in accordance
with European Directive 2002/96/EC on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)
and/or European Directive 2006/66/EC on batteries and accumulators.
If any doubt, please contact your HORIBA Medical representative service department.
3.8. Transportation and storage conditions
Condition for storage and transportation: Temperature from -20°C to +50°C (-4°F to 122°F).
Prior to the shipping of an instrument by transporter, whatever the destination, an external

decontamination of the instrument must be carried out.
Before instrument removal from use, transportation or disposal, perform a general cleaning and a
draining of your instrument.
3.9. Installation
An HORIBA Medical representative will install your instrument, computer, software and printer.
Verify that all of the parts from the packages are present:
One box contains:

■ The analyzer
■ Transportation handles
One box contains:
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 1-7
Introduction
■ Printer
■ Installation kit
■ Waste container
■ User manual
■ Reagent tray
■ Sample racks
■ Laser power supply
3.10. Fuse replacement
All fuses, expected for the followings, must not be exchanged by the operator.
In order to replace Pentra DX 120 - Pentra DF 120 F12 and F13 fuses, carry out the following procedure:
■ Do not remove the instrument protection covers.
■ Disconnect main power cable before intervention.
■ Check that the selected voltage is correct.
■ Use only slow blow internal fuses having the following characteristics:
- For 100/120V supply: 8A 250V
- For 220/240V supply: 4A 250V
Technical Manual
1-8 RAA027BEN
Introduction
Instrument’s labels
4. Instrument’s labels
4.1. Instrument labels
4.1.1. Rear labels
1- During reagent replacement or cleaning avoid any direct contact with the needles.
2- There is no particular hazard, avoid any handling on the ejection tray during the rack ejection.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 1-9
Introduction
4.1.2. Instrument serial number label
■ Waste alarm: connections used for the waste output tube (on waste position) and the waste level
detector (on the waste alarm position).
■ Diluent alarm: connections used for the diluent input tubes 1 and 2 (on diluent 1 and diluent 2
positions). The diluent level detector is connected on the diluent alarm position.
■ Basolyse alarm: connections used for the Basolyse input tube (on Basolyse position). The Basolyse
level detector is connected on the Basolyse alarm position.
■ Barcode: Connection used for the external barcode reader.
■ RS232 outputs #1 and #2: Used only by HORIBA Medical qualified engineer.
■ Printer: Do not connect a printer which has not been recommended by a HORIBA Medical qualified
engineer and which characteristics are incompatibles with the IEC 601.1 or IEC 950.
■ Voltage selector: Used only by HORIBA Medical qualified engineer.
4.1.3. Instrument internal label
Danger of explosion if battery is not replaced correctly.

When replacing the battery, always use the same and/or equivalent type recommended by
the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's specific
instructions.
Technical Manual
1 - 10 RAA027BEN
Introduction
4.2. Biological risks labels
Consider all instrument accessible surfaces as potentially contaminated with blood. Use
protective gloves to operate instrument. see "6.2.2. Biological risks", page 14.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 1 - 11
Introduction
Instrument general cleaning
5. Instrument general cleaning
5.1. Instrument external cleaning
The external surfaces of the instrument must be decontaminated considering the biological
environment.
■ Never spill liquids on the instrument.

■ Never use Disinfectant product that contains alcohol
■ The use of cleaning products (bleach, Minoclair, Cleaner) through the retic pneumatical
circuit is forbidden. Distilled water, used in the same circuit, can cause erroneous results.
5.1.1. Display screen

Use a soft cloth, slightly wet with disinfectant product*. Wipe gently the screen and dry to remove any
trace of moisture.
5.1.2. All contaminated surfaces

Slightly wet a sponge with disinfectant product* and wipe the dirty surfaces.
5.1.3. Stainless steel

Slightly wet a sponge with disinfectant product* and wipe the dirty surfaces. Dry with a soft cloth.
* Products having the following microbiological properties:
■ Bactericidal, Fungicidal, Active on Aspergillus fumigatus, Active on Mycobacterium tuberculosis (B.K),
Antiviral (VIH, HBV and rotavirus)
Product Example validated by HORIBA Medical:
ANIOS detergent disinfectant ; WIP’ANIOS ; ref: 1316.424
Please also refer to the W.H.O (World Health Organization) guidelines: «Laboratory Biosafety
Manual, 2nd edition», for further information.
5.2. Instrument internal cleaning
5.2.1. Concentrated cleaning

Counting chambers and hydraulics parts are decontaminated by using the «Concentrated cleaning»
function.
5.2.2. Sampling needle

Sampling probe must be decontaminated as follows:
1- Prepare a solution of Sodium Hypochlorite to 100ml/l.
2- Fill a 5ml tube with this solution.
3- Run 5 analysis on bleach.
Technical Manual
1 - 12 RAA027BEN
Introduction
Warning and precautions
6. Warning and precautions

Work safety reliability and general characteristics are guaranteed by HORIBA Medical under the
following conditions:
■ User manual must be enterely read and personnel trained by HORIBA Medical before attempting to
operate instrument.
■ The user always operates with full knowledge and appreciation of instrument warnings, alarms and
flags.
■ Always refer to labeling and HORIBA Medical instructions in order to avoid to compromise system
integrity.
The instrument must be operated as instructed in the user manual. Any other use might compromise
system integrity and might be hazardous for the operator.
The Pentra DX 120 - Pentra DF 120 responds to the Standards and directives named in the Declaration
of Conformity. The latest version of the CE declaration of conformity for this instrument is available on
www.horiba-abx.com
■ The reagents and accessoiries stipulated by HORIBA Medical have been validated in
accordance with the European Directive for in-vitro medical devices (98/79/CE).
■ The use of any other reagents and accessoiries may place at risk the performance of the
instrument, engaging the Users reponsability. In this case, HORIBA Medical takes no
responsability for the device nor for the results rendered.
■ Disposal gloves, eyes protection and lab coat must be worn by the operator.
■ Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.
■ Portable/mobile telephones should not be used in proximity of the instrument.
■ All peripheral devices should be IEC compatible.
6.1. Limited guarantee
The duration of guarantee is stipulated in the Sales conditions associated with the purchase of this
instrument. To validate the guarantee, ensure the following is adhered to:
1- The system is operated under the instructions of this manual.
2- Only software or hardware specified by HORIBA Medical is installed on the instrument. This software
must be the original copyrighted version.
3- Services and repairs are provided by an HORIBA Medical authorized technician, using only HORIBA
Medical approved spare parts.
4- The electrical supply of the laboratory adheres to national or international regulations.
5- The system is operated according to HORIBA Medical recommendations.
6- Specimens are collected and stored in normal conditions.
7- Reagents used are those specified in this user manual.
8- Proper tools are used when maintenance or troubleshooting operations are performed (See Chapter
Maintenance).
If this instrument has been supplied to you by anyone other than HORIBA Medical or an
authorised representative, HORIBA Medical cannot guarantee this product in terms of
specification, latest revision and latest documentation. Further information may be obtained
from your authorised representative.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 1 - 13
Introduction
Warning and precautions
6.2. Safety Precautions
■ Instrument responds to IEC61010-1 norm.

■ Secondary electric circuits are limited to 3.15 ampers by fuse F3 and by fuse F4.
■ Electrical power supply is protected from liquid projections by metalic a protection.
■ In case of accidental leak, liquids are collected and drained by gravity outside the instrument into a
specific overflow tray.
■ Labels on the SPS Evolution front panel remind the use of potentially dangerous products.
6.2.1. Electronic and moving parts

The following parts must not be handled or checked by the user:
■ Electrical Power supply.
■ Electronic circuit boards.
■ Laser device.
Operator injury may occur from an electric shock. Electronic components can shock and
injure the user. Do not tamper with the instrument and do not remove any components
(covers, doors, panels and so on) unless otherwise instructed within this document.
Danger of explosion if battery is not replaced correctly !
When replacing the battery, always use the same and/or equivalent type recommended by
the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's specific
instructions.
Moving parts: It is strictly forbidden to disable sensors as it may cause operator injuries.
Protection covers must not be opened during instrument operations.
Opening the doors and covers (front cover, stainer shutter...) during instrument operations,
causes the instrument emergency stop and running slides are canceled.
LASER: It is strictly forbidden to disable laser cover sensors as it may cause operator injuries.
Laser protection covers must not be opened during instrument operations.
6.2.2. Biological risks
Consider all Specimens, Reagents, Calibrators, Controls, etc… that contain human blood
or serum as potentially infectious ! Use established, good laboratory working practices
when handling specimens. Wear protective gear, Gloves, Lab coats, Safety glasses and/or
Face shields, and follow other bio-safety practices as specified in OSHA Blood borne
Pathogens Rule (29 CFR part 1910. 1030) or equivalent bio-safety procedures.
HORIBA Medical uses disinfectant product for instrument decontamination (including touch screen) and
highly recommends it to decontaminate your instrument.
Technical Manual
1 - 14 RAA027BEN
Introduction
Specifications
7. Specifications
7.1. Technical specifications
7.1.1. Parameters
*MFI%, Imm%, LIC%, LIC#, ALY%, ALY#, IML%, IML#, IMM%, IMM#, IMG%, IMG#, CWBC,
PCT and PDW have not been established as indications for use in United States for this
instrument. Their use should be restricted to research or investigational use only (RUO
parameters).
Parameters Descriptions
WBC White Blood Cell
LYM% Proportional lymphocyte count
LYM# Absolute lymphocyte count
MON% Proportional monocyte count
MON# Absolute monocyte count
NEU% Proportional neutrophil count
NEU# Absolute neutrophil count
EOS% Proportional eosinophil count
EOS# Absolute eosinophil count
BAS% Proportional basophil count
BAS# Absolute basophil count
LIC%* Proportional large Immature cell count
LIC#* Absolute large Immature cell count
ALY%* Proportional atypical lymphocyte count
ALY#* Absolute atypical lymphocyte count
IMG%* Proportional granulocyte Immature cell counts
IMG#* Absolute granulocyte Immature cells counts
IML%* Proportional lymphocyte Immature cell counts
IML#* Absolute lymphocyte Immature cell counts
IMM%* Proportional monocyte Immature cell counts
IMM#* Absolute monocyte Immature cell counts
RBC Red Blood Cell

HGB Hemoglobin concentration
HCT Hematocrit
MCV Mean Corpuscular Volume
MCH Mean Corpuscular Hemoglobin
MCHC Mean Corpuscular Hgb Concentration
RDW Red Distribution Width
PLT Platelets
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 1 - 15
Introduction
Specifications
Parameters Descriptions
PDW* Platelet Distribution Width
MPV Mean Platelet Volume
PCT* Plateletcrit
RET% Proportional Reticulocyte count

RET# Absolute Reticulocyte count
RETL Reticulocytes with Low RNA content
RETM Reticulocytes with Medium RNA content
RETH Reticulocytes with High RNA content
CRC% Corrected Reticulocyte Count
MRV Mean Reticulocyte Volume
MFI* Mean Fluorescence Index
IRF Immature Reticulocyte Fraction
Imm%* Immature cells
ERB% Proportional erythroblast count

ERB# Absolute erythroblast count
CWBC* Corrected White Blood Cell
7.1.2. Throughput analyses
Cycle Auto Manual

CBE (CBC+ERB) 40/h 40/h
CBC 120/h 60/h
DIF 120/h 60/h
RET 120/h 60/h
CBR (CBC+RET) 120/h 60/h
DIR (DIF+RET) 60/h 60/h
ERB 40/h 40/h
7.1.3. Tube identification

By means of Keyboard, internal and external Barcode.
7.1.4. Reagents
■ ABX Diluent (20 Litres).
■ ABX Basolyse (1 Litre, Integrated).
■ ABX Cleaner (1 Litre, Integrated).
■ ABX Fluocyte (1 Litre, Integrated).
■ ABX Alphalyse or ABX Lysebio (1 Litre, Integrated).
■ ABX Leucodiff (1 Litre, Integrated).
Technical Manual
1 - 16 RAA027BEN
Introduction
Specifications
7.2. Physical specifications
Power requirements (without computer)

From 100Vac to 240Vac (+/-10%)
Power supply
50Hz to 60Hz
Power consumption Maximum 900VA
800W in stand by mode
Laser
2000W max.
Printer Depends of printer (See printer’s manual)
Laser specifications
Laser Spectra-Physics Class IIIb 163A, Argon type at 488nm
Emission power 25mW
800W in stand by mode
Power consumption
2000W max.
Dimension and weight

Instrument dimensions h75x w117x d55cm
Instrument weight 110kg
Laser dimensions h14x w16x d28.5cm
Minimum specimen volume

Manual cycle 130µl
Automatic cycle 200µl
Dilution ratios
WBC/HGB 1/234
LMNE 1/80
RBC/PLT 1/10000
BASO 1/200
RETIC 1/3125
Counting aperture diameters

WBC/HGB 100µm
LMNE 60µm
RBC/PLT 50µm
BASO 80µm
RETIC 60µm
HGB measurement
Modified Drabkin method Cyanmethemoglobin
Light source Electroluminescent diode
Wavelength 550nm
Bandwidth 10nm
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 1 - 17
Introduction
Instrument description & technology (Pentra DX
120)
8. Instrument description & technology (Pentra

DX 120)
6 1
2 3
5
1 - Rack holder 4 - Manual sampling device
2 - Rack reception tray 5 - Control panel
3 - Integrated reagents 6 - LCD screen
4
12
3 9
2 5
11
8
7
6
10
1 - Regulated vacuum chamber#1 7 - BASO chamber
2 - Regulated vacuum chamber#2 8 - WBC/HGB chamber
3 - Waste chamber 9 - Cardcage (PC boards)
4 - 5DIFF optical flowcell 10 - Keyboard
5 - RBC chamber 11 - 5DIFF/Retic pump block
6 - LMNE/RETIC chamber 12 - Laser optical bench
Technical Manual
1 - 18 RAA027BEN
Introduction
Reagent specifications
9. Reagent specifications
The HORIBA Medical reagents specified for this instrument has been approved in
accordance with the European Directive 95/79/CE (Annexe III) for in-vitro medical devices.
Refer to annex for all reagent specifications.
The CD-ROM RAX055 delivered with your instrument provides Reagents, Controls and
Calibrators leaflets/msds. Latest versions of these documents are available on www.horiba-
abx.com/documentation.
Waste handling precautions:
When disposing of waste, protective clothing must be worn (lab coat, gloves, eye protection,
etc…). Follow your local and /or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.
■ Ifrequired, waste can be neutralized before being discarded. Follow your laboratory’s protocol when
neutralizing and disposing of waste.
■ Dispose of the waste container according to the local or national regulatory requirements.
HORIBA Medical manufactures and markets reagents, calibrators and control bloods
specially designed for use with this analyzer. The use of products not recommended by
HORIBA Medical may give erroneous results or instrument operation problems. Contact your
HORIBA Medical authorized representative for all information regarding the recommended
products.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 1 - 19
Introduction
Printer
10. Printer
Use the printer supplied or approved by HORIBA Medical.
The user must check the printer compatiblility with the Pentra DX 120 - Pentra DF 120. A list
of compatible printers is available online at www.horiba.com (Medical > Customer support >
Documentation Database > Other > printers).
Technical Manual
1 - 20 RAA027BEN
Hydraulic & Pneumatic principles
2 - Hydraulic & pneumatic principles
1. Pneumatic circuit ..................................................................................................2
2. Compressor ...........................................................................................................3
3. Membrane pump ...................................................................................................3
4. Air cylinders ...........................................................................................................4

4.1. Piercer .................................................................................................................................. 4
4.2. Rinsing of the manual sampling needle ................................................................................ 4
4.3. Commutation valve ............................................................................................................... 5
4.4. Sampling valve ..................................................................................................................... 5
4.5. Grabber operation ................................................................................................................ 6
4.6. Grabber motion .................................................................................................................... 6
5. Liquid valves ..........................................................................................................7

5.1. Principles .............................................................................................................................. 7
5.2. The different types of valves ................................................................................................. 7
5.3. Purpose of the valves ........................................................................................................... 8
6. Hydraulic circuit ..................................................................................................11

6.1. Sample aspiration ............................................................................................................... 11
6.2. Dilutions .............................................................................................................................. 12
7. Hydraulic specifications (Pentra DX 120 only) ..................................................27

7.1. Addition of two hydraulic valves ......................................................................................... 27
7.2. Valve <66> transfer ............................................................................................................. 27
7.3. LMNE chamber ................................................................................................................... 28
7.4. LMNE/RETIC/ERB heater ................................................................................................... 28
8. Pneumatic diagrams ...........................................................................................28
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 2-1
Pneumatic circuit
1. Pneumatic circuit
The instrument compressor delivers the necessary vacuum and pressure needed to operate the
pneumatic and the hydraulic mechanisms.
The pneumatic circuit allows:
■ The operation of the membrane pumps
■ The operation of the air cylinders
■ The backflush into the counting heads
■ The bubbling of the dilutions for perfect mixing
■ The different liquid transfers
■ The rinsing and draining of the different chambers
PNEUMATIC SYNOPTIC
COMPRESSOR
P V
VACUUM PRESSURE
PUMPS
AIR CYLINDERS
BUBBLING
WASTE
CHAMBER
Technical Manual
2-2 RAA027BEN
Compressor
2. Compressor
The compressor delivers the following vacuum and pressure values:
Vacuum
■ -330mb membrane pumps, blood aspiration and waste chamber drain
■ -225mb counting aperture aspiration
Pressure
■ +2.8b air cylinders
■ +1.5b membrane pumps
■ +0.9b backflush
■ +0.1b chamber bubbling
3. Membrane pump
■ Membrane pumps are composed of 2 compartments separated by a soft membrane.
■ One side of the membrane is connected to the vacuum/pressure circuit through a valve.
■ When a vacuum is applied on one side of the membrane, it generates an aspiration on the other side
of the membrane which is connected to a reagent.
REAGENT
-330mb
■ When the vacuum/pressure valve is activated, the membrane pushes the reagent into the hydraulic
circuit.
CHAMBER
1.5b
4 different membrane pumps can be found with the following volumes:

■ 0.5ml , 1.0ml, 2.5ml, 5.0ml
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 2-3
Air cylinders
4. Air cylinders
4.1. Piercer
The piercer air cylinder is activated by a 2.8b pressure through valve <1>. When the sample tube is in
the piercing position, valve <1> is activated and the pressure is sent to the bottom of the air cylinder.
The piercing needle link to the piston is pushed through the cap of the sample tube. When sampling is
completed, valve <1> is activated and the air contained in the bottom part of the air cylinder is freed and
the 2.8b pressure is applied to the top of the air cylinder. The piercing needle returns to its home position.
2.8b
2.8b
4.2. Rinsing of the manual sampling needle
■ The air cylinder of the rinsing carriage is activated by a 2.8b pressure through valve <53>. When blood
aspiration is completed, valve <53> is activated and the pressure is sent to the top of the air cylinder.
The rinsing carriage, being attached to the piston is pushed along the needle for the rinsing.
■ When rinsing is completed, valve <53> is activated and the pressure is sent to the bottom of the air
cylinder and the rinsing carriage returns to its position.
2.8b 2.8b
53 53
Technical Manual
2-4 RAA027BEN
Air cylinders
4.3. Commutation valve
■ The air cylinder of the commutation valve is activated with a 2.8b pressure through valve <58>. When
manual sampling bar is pressed, valve <58> is activated, the pressure is sent to the top of the air
cylinder. The mobile part of the valve, being attached to the piston, moves to the manual position which
allows manual blood aspiration.
■ When aspiration is completed, the pressure is sent to the bottom of the air cylinder and the mobile part
of the commutation valve returns to its position.
2.8b
58 C.Tube
2.8b
58
O.Tube
In piercing mode, the commutation valve is not activated.
4.4. Sampling valve
■ The sampling valve air cylinder is activated with a 2.8b pressure through valve <3>.
■ When blood aspiration is detected by the photo-cell, valve <3> is activated and the pressure is sent
to the top of the air cylinder. The mobile part of the sampling valve moves and allows the splitting of
the blood samples into different volumes contained in the loops for the different dilutions.
■ When the transfers are completed, the pressure is sent to the bottom part of the air cylinder and the
mobile part of the valve returns to its home position.
2.8b 2.8b
3 3
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 2-5
Air cylinders
4.5. Grabber operation
Grabber jaws are activated by a 2.8b pressure through valve <68>. The operation of the jaws allows the
grabbing of the sampling tube inside the rack.
2.8b
68
2.8b
68
4.6. Grabber motion
The grabber motion from the tbe grabbing position to the piercing position is activated through a 2.8b
pressure through valve <67>.
67
2.8b
67
2.8b
Technical Manual
2-6 RAA027BEN
Liquid valves
5. Liquid valves
5.1. Principles
Liquid valves are composed of the following parts:
6 1
3
5 4
2
1- A cover specific for each type of valve: 2 ways, 3 ways, 3 ways 4 inlets.
2- A solenoid (electro-magnet) 4w or 6w according to the valve.
3- An holding clip.
4- An axis equiped with a nucleous (attracted or pushed by the solenoid) and 2 springs.
5- A valve body.
6- A membrane (attached to a lever) which comes into contact with the different inlets.
5.2. The different types of valves
2 ways Valves
NOT ACTIVATED ACTIVATED
1 2 1 2 Schematization
1
3 ways Valves
Not activated Activated Schematization

1 3 2 1 3 2 1 2
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 2-7
Liquid valves
5.3. Purpose of the valves
WBC Chamber
Valve # Function Type

39 WBC chamber drain 3 ways
13 WBC chamber bubbling 2 ways
23 WBC counting 2 ways
26 WBC chamber rinsing 2 ways
RBC Chamber

38 RBC chamber drain 3 ways
6 RBC chamber bubbling 2 ways
22 RBC counting 2 ways
25 RBC chamber rinsing 2 ways
BASO Chamber

40 BASO chamber drain 3 ways
17 BASO chamber bubbling 2 ways
24 BASO counting 2 ways
27 BASO chamber rinsing 2 ways
LMNE(/RETIC/ERB) Chamber (Pentra DX 120 only)

41(+66 Pentra DX 120) LMNE/RETIC/ERB chamber drain 3 ways (+3 ways)
20 LMNE/RETIC/ERB chamber bubbling 2 ways
28+29 LMNE sample transfer 2 x 2 ways
31+32+33+34 LMNE measure 2 ways+3 ways+2x 2 ways
75+76 RETIC sample transfer (Pentra DX 120 only) 2x 2 ways
31+32+33+72 RETIC measure (Pentra DX 120 only) 2 ways+3 ways+2x 2 ways
Regulated vacuum chamber #1

42 Vacuum/Pressure input 3 ways
43 Chamber #1 drain 3 ways
Regulated vacuum chamber #2

Technical Manual
2-8 RAA027BEN
Liquid valves

47 Chamber #2 drain 2 ways
Waste chamber #2

45 Waste chamber #3 drain 2 ways
Lyse pump H

12 Aspiration/Lyse transfer 2 ways
Basolyse pumps D and E

15 Sample dilution Pump D 3 ways
16 BASO dilution Pump E 3 ways
59 ABX Basolyse heating 3 ways
Leucodiff pump B

19 Aspiration/Lyse transfer 3 ways
Cleaner pumps C

55 Transfer of 0.5ml Cleaner into the WBC chamber 3 ways
55+56 Transfer of 0.5ml Cleaner into the LMNE/RETIC chamber 2x 3 ways
55+57 Transfer of 0.5ml Cleaner into the BASO chamber 2x 3 ways
Diluent pump A

5 RBC/PLT sample dilution 3 ways
Diluent pumps F1 and F2

8 WBC dilution 3 ways
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 2-9
Liquid valves

8+30 WBC sample dilution 3 ways
Diluent pump G

62 Transfer of 1ml Diluent into the LMNE/RETIC chamber 3 ways
Diluent pump I

10+52+49 Rinsing of the manual sampling needle 3 ways+2x 2 ways
10+50+51 Rinsing of the piercing needle 2x 3 ways+2 ways
10+48+51 Backflush into the piercing needle 2x 3 ways+2 ways
Fluocyte Retic pump J (Pentra DX 120 only)

65 Aspiration/2.5ml Fluocyte transfer to LMNE/RETIC chamber 3 ways
Fluocyte NRBC pump K (Pentra DX 120 only)

80 Aspiration/1ml Fluocyte transfer to LMNE/RETIC chamber 3 ways
5DIFF syringes

32 Diluent hydrodynamic sleeving 3 ways
36 Diluent aspiration with the M1 syringe 3 ways
35 Diluent aspiration with the sample syringe 3 ways
5DIFF syringes

1 Piercing needle operation 3 ways
2 Tube aeration/sample aspiration 3 ways
3 Sampling valve operation 3 ways
53 Rinsing carriage operation (Manual sampling needle) 3 ways
58 Manual/Piercer commutation valve operation 3 ways
60 Piercing needle rinsing 3 ways
61 Rinsing of the sampling lines with Cleaner 3 ways
67 Grabber translation 3 ways
68 Grabber operation (Opening/Closing) 3 ways
Technical Manual
2 - 10 RAA027BEN
Hydraulic circuit
6. Hydraulic circuit
6.1. Sample aspiration
Manual sampling
2 48
44
Compressor
V
C2
Waste
Vacuum Chamber
#3
-330mb
C1
Sample aspiration is performed using the vacuum generated in the waste chamber by the vacuum head
of the compressor. The sample flows through the sampling valve and is detected by the 2 photocells
located on each side of the sampling valve. Wen sampling is completed, the sampling valve is activated
and aspiration stops. The different blood volumes are retained in the sample loops.
Closed tube sampling
2 48
44
Compressor
V
C2
Waste
Vacuum Chamber
#3
-330mb
C1
Blood aspiration on closed tubes is performed in the same way as in the open tube aeration in order to
equilibrate the vacuum/pressure remaining in the tube.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 2 - 11
Hydraulic circuit
6.2. Dilutions
RBC/PLT dilution
Diluent 1
Waste
BASO
RBC
Diluent 2
A
■ Diluent is aspirated then pushed by the membrane pump A through valve <5> to the sampling valve.
■ The 5ml of Diluent are split into 2 parts before reaching the sampling valve. One part passes through
the valve capilarity and pushes the RBC/PLT blood sample, the other part dilutes the sample before
reaching the RBC/PLT chamber.
WBC/HGB dilution
ABX Lyse
12
Diluent 1
Waste
BASO
Diluent 2
F1 F2
30 WBC
HGB
■ The Diluent is aspirated and pushed by the 2 membrane pumps F1 and F2 through valve <8>. Valve
<30> sends one part of the diluent to the sampling valve in order to push the WBC/HGB sample into
the WBC/HGB chamber. The other part of the diluent is mixed with the Lyse (Aspirated by membrane
pump H through valve <12>) and pushed into the WBC/HGB chamber.
Technical Manual
2 - 12 RAA027BEN
Hydraulic circuit
BASO dilution
16 15
Diluent 1
Waste
BASO
E D
Diluent 2
59
BASO
■ The ABX Basolyse is aspirated then pushed by membrane pumps D and E through valves <15> and
<16>.
■ At the output of valve <15>, the ABX Basolyse pushes the sample trough the sampling valve into the
BASO chamber.
■ Valve <59> sends the reagent either directly into the BASO chamber or through the ABX Basolyse
heater, then into the chamber.
LMNE dilution (Pentra DF 120)
ABX Leucodiff
62
19
Diluent 1 LMNE
Waste
BASO
G
Diluent 2
■ The ABX Diluent is aspirated, then pushed by membrane pump G through valve <62> into the LMNE/
NRBC/RETIC chamber via the heater.
■ The ABX Leucodiff is aspirated, then pushed by membrane pump B through valve <19>. At the output
of this valve, ABX Leucodiff pushes the LMNE sample from the sampling valve to the LMNE/NRBC/
RETIC chamber via the heater.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 2 - 13
Hydraulic circuit
LMNE dilution (Pentra DX 120)
ABX Leucodiff
62
19
Diluent 1 LMNE
Waste
BASO
G
Diluent 2
■ TheABX Diluent is aspirated, then pushed by membrane pump G through valve <62> into the LMNE/
NRBC/RETIC chamber via the heater.
■ The ABX Leucodiff is aspirated, then pushed by membrane pump B through valve <19>. At the output
of this valve, ABX Leucodiff pushes the LMNE sample from the sampling valve to the LMNE/NRBC/
RETIC chamber.
LMNE Transfer to the optical bench
T2 T1
44
Compressor
V 29 28 41
LMNE 66
Waste
Vacuum Chamber
#3
-330mb
■ When the reaction in the LMNE/RETIC chamber is completed, the dilution is aspirated by the vacuum
in the waste chamber. When valves <28> and <29> are activated, the dilution volume included between
the 2 «T» connectors (T1 & T2) is transferred to the LMNE optical bench flowcell for the matrix
determination.
Technical Manual
2 - 14 RAA027BEN
Hydraulic circuit
RETIC dilution (Pentra DX 120 only)
ABX Fluocyte
LMNE
65
■ The ABX Fluocyte is aspirated, then pushes by the membrane pump J through valve <65> directly into
the LMNE/RETIC/ERB chamber. At the output of this valve. The ABX Fluocyte pushes the RETIC
sample from the sampling valve to the LMNE/RETIC/ERB chamber.
Transfer to the laser optic bench:
T2 T1
44
Compressor
V 76 75 71
LMNE 66
Waste
Vacuum Chamber
#3
-330mb
■ When the reaction in the LMNE/RETIC/ERB chamber is completed, the dilution is aspirated by the
vacuum in the waste chamber. When valves <75> and <76> are activated, the dilution volume included
between the 2 «T3» connectors (T1 & T2) is transferred to the laser optic bench flowcell for the RETIC
matrix determination.
6.2.1. Mixing
■ Each chamber containing a blood dilution is homogeneized by a flow of air bubbles coming from the
bottom of the chamber. This air pressure is regulated at 0.1b before being adjusted for the LMNE
chamber by an adjustable restrictor or by a specific length of calibrated tubing for the other chambers.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 2 - 15
Hydraulic circuit
RBC/PLT chamber bubbling
1.5b
2.8b
Pressure
RBC
0.1b
Compressor
P 0.25x110mm
35ml/mm
6 38
WBC/HGB chamber bubbling
1.5b
2.8b
Pressure
WBC
HGB
0.1b
Compressor
P 0.25x154mm
25ml/mm
13 39
BASO chamber bubbling
1.5b
2.8b
Pressure
BASO
0.1b
Compressor
P 0.25x324mm
12ml/mm
17 40
LMNE/RETIC chamber bubbling
1.5b
2.8b
Pressure LMNE
0.1b
Compressor
P LMNE
20 3ml/mm
Technical Manual
2 - 16 RAA027BEN
Hydraulic circuit
6.2.2. Measurements
Resistive measurements: RBC/WBC/PLT/BASO
Compressor
42 23 24 22
V
Reg.
Vacuum Vacuum Vacuum
Chamber
#1 WBC
-225mb RBC BASO
HGB
■ Resistive
measurement are performed by aspiration comes from the vacuum head of the compressor.
The 225mb vacuum is regulated and connected to a regulated vacuum chamber.
Backflush into the resistive chambers
1.5b
2.8b
0.9b
Pressure
42 23 24 22
Compressor
P
Reg.
Vacuum
Chamber
#1 WBC
-225mb RBC BASO
HGB
■ The backflush is performed by the pressure head of the compressor through the waste chamber and
regulated to 0.9b by the backflush regulator. This pressure is carried out in between the 2 resistive
counts.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 2 - 17
Hydraulic circuit
Rinsing the resistive chambers
Compressor
42 23 24 22
V
Reg.
Chamber
#1 WBC
-225mb RBC BASO
HGB
Diluent 1 Cleaner
26 25 27
Waste
BASO
Diluent 2
■ The resistive counting heads are between the 2 counts, the WBC/HGB counting head is rinsed with
ABX Cleaner, the RBC/PLT and BASO counting heads are rinsed with Diluent.
LMNE optical and resistive measurements
Diluent 1
Waste
BASO
Diluent 2
34
T2 T1
31 33 36
32
Compressor
V 46
35
A B C
Vacuum Vacuum
Reg.
Vacuum
Chamber
#2
Technical Manual
2 - 18 RAA027BEN
Hydraulic circuit
■ The LMNE dilution contained between the connectors «T1» and «T2» is aspirated and pushed through
the LMNE flowcell for a very smooth flow of liquids. Sample flow is obtained by syringe A, the double
liquid sleeving is obtained by syringes B and C. The sample stream passes through a calibrated
aperture located inside the LMNE flowcell which gives the resistive measure (2 electrodes are placed
on each side of the flowcell) and in front of the optical windows for the absorbance measurement.
RETIC resistive, scatter and fluorescence measurements (Pentra DX 120 only)
Diluent 1
Waste
BASO
Diluent 2
72
T2 T1
78 77 36
73
Compressor
V 46
35
A B C
Vacuum Vacuum
Reg.
Vacuum
Chamber
#2
■ The RETIC dilution contained between connectors «T1» and «T2» is aspirated and pushed through the
RETIC flowcell in order to have a laminar flow of liquids. Sample flow is obtained by syringe A, the
double hydrofocusing is obtained by syringes B and C. The sample stream passes through a calibrated
aperture located inside the RETIC flowcell which gives the resistive measurement (2 electrodes are
placed on each side of the flowcell) and in front of the optical windows for the scatter measurement.
■ The fluorescence measurement is obtained through the RETIC flowcell by the reception of the
fluorescence patern on a photomultiplier through an interferential filter having the specific wavelength
of thiazol orange.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 2 - 19
Hydraulic circuit
Backflush into the optical flowcell (Pentra DX 120 only)
34
Reg.
Vacuum
37 Chamber
#2
A B C
Compressor
P V
Waste
Chamber
#3
Vacuum -330mb
-330mb
■ The backflush into the LMNE chamber is performed using pressure coming from regulated chamber
#2. The output 7 of the LMNE flowcell is connected to the waste chamber and allows the liquid
aspiration.
■ The 60µm aperture of the LMNE flowcell is cleaned on both sides.
Technical Manual
2 - 20 RAA027BEN
Hydraulic circuit
Backflush into the RETIC flowcell
72
Reg.
Vacuum
74 Chamber
#2
A B C
Compressor
P V
Waste
Chamber
#3
Vacuum -330mb
-330mb
■ The backflush into the RETIC chamber is performed using pressure coming from regulated chamber
#2. The output 7 of the RETIC flowcell is connected to the waste chamber and allows the liquid
aspiration. The 60µm aperture of the RETIC flowcell is cleaned on both sides.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 2 - 21
Hydraulic circuit
6.2.3. Rinsing
External rinsing of the manual sampling needle
Diluent 1
Waste
BASO
10 61 Diluent 2
52
I
49
Compressor
P V
Waste
Chamber
#3
Vacuum -330mb
-330mb
■ The membrane pump 1 aspirates and pushes 1ml of diluent through valve <10> to the top input of the
rinsing carriage. The diluent goes through a restrictor for a regular flow during a precise time
corresponding to the descent of the carriage along the sampling needle. During this time, the bottom
output of the carriage is connected to the 330mb vacuum of the waste chamber which allows the
rinsing liquids to be aspirated into the chamber.
Internal rinsing of the manual sampling needle
48
10 61
Compressor
P V
Waste
Chamber
#3
Vacuum -330mb
-330mb
49
■ The membrane pump 1 aspirates and pushes 1ml of Diluent through valve <10> to valve <48> which
allows the backflush cleaning of the sampling valve and the bottom input of the carriage which is
connected to the 330mb vacuum of waste chamber #3.
Technical Manual
2 - 22 RAA027BEN
Hydraulic circuit
Piercing needle rinsing, sampling channel
Diluent 1
48
10 61
Waste
BASO
Diluent 2
Compressor
P V
Waste
Chamber
#3
Vacuum -330mb
-330mb
51
■ The membrane pump 1 aspirates and pushes 1ml of Diluent through valve <10> to valve <48> which
allows the backflush cleaning of the sampling channel of the piercing needle then aspirates by the
bottom input of the rinsing block which is connected to the 330mb vacuum of waste chamber #3.
Piercing needle rinsing, atmosphere chanel
Diluent 1
10 61
Waste
BASO
Diluent 2 50
I
51
Compressor
P V
Waste
Chamber
#3
Vacuum -330mb
-330mb
■ The membrane pump 1 aspirates and pushes 1ml of diluent through valve <10> to valve <50> which
allows the backflush cleaning of the sampling valve and the commutation valve. The diluent is pushed
through the atmosphere channel of the piercing needle then aspirated by the bottom input of the
rinsing block which is connected to the 330mb vacuum of waste chamber #3.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 2 - 23
Hydraulic circuit
Drying the piercing needle
44 60
Compressor
V
50
Waste
Vacuum Chamber
#3
-330mb
52
Waste
6.2.4. Drainage
■ Drainage of the chambers is performed using the vacuum generated in the waste chambers. Drainage
is controlled by photodetector which are automatically stop the cycle in progress and trigger the
corresponding alarm.
RBC/PLT chamber drain
Compressor
42
V
RBC
Reg.
Chamber 38
#1
-225mb
Technical Manual
2 - 24 RAA027BEN
Hydraulic circuit
WBC/HGB chamber drain
44
Compressor
WBC
V HGB
Waste 39
Vacuum Chamber
#3
-330mb
BASO chamber drain
44
Compressor
V BASO
Waste 40
Vacuum Chamber
#3
-330mb
LMNE chamber, LMNE circuit (Pentra DF 120)
T2 T1
44
Compressor
V 29 28 41
LMNE
Waste
Vacuum Chamber
#3
-330mb
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 2 - 25
Hydraulic circuit
LMNE/RETIC/ERB chamber, LMNE circuit (Pentra DX 120)
T2 T1
44
Compressor
V 29 28 41
LMNE 66
Waste
Vacuum Chamber
#3
-330mb
Technical Manual
2 - 26 RAA027BEN
Hydraulic specifications (Pentra DX 120 only)
7. Hydraulic specifications (Pentra DX 120 only)
7.1. Addition of two hydraulic valves
■ Valve <79> for ABX Fluocyte distribution.

■ Valve <80> to drive the new ABX Fluocyte pump.
Location (Rear side of the pneumatical door):
7.2. Valve <66> transfer
■ The valve <66> has been transferred as shown below (1):
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 2 - 27
Pneumatic diagrams
7.3. LMNE chamber
■ The LMNE chamber has been removed (2) . This one is now replaced by the LMNE/RETIC/ERB heater.
7.4. LMNE/RETIC/ERB heater
■ The ABX Fluocyte, ABX Diluent and ABX Leucodiff are now regulated to 37°C by means of the Reagent
heater. This one is located at the rear of the pneumatical door.
This heater includes 5 heating coils allowing reagent heating for the following:
■ ABX Fluocyte (1): 2 coils for the RET analysis
■ ABX Fluocyte (2): 1 coil for the ERB analysis
■ ABX Diluent: 1 coil
■ ABX Leucodiff:
- Pentra DF 120: 1 coil
- Pentra DX 120: 1 coil if the instrument is not modified, not used if the instrument is modified (see
RAN458 technical note: NRBC’s modification).
8. Pneumatic diagrams
See pneumatic diagrams on next page
Technical Manual
2 - 28 RAA027BEN
Electric & Electronic principles
3 - Electric & Electronic principles
1. Power supply module ...........................................................................................3

1.1. Description ........................................................................................................................... 3
1.2. Main supply socket ............................................................................................................... 3
1.3. Main supply filter .................................................................................................................. 4
1.4. Toric transformer .................................................................................................................. 4
1.5. Power supply board ............................................................................................................. 4
1.6. Power supply connectors ..................................................................................................... 7
2. Electronic boards ................................................................................................10
3. Electronic boards description ............................................................................11

3.1. Preamplifier board #1 XAA203C ......................................................................................... 11
3.2. Preamplifier board #2 XAA203C ......................................................................................... 12
3.3. Pulse Board #1 XAA254E ................................................................................................... 13
3.4. Pulse Board #2 XAA254E ................................................................................................... 15
3.5. 5DIFF Pump motor driver XAA255C ................................................................................... 17
3.6. OD Preamplifier board XAA256B ........................................................................................ 18
3.7. OD Signal board XAA257D ................................................................................................. 20
3.8. RES/BASO Signal board XAA262A (Pentra DF 120)/XAA262B (Pentra DX 120) ............... 22
3.9. 5DIFF Pump motor filter board XAA306A ........................................................................... 23
3.10. LCD Board XAA325D ....................................................................................................... 24
3.11. Power supply board XAA327B ......................................................................................... 26
3.12. Pressure vacuum board XAA328B ................................................................................... 28
3.13. Matricial keyboard XAA331B ............................................................................................ 30
3.14. G96 Mother board XAA335B ............................................................................................ 31
3.15. Stepper motor command board XAA336C ...................................................................... 33
3.16. Stepper motor power board XAA337B ............................................................................. 35
3.17. RS232/Printer board XAA338B ........................................................................................ 37
3.18. Alarm board XAA339B ...................................................................................................... 39
3.19. Cells board XAA343B ....................................................................................................... 41
3.20. WBC/RBC/PLT/HGB Signal board XAA346B .................................................................. 42
3.21. Interface board #1 XAA349A ............................................................................................ 44
3.22. Interface board #2 XAA349A ............................................................................................ 45
3.23. Temperature control board XAA350B .............................................................................. 47
3.24. Distribution board XAA362B ............................................................................................. 48
3.25. Light bars board XAA372A ............................................................................................... 49
3.26. Optical bench board XAA380B (Pentra DX 120 only) ...................................................... 50
3.27. Fluologic board XAA397A (Pentra DX 120 only) .............................................................. 52
3.28. JCM340V2 Microprocessor board XAA493B ................................................................... 54
3.29. IDE hard disk .................................................................................................................... 56
3.30. Floppy disk ....................................................................................................................... 56
4. Flat cables list ......................................................................................................58
5. Wirings .................................................................................................................59
5.1. Pneumatic door wiring XBA282 .......................................................................................... 59
5.2. Preamplifier board supply wiring XBA283 .......................................................................... 60
5.3. Mother board wiring XBA284 ............................................................................................. 61
5.4. Front panel board supply wiring XBA285 ........................................................................... 62
5.5. Floppy disk/Barcode and reagent wiring XBA286 .............................................................. 63
5.6. Diode rectifier bridge supply XBA287 ................................................................................ 64
5.7. Compressor wiring XBA288 ............................................................................................... 65
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3-1
5.8. HGB wiring XBA289 ........................................................................................................... 66

5.9. Pump motor boards wiring XBA290 ................................................................................... 67
5.10. Tube presence and LED wirings XBA291 ......................................................................... 68
5.11. Keyboard and vacuum pressure board wiring XBA293 ................................................... 69
5.12. Piercing carriage wiring XBA294 ...................................................................................... 70
5.13. Integrated reagent wiring XBA295 .................................................................................... 71
5.14. Piercing carriage wiring XBA296 ...................................................................................... 72
5.15. Blood detection cell XBA304 ............................................................................................ 73
5.16. LMNE Chamber coaxial XBA308 ...................................................................................... 74
5.17. Barcode and tube detector wiring XBA309 ...................................................................... 75
5.18. WBC Electrode coaxial XBA314 ....................................................................................... 76
5.19. Home (Motor loading/Rotative tray/piercer) XBA342 ....................................................... 77
5.20. Laser supply control wiring XBA348 (Pentra DX 120 only) .............................................. 78
5.21. Fluologic board supply wiring XBA349 (Pentra DX 120 only) .......................................... 79
5.22. PMT wiring XBA350 (Pentra DX 120 only) ....................................................................... 80
5.23. Diffraction photodiode wiring XBA351 (Pentra DX 120 only) .......................................... 81
5.24. Fluo CIS coaxial wiring XBA354 (Pentra DX 120 only) .................................................... 82
5.25. Laser assy wiring XBA374 (Pentra DX 120 only) ............................................................. 83
5.26. Waste chamber detection cell XBA614 ............................................................................ 84
5.27. LMNE transfer cell/RBC-WBC/HBB-BASO drain XBA619 ............................................... 85
5.28. Compressor wiring XCA179 ............................................................................................. 86
5.29. ABX Basolyse heater wiring XDA499 ............................................................................... 87
6. Electronic principles ...........................................................................................88

6.1. Measure and signal processing .......................................................................................... 88
6.2. Controls and commands .................................................................................................... 93
6.3. Inputs/Outputs .................................................................................................................... 99
7. Synoptics ...........................................................................................................102
Technical Manual
3-2 RAA027BEN
Power supply module
1. Power supply module
1.1. Description
The instrument power supply is a complete module providing required supplies to the different parts of
the instrument. It also provides aperture currents for the blood cell counts and the 5V logic voltage. It
also controls the vacuum and pressure signals through the vacuum pressure board located in the
module.
The power supply module can be operated seperately from the instrument.
The maximum usable power is 800VA.

Instrument needs a maximum power of 750VA in peaks.
The module voltage selector allows the instrument operation under the following voltages (50/60Hz):
100V, 120V, 220V, 240V.
If the supply module is not auto-adaptable (P/n: XBA362), check the voltage value read on
the voltage selector before connecting the instrument on the main supply.
The power supply module includes:

■A main supply socket
■A main supply filter
■A toric transformer
■A power supply board
■A cooling fan
■A vacuum/pressure board
1.2. Main supply socket
The main supply socket is equipped with the ON/OFF switch, 2 primary fuses and a voltage selector.
When instrument is operated on 100/120V, main fuses must be 8A, slow-blow 120V.
When instrument is operating on 220/240V, main fuses must be 4A, slow-blow 250V.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3-3
Power supply module
1.3. Main supply filter
A large band main supply filter is installed in the module to reduce the electrical interferences.
This shielded filter is located behind the power supply board.
1.4. Toric transformer
A toric transformer provides the secondary voltages. This transformer is equipped with a thermal
protection switch and gives the following secondary voltages:
■ 120Vac for the compressor supply through a compressor relay (K1).
■ 150Vac for the aperture currents.
■ 30Vac for the electrovalve operation.
■ 30Vac for the heater supplies.
■ 30Vac for the 5V logic supply.
■ 30Vac for the 9V optical bench lamp supply.
■ 22Vac for the +18V/ -18V for the preamplifier boards and the linear regulators.
■ 30Vac for the +12V logic and hard disk drive supplies.
■ 25Vac for the -24V (Pump motor driver board) and the -12V (RS232/FIFO printer board).
1.5. Power supply board
The power supply board includes: Switching power supplies which provide the different direct and
filtered supplies required for the instrument operation.
+5V logic voltage
Technical Manual
3-4 RAA027BEN
Power supply module
+9,4V optical bench lamp supply
+12V logic voltage / hard disk supply
+24V electrovalve supply
The switching supplies are protected in short-circuits, the +5V and the +12V are over voltage
protected.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3-5
Power supply module
+24V heaters and robotic transfers
Linear power supplies and high voltages for the aperture currents
+60V RBC aperture current, +60V WBC aperture current, +100V BASO aperture current, and +60V
LMNE aperture current.
+18V/-18V for the preamplifiers
Technical Manual
3-6 RAA027BEN
Power supply module
-24V for the 5DIFF pump motor/-12V for the RS232
1.6. Power supply connectors
Electrical connectors directly installed on the board to reduce the electrical wirings meaning less
possible electrical interferences.
J5/J7/J8
J2/J9
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3-7
Power supply module
J1
J4
J3
Technical Manual
3-8 RAA027BEN
Power supply module
J11
■ Control LEDs for each of the provided electrical supply, associated with a test point, a protection fuse
and an adjustment potentiometer.
■A commun ground point for all test points and adjustments.
Test points are for control only, they should not debit any current (Oscilloscope and
Amperemeter are prohibited).
Fuses characteristics are as follow:

■ F1:3.15A 250V Slow blow
■ F5:10A 250V Slow blow
■ F6: TT 0.2A 250V
■ F12 and F13:
For 220/240V: 4A 250V Slow blow
For 110/120V: 8A 250V Slow blow
Voltage selector positions (If non auto-adjustable supply XBA362):

1: 100V
2: 120V
3: 220V
4: 240V
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3-9
Electronic boards
2. Electronic boards
Board name Part Number
Preamplifier #1 Board
XAA203C
Preamplifier #2 Board
Pulse #1 Board
XAA254E
Pulse #2 Board
5DIFF Pump Board XAA255C
Optical Distribution Preamplifier Board XAA256B
Optical Distribution Signal Board XAA257D
XAA262A (Pentra DF 120)
Baso Signal Board
XAA262B (Pentra DX 120)
Filter Motor Board XAA306A
LCD Board XAA325D
Power Supply Board XAA327B
Vacuum/Pressure Board XAA328B
Keyboard Board XAA331B
Main Board G96 XAA335B
Command Motor Board XAA336C
Motor Power Board XAA337B
4RS Printer Board XAA338B
Alarm board XAA339B
Cell Board XAA343B
RBC/WBC/PLT/HGB Board XAA346B
Interface Board #1
XAA349A
Interface Board #2
Temperature Regulation Board XAA350B
Distribution Board XAA362B
Light bar Board XAA372A
Laser Bench Board XAA380B
Fluologic Board XAA397A
JCM340V2 Board XAA493B
Technical Manual
3 - 10 RAA027BEN
Electronic boards description
3. Electronic boards description
3.1. Preamplifier board #1 XAA203C
Function
The variations of the signal are too small to be analysed without any amplification. This preamplifier is
very sensitive, and it is located very close to the sensor to prevent any noise. A filter reduces the amount
of unusefull signals, to provide a better quality of analysis. Signals come from resistive sensor of the
LMNE chamber and the BASO chamber, and go to the RES/BASO SIGNALS BOARD.
Location
In the back of the pneumatical door, it is the top right board.
Description
■ Components: Resistors, transistors, Op-amplifier.
■ Supply: +/-18V, AC3 and AC4.
■ Tests points and settings: None.
View component side
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 11
Synoptic diagram
To ODR
LMNE Chamber
(ODR-BASO
Resistive signal
Signals board)
Current
generator
BASO Chamber To BASO

Resistive signal (ODR-BASO
Signals board)
3.2. Preamplifier board #2 XAA203C
Function
The variations of the signal are too small to be analysed without any amplification. This preamplifier is
very sensitive, and it is located very close to the sensor to prevent any noise. A filter reduces the amount
of unusefull signals, to provide a better quality of analysis. Signals come from resistive sensor of the RBC
chamber and the WBC-HGB chamber, and go to the RBC-WBC-PLT-HGB SIGNALS BOARD.
Location
In the back of the pneumatical door, in the black color box.
Description
■ Components: Resistors, transistors, Op-amplifier.
■ Supply: +/-18V, AC3 and AC4.
Technical Manual
3 - 12 RAA027BEN
View component side
Synoptic diagram
Power supply aperture current
To RBC
RBC Chamber (RBC-WBC-PLT-HGB
Resistive signal Signals board)
To PLT
Current (RBC-WBC-PLT-HGB
generator Signals board)
WBC/HGB Chamber To WBC

Resistive signal (RBC-WBC-PLT-HGB
Signals board)
3.3. Pulse Board #1 XAA254E
Function
This board digitalizes the information about pulses, which are the LMNE absorbance signal, and RES/
BASO HGB-RBC signal, and stores them until the main system takes them. The program of this board
contains a software noise analyser, to distinguish real blood cell from other solid parts existing in the
blood which provide noise between the two electrodes. This board has two channels of analysis (Then
for two count chambers). It is connected to the main system through the G96 bus.
Location
In the rack of electronic's cards (Bus G96), position 5.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 13
Description
■ Components: 2 microprocessors, RAM, ROM.
■ Supply: +5V, +12V
■ Tests points and settings: Factory setting.
View component side
Synoptic diagram
LMNE Absorbance
signal
ODR/BAS
+HGB+RBC
Strap position
■ E1: Board base address (Allows the computer to use this board without conflict with the others).
■ E2: Raw counts to acquisition channels routine.
■ E3: RAMs wait state configuration (Used for compatibility between RAM and processor).
Technical Manual
3 - 14 RAA027BEN
3.4. Pulse Board #2 XAA254E
Function
This board digitalizes the informations about pulses, which are RETIC signal and signals from RBC-
WBC-PLT-HGB board and stores them until the main system takes them. The microprocessor of this
board does a software noise analysis, to distinguish real blood cells from other solid parts of the blood
which provide noise through the two electrodes. This board has two channels of analysis (Then for two
count chambers). It is connected to the main system through the G96 bus.
Location
Description
■ Components: 2 microprocessors, RAM, ROM.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 15
View component side
Synoptic diagram
O.D. Signals
board (DX)
or
Unused (DF)
RBC-WBC-PLT-HGB
Signals board
Strap position
■ E2: Raw counts to acquisition channels routine.
■ E3: RAMs wait state configuration (Used for compatibility between RAM and processor).
Technical Manual
3 - 16 RAA027BEN
3.5. 5DIFF Pump motor driver XAA255C
Function
This board is able to drive a continuous current motor at a constant speed. A sensor sends a speed
information to the board, and the board adjust the current delivered to the motor to set the speed at the
correct value. It permits to have very constant circulation of fluid into the 5DIFF and RETIC chamber. The
principle of this system is called a phase locked loop. It means than the result of an action is compared
to a reference signal, and the command signal for the engine is the result between both of them. This
system is completely analogic, and it has a high accuracy. The main system drives this board with four
commands, and this board generate its own alarm (Through the main system), if the travel time of the
pump is too long.
Location
Description
■ Components: High power transistors, Phase locked loop.
■ Supply: + 24 vh., - 24 v., + 5 v.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 17
View component side
Synoptic diagram
Motor
Command
and
Position
Sensor
Signal
3.6. OD Preamplifier board XAA256B
Function
Converts optical signal into electric signal by using a photocell. This board amplifies the electric signal.
The short distance between the photocell and the amplifier prevents any electromagnetic disturbances.
A filter reduces the amount of unusefull signal. After this board, the signal goes to the O.D. signal board.
Location
Up to the 5DIFF bench, in a metallic box.
Technical Manual
3 - 18 RAA027BEN
Description
■ Components: Photocell, Op-amplifier.
■ Supply: +/-18 v.
■ Tests points and settings:
On the power supply board, check that the voltage on the pin TP2 is: +9.40V +/-0.1 V. (5DIFF lamp
supplied).
Make sure that all optical parts are clean : emission, reception gun lenses and optical flowcell. It is
mandatoryto use optical paper or tissu and to avoid absorbant papers.
Turn R11 anti-clockwise in order to get the maximum voltage at the output of the preamplifer board.
3 possibilities :
1 - the voltage is over -4 v (for example -3.45v), then re-adjust R11 in order to get 4.0+/-0.1v
2 - the voltage is included between -5.5v and -3.9 v. Adjust R11 potentiometer to the maximum less
1/8th of a turn to avoid the mechanical end-position of the potentiometer. Check again that the voltage
is still between -5.5v and -3.9 v
3 - the maximum voltage is less than 5.5v. There is a problem on the optical bench which can be solved
with a check of the lamp connector, a re-adjustment of the lamp position, a lamp replacement, a re-
adjustment of the optical flowcell or a replacement of the whole optical bench.
View component side
Synoptic diagram
Absorbance
To O.D. Signals board
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 19
3.7. OD Signal board XAA257D
Function
This board does first a sort of hardware noise eliminator. It checks if the pulse is correct, and not too
close to the previous pulse. The level of the pulse is compared to a reference level, and if the pulse is
too small, it will be ignored. If the pulse has a correct size, this board will extract from it an information
in accordance to its size. After this board, the pulse will be analysed by a small computer
(Microprocessor 68HC11), and this board does a pre-process for it. The incoming signal is from the
amplifier of the LMNE photocell, and the outcoming signal goes to the PULSE#1 board.
Location
Above the pivot of the pneumatic door.
Description
■ Components: Counters, data-latchs, Op-amplifier.
■ Supply: + 5V, +/-18V
■ Tests
points and settings:
Threshold adjustement (R11), see RAS415B: LMNE adjustments.
Optical gain adjustement (R24), see RAS418A: BASO result adjustment.
Technical Manual
3 - 20 RAA027BEN
View component side
Synoptic diagram
LMNE
Pre-ampli
Board
Absorbance
Signal Absorbance
Signal
to
#1 Pulse
Board
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 21
3.8. RES/BASO Signal board XAA262A (Pentra DF 120)/XAA262B

(Pentra DX 120)
Function
This board extracts information from count chambers after preamplification. The signal is compared to
a threshold level, to eliminate noise. After that, it is amplified, and a peak-detector stores its maximum
value. It is the size information for the microprocessor which will analysed the signal just after this board.
The board gives also the following information, the width and the number of cells.
Location
In the rack of electronic's cards (Bus G96) position 8.
Description
■ Components: Op-amplifier, resistors, capacitor.
■ Supply: +5V, +/-18V
■ XAA262A Tests points and settings:
Threshold adjustement,
Matrix resistive gain adjustement (R1), see RAS415B: LMNE adjustments.
Baso resistive gain adjustement (R27), see RAS418A: BASO result adjustment.
■ XAA262B Tests points and settings:
Potentiometer (R1) is removed
Potentiometer (R19) is replaced by a connector
Technical Manual
3 - 22 RAA027BEN
View component side
Synoptic diagram
ODR Signal
#1 Preampli
Board
RBC-WBC-
PLT-HGB
Signals
board
BASO Signal
#1 Preampli
Board
3.9. 5DIFF Pump motor filter board XAA306A
Function
This board stops all high frequency parts of the command signal. It prevents from any disturbance for
other electronic's board of the instrument.
Location
Just above the motor of the 5DIFF, in the back of the pneumatic door.
Description
■ Components: Selfs, capacitor.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 23
■ Supply: +24VH, -24V, +5V

View component side
Synoptic diagram
Up/down
End Of Run
Sensor
To Pump Motor
Driver Board
Motor
+
Tachymeter
3.10. LCD Board XAA325D
Function
This board does basic routines to drive the LCD display and the keyboards. Then it reduces the amount
of work of the main system. The computer of this board will keep an eye on the keyboard, and if a button
is pressed, it will call the main system. If this one requires to display something (Words, windows, ...), it
sends commands to the local computer, and lets it work. The local computer will do a process in order
to display user's information. Two types of keyboards can be drive by this board. The internal one, and
the external one, which is a common PC-type keyboard. The information for the LCD screen circulates
through the G96 Bus, but the information from the keyboard (Which is the code of the pressed key)
circulates through the serial line between this board and the JCM340 board.
Location
In the rack of electronic's cards (Bus G96) position 11.
Description
■ Components: 68 HC 11 (Microprocessor), RAM, ROM.
Technical Manual
3 - 24 RAA027BEN
■ Supply: +5V, +/-12V

■ Testspoints and settings:
Reduce LCD contrast (To the minimum) in order to have a pale screen:
LCD SHARP LM64P83L: Adjust R12 in order to have -26 +/- 0,5 V in TP1.
Check that the TP2 voltage is lower than -23V.
LCD SHARP LM64183: Adjust R12 in order to have -20 +/- 0,5 V in TP1.
Then, with contrast control buttons + and -, check the symmetry of the contrast setting:
minimal: Screen completely white.
maximal: Screen completely black.
View component side
Synoptic diagram
To JCM340V2
To Display
To External To Matricial
Keyboard Keyboard
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 25
Strap position
■ E1: Page selection (Memory management).
■ E2: Keyboard type ON: QWERTY / OFF: AZERTY
■ E3: RS232 mode (Software compatibility in data transfer).
■ E4: Board base adress (Allows the computer to use this board without conflict with the others).
■ E5: IRQ Selection
■ E6: Boot type (Used to start the internal software).
In case of substitution
The information about the contrast will be lost. Just set it at a correct value.
3.11. Power supply board XAA327B
Function
This board gives regulated and filtered supplies to all equipments of the instrument: From the
transformer, and delivers regulated currents to the different count cell chambers. Some supplies of this
board can be driven by a TTL command (TTL means a standart ON/OFF signal). These TTL lines come
from the interface board #1, through the pressure/vacuum board. They switch all the apperture currents
and the +24VA supply.
Location
Placed under the right back-cover of the instrument (On the left if you are in front of it).
Description
Components: Rectifier, Regulator, Capacitor.
Supply: Depend on the country of use.
Tests points and settings: Checking and adjustement of all voltage supplies (RAS403B: Power supply
module check & adjustment).
Technical Manual
3 - 26 RAA027BEN
View component side & Synoptic diagrams
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 27
3.12. Pressure vacuum board XAA328B
Function
This board has a lot of different purposes. It mesures the pressure in the pressure circuit (+2,8B) and in
the vacuum circuit (-225mB). It drives LEDs of the open tube door, and of the rack loading stack. It
commands the supply of the compressor, and delivers regulated current for the LED in the HGB count
chamber.
Location
Behind the pneumatic door, in the bottom left.
Description
Components: Transistors, Op-amplifier, Pressure sensors.
Supply: +12V, +18V, +24VA, +5V
Technical Manual
3 - 28 RAA027BEN
Tests points and settings: Pressure/Vacuum adjustement, see RAS409A: Pressure/Vacuum adjustment.
View component side
Synoptic diagram
To WBC-HGB
Chamber light
Voltage/Current
Convertissor
On/Off To 2 Lights
signals Bars boards
#1 Interface
To Power Board
Supply board
Compressor
Command
Pressure sensor To Alarm

Board
Vacuum sensor
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 29
3.13. Matricial keyboard XAA331B
Function
The keyboard is a matricial version: It is like a grid, with rows and columns. Keys, when pressed, do a
contact between them. A logical circuit, on the LCD board, does a scanning of the columns with
electrical pulses, and checks, for each columns, if there is a signal back on a row (ex: If it sends a pulse
on the column number 3, and detects the pulse back on the row number 2, it knows that the pressed
button is the (3,2)). Then, it is able to know which key is pressed. If a button goes wrong, then no else
button can work properly. The open door cycle switch is connected to this matrix through an optical
isolator (if this button is always ON, it gives a «keyboard error»). The optical isolator prevents noise from
the long electrical wire of this button (Like an antenna). This board supplies the backlight converter of
the LCD screen.
Location
Under the LCD screen.
Description
■ Components: Buttons, Buzzer.
■ Supply: +12V
View component side
Technical Manual
3 - 30 RAA027BEN
Synoptic diagram
Backlight
Converter
To LCD Board
Open tube
Cycle switch
Strap position
■ E1:Opto-isolator option.
Positions 1-3 and 2-4 if U1 is not on the board.
Positions 3-5 and 4-6 if U1 is on the board.
■ R3: LCD luminosity adjustement:
LCD Backlight R3
SHARP LM64P80 LM000106 180k
EPSON EG9012DNZ CXA0111 180k
SANYO LM55055 32NTK CFP 0
OPTREX DMF50260 NFUFW S12542 0
3.14. G96 Mother board XAA335B
Function
This board has just wires to connect every G96 bus compatible boards together. It replaces a big flat
cable with fifteen plugs on it. The mother board contains some jumpers to set an internal bus, and a
battery to save information during power off (Without battery, some setting could be lost while power
off).
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 31
Location
Above the pneumatic door, behind the electronic boards.
Do not connect the wire normally connected to pin C29 to the +5Vbat (Pin located at the left
hand-side), it destroys the lithium battery and may damage the instrument.
Description
■ Components: Jumper, Big G96 plugs.
■ Supply: +/-12V, +5V, +5Vbat, +24..29V
View component side
Strap position
E1 to E13: Allow, when installed, to propagate the daisy chain, from one connector to the next on the
left side (Chain out to chain in).
Technical Manual
3 - 32 RAA027BEN
3.15. Stepper motor command board XAA336C
Function
This board is an interface between the main system (On the JCM340) and the stepper motor power
board. It stores and executes commands, and gives results when the main system requires them. At first,
the main system sends it a data file, which associate commands to concrete actions. After that, the main
system sends order, in order to activate the motors through this board. This way of working reduces a
lot the amount of work of the main system to manage the step-by-step motors.
An optical coder is fastened to the piercer carriage motor. It prevents from any misplacement of the
carriage (For example, inverting two tubes).
Location
In the rack of electronic's cards (G96 Bus) position 4.
Description
■ Components: Logical circuits, Power circuits (Dedicated to drive stepper motor).
■ Supply: +5V, +12V, +24V
View component side
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 33
Synoptic diagram
To Stepper
Motor
Power board
Strap position (Std)

E2: IRQ selection (The IRQ line calls the processor when needed).
E3: Board base address (Allows the computer to use this board without conflict with the others).
Strap position (CEM)

E2: IRQ Selection (Interrupt request line number), when cards request the JCM340.
E3: Board base adress.
Technical Manual
3 - 34 RAA027BEN
3.16. Stepper motor power board XAA337B
Function
To drive a stepper motor, this board needs to provide them several signals. But these signals are not the
one the microprocessor delivers. Then, with the help of logic components, this board builds them itself
for the motors, according to what the microprocessor on the stepper motor driver board ordered.
Results of position sensors (For this motor) go through this board.
Location
Above the compressor (Rear cover to take out), at the back of the loading system.
Description
■ Components: Logical circuits, Power circuits (Dedicated to drive stepper motor).
■ Supply: +5V, +12V, +24V.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 35
View component side
Synoptic diagram
To Loading
System
To Ejection
System
To Rotative
Tray System To Stepper
Motor
Command
Board
To Piercer
System
To Distribution
System
Technical Manual
3 - 36 RAA027BEN
3.17. RS232/Printer board XAA338B
Function
This board is an external interface for the complete microprocessor system. With it, the main
microprocessor (On the JCM 340) can communicate with the same «language» (or code) than a lot of
other equipments. For example, all the printers have the same interface. If a microprocessor system is
able to speak in this language, all printers will be able to execute what it wants them to do. It is the same
mechanism for the RS232 interface. This one is more general, the microprocessor may exchange data
with a bar-code reader, a host computer, a modem,... The printer interface is fast, but needs a lot of wires
(Parallel transmission), the RS232 is slower, but doesn't need more than 3 wires (Serial transmission).
Location
Description
■ Components: Logical circuits, Microprocessor interface.
■ Supply: +5V
View component side
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 37
Synoptic diagram
Internal barcode reader
External barcode reader
Graphic
Printer
Computer DATA ouput

Modem output
Strap position
■ E2: IRQ logical level priority (Determinates the priority order with the other board when a processor
request occurs).
■ E3: Printer IRQ line.
■ E4: RS232 IRQ line.
■ E5 to E8: RS232 configuration (For compatibility with the second user of the RS232 line).
Technical Manual
3 - 38 RAA027BEN
3.18. Alarm board XAA339B
Function
This board is the bridge between some instrument’s sensors and the JCM 340 Microprocessor board.
It as its own microprocessor (68HC11, less powerful than the 68340). It receive signals from all the
optical sensor mounted on pipes (Blood detection cells and chamber detection cells). It also receives
the following informations: Vacuum and pressure OK and door closed. The user has to set the current
which goes through the fluid detector cells (To have an efficient blood detection). This must be done with
the keyboard and the screen, these setable resistors are driven by the computer. This board also drives
valves number 2 and number 3. They are used to take a sample of blood from a tube.
Location
Description
■ Components: 68HC11, Ram, Rom...
■ Supply: +5V, +/-12V
■ Tests points and settings: Sample detection cells adjustement, software setting, see RAS412A:
Sample detection cells adjustment.
View component side
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 39
Synoptic diagram
Pressure
Vacuum
Sensors
and
Commands
Open tube Software
Door closed Setting
To Reagent
Sensor
To Photocell
Board
Software
Setting
Strap position
■ E3: IRQ selection (Line used when the board requests the microprocessor).
■ E4: Clock isolation of the board.
Set again the current through the blood detection cells and chamber detection cells, and the value of
threshold of detection thresholds.
Technical Manual
3 - 40 RAA027BEN
3.19. Cells board XAA343B
Function
This board divides one multiwire cable into a lot of 4-wire cables. Resistors give current and protect
some leds or photocells.
Location
In the back of the pneumatical door, it is the bottom right board.
Description
■ Components: Plugs, Resistors.
■ Supply: +5V, +/-18V
View component side
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 41
Synoptic diagram
Electrovalve 2&3
Upstream
To Alarm Board
Photocells
3.20. WBC/RBC/PLT/HGB Signal board XAA346B
Function
This board extracts information from count chambers after preamplification. The signal is compared to
a threshold level, to eliminate noise. After that, it is amplified, and a peak-detector stores its maximum
value. It is the size information for the microprocessor which will analyse the signal just after this board.
This board can select one out of two signals at sending to the microprocessor. It permits to have only
one microprocessor for two signals.
Location
Description
■ Components: Op-amplifier, resistors, capacitor.
■ Supply: +5V, +/-18V
■ Testspoints and settings:
Adjustement:
RBC Gain with R19, PLT Gain with R53, WBC gain with R8, see RAS414B: WBC/RBC/PLT Gain
adjustment.
HGB blank adjustement, see RAS413A: HGB Blank adjustment.
Technical Manual
3 - 42 RAA027BEN
View component side
Synoptic diagram
f
ODR/BASO
Signals board
WBC/HGB Chamber To #1
Photodiode Pulse
Board
RBC Resistive
Signal
PLT Resistive
Signal
To #2
Pulse
Board
WBC Resistive
Signal
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 43
3.21. Interface board #1 XAA349A
Function
This board allows the principal system to drive valves number 1 and 4 to 45 of the intrument and to
control the following functions: TTL 12 to TTL 15 switch the apperture current in the count chambers,
TTL 17 switches the heater, TTL 16 and TTL 18 switch the LEDs on the light bar boards, and TTL 11 and
RES signal drive the compressor.
Location
In the rack of electronic's cards (G96 Bus), position 9.
Description
■ Components: Logical circuit, PAL (Programmable array logic)
■ Supply: +5V, +24..29V
■ Test points and settings: There are two XAA349 cards in the instrument. It is the jumper E1 that will
give it its number. If the jumper is set, the board is number 2, otherwise, it is number 1. This jumper will
allow the computer to distinguish them. The other jumpers have the same function, but both cards
have the same setting.
View component side
Technical Manual
3 - 44 RAA027BEN
Synoptic diagram
To Electrovalves 1, 4-26
To Electrovalves 27-45
To Pressure/
Vacuum board
Strap position
Check jumper is well set according to the number of the board being changed.
3.22. Interface board #2 XAA349A
Function
This board allows the principal system to drive valves number <46> to <67> and <90> of the instrument.
The TTL 21 line drives the +24VA supply line.
Location
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 45
Description
■ Components: Logic components, integrated power transistors.
■ Supply: +5V, +24..29V
■ Tests points and settings: There are two XAA349 cards in the instrument. It is the jumper E1 that will
give it its number. If the jumper is set, the board is number 2, otherwise, it is number 1. This jumper will
allow the computer to distinguish them. The other jumpers have the same function, they are used in
case of more cards in the same system.
View component side
Synoptic diagram
To Electrovalves 46-67
To Electrovalves 90
Unused
Strap position
Technical Manual
3 - 46 RAA027BEN
3.23. Temperature control board XAA350B
Function
This board has to regulate the temperature in the reagent heating device. A thermocouple (A fine sensor)
controls accurately the temperature of the heating device heart and another sensor checks for
overheating (For safety). The thermocouple drives a pulse width modulator, which allows a very efficient
temperature control.
Location
In the back of the pneumatic door, inside the white box, it is the left board.
Description
■ Components: Op-amp, Regulator, Logical circuit.
■ Supply: +/-22V, +24V
■ Tests points and settings: BASO chamber and LMNE chamber temperature adjustment (Reference
and Power) see RAS416B: Temperature adjustment.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 47
View component side
Synoptic diagram
To Thermocouple
LMNE Heater
From
#1 Interface
Board
and
Supply
Board
BASO Heater
3.24. Distribution board XAA362B
Function
This board connects together different sort of plugs. It dispatches signals, and has a barcode reader
ground connected jumper.
Location
At the right of the piercer carriage, under the E.V. number 2 and 48.
Technical Manual
3 - 48 RAA027BEN
Description
■ Components: Plugs, Jumper.
View component side and strap position

E1: Barcode cord shield on ground.
Synoptic diagram
Tube Detection To Stepper Motor

Power Board
To internal Barcode To RS232/

Reader Printer Board
3.25. Light bars board XAA372A
Function
Display the state of the open tube door, and of the rack loading system (2 cards).
Location
At the left of the open tube door, and at the left of the loading rack stack.
Description
■ Components: Two chips of leds.
■ Supply: Power for leds.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 49
View component side
Synoptic diagram
To Pressure/Vacuum
Board
3.26. Optical bench board XAA380B (Pentra DX 120 only)
Function
The bench board is inserted in the LMNE circuit. On the board take place a high-voltage supply for the
aperture current of the RETIC chamber, and, after a preamplifier, a multiplexer choose between the
LMNE chamber resistive signal, or the RETIC chamber resistive signal. The selected signal is sent to the
RES/BASO signal board, because the analysis process of these signals are the same. It extracts
information called «size», «width» and «length» from the FSL and OFL signals. It goes directly to the
board pulse #2, to be analyzed the same way than the optical pulse coming from the 5DIFF chamber.
Location
On the laser bench.
Description
■ Components: Op-amp., Resistor, capacitor, Logical circuit.
■ Supply: +12V, +/-18V, +5V
Technical Manual
3 - 50 RAA027BEN
Adjustments
The resistive gains of the DIFF channel, RET channel and ERB channel are adjusted on this board (see
RAS424B: ERB adjustment).
Signal processor board: Potentiometer of the LMNE resistive gain is now transferred to the
Optical bench board.
View component side
Synoptic diagram
From 5DIFF
#1 Preampli To signal
Board Processor
Board
From
Laser bench
To
PMT
Fluologic
Security loop
Board
PMT
High voltage
To #2
Pulse
Fluorescence
Board
From PMT
Diffraction
From
Photodiode
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 51
3.27. Fluologic board XAA397A (Pentra DX 120 only)
Function
This board drives the retic part of the instrument. A digital to analogic converter allows the computer to
drive and to control the high voltage of the photomultiplier. A security line is partly controled from this
board. the laser can be put in low-power mode (25%) if it is not needed. A delay system protects the
user from any undesirable high-power mode. The laser will deliver its high power only 30 to 50 seconds
after user's command. This board also controls the high-power of the laser through the software. The
command for the multiplexer for the 5DIFF/RETIC signals in the laser bench board is sent from this
board.
Location
Description
■ Components: Jumper, Switchs, A/N and N/A convertissor.
View component side
Technical Manual
3 - 52 RAA027BEN
Synoptic diagram
Digital/Analogic
Convertor
To Optical
Bench
Board
Analogic/Digital
Convertor
To LASER
Supply
Cover
Switch
Strap position
E1: Device selection:
Jumper U4 Vdd
1-2 MAX506 +5V
2-3 PM7226 +12V
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 53
3.28. JCM340V2 Microprocessor board XAA493B
Function
Heart of the instrument, computes each information, and gives results to the user. To start his work, the
microprocessor reads a read only memory, in which he can find instructions to set up the low level part
of its software (Basic routines). This program allows it to work with the hard-drive, in which it will find the
high-level part of its software. The software will manage all functions of the instrument through the
JCM340 board, and the other electronic's boards. Different informations are saved in this board during
power off. The RAM disk is saved in a memory supplied by the G96 bus battery, and the RTC (Real Time
Clock) is saved with the internal battery. Some LEDs give information about the status of the main
system.
Location
Description
■ Components: 68340 microprocessor, RAM, ROM, ...
■ Supply: +5V, +Vbat (To save informations while instrument is off).
View component side
Technical Manual
3 - 54 RAA027BEN
Synoptic diagram
G96 BUS
To Floppy Disk
To IDE
Hard Disk
To LCD Board
Strap position
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 55
3.29. IDE hard disk
■ IDE hard disk must be setup as «master» (Jumper setup at the rear of the hard disk).
3.30. Floppy disk
Function
Data exchange with other processor system.
Location
Up to the keyboard, at the left.
Description
■ Components: Magnetic reader head, step-by-step motors, microprocessor.
■ Tests points and settings: See following sheet.
Strap position
Technical Manual
3 - 56 RAA027BEN
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 57
Flat cables list
4. Flat cables list

Length / number of
Reference From To
points
DAD060A 225 mm / 10 pts J3 on OD signal board J2 on N°1 pulse board
J8 on RBC/WBC/PLT/HGB signals
DAD081A 70 mm / 10 pts J3 on RES-BASO signal board
board
J6 on RBC/WBC/PLT/HGB signals board J1 on N°1 pulse board
DAD082A 77 mm / 10 pts
J7 on RBC/WBC/PLT/HGB signals board J1 on N°2 pulse board
DAD085B 240 mm / 10 pts J4 on LCD board P2 on CPU JCM340 board
DAD086B 810 mm / 15 pts J5 on LCD board CN1 on liquid cristal display
DAD087B 900 mm / 20 pts J2 on LCD board J1 on matricial keyboard
J3 on Stepper motors command
DAD088C 720 mm / 50 pts J7 on Stepper motors power board
board
DAD089B 710 mm / 26 pts J1 on Cells board J5 on alarms board
J4 on RS232 FIFO printer board J7 (RS232 output #1)
DAD090C 1180 mm / 10 pts
J5 on RS232 FIFO printer board J8 (RS232 output #2)
J3 on pressure vacuum board J3 on n°1 Interface board
DAD091B 630 mm / 10 pts J7 on optical bench board (Pentra DX J2 on N°2 pulse board (Pentra DX
120) 120)
DAD097B 120 mm / 20 pts J10 on power supply board J1 on pressure vacuum board
DAD092A 1050 mm / 10 pts J2 on Distribution board J2 on RS232 FIFO printer board
DAD101C 500 mm / 4pts Matricial keyboard Backlight converter
DAD106A 1160 mm / 26 pts J6 on RS232 FIFO printer board J8 (graphic printer output)
Shutter board / J5 on optical bench J4 on fluologic board (Pentra DX
DAD114A 530 mm / 14 pts
board (Pentra DX 120) 120)
DAD129A 250 mm / 44 pts P3 on CPU JCM340 board Hard disk
DAD130A 900 mm / 34 pts P3 on CPU JCM340 board Floppy disk
Technical Manual
3 - 58 RAA027BEN
Wirings
5. Wirings
5.1. Pneumatic door wiring XBA282
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 59
Wirings
5.2. Preamplifier board supply wiring XBA283
Technical Manual
3 - 60 RAA027BEN
Wirings
5.3. Mother board wiring XBA284
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 61
Wirings
5.4. Front panel board supply wiring XBA285
Technical Manual
3 - 62 RAA027BEN
Wirings
5.5. Floppy disk/Barcode and reagent wiring XBA286
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 63
Wirings
5.6. Diode rectifier bridge supply XBA287
Technical Manual
3 - 64 RAA027BEN
Wirings
5.7. Compressor wiring XBA288
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 65
Wirings
5.8. HGB wiring XBA289
Technical Manual
3 - 66 RAA027BEN
Wirings
5.9. Pump motor boards wiring XBA290
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 67
Wirings
5.10. Tube presence and LED wirings XBA291
Technical Manual
3 - 68 RAA027BEN
Wirings
5.11. Keyboard and vacuum pressure board wiring XBA293
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 69
Wirings
5.12. Piercing carriage wiring XBA294
Technical Manual
3 - 70 RAA027BEN
Wirings
5.13. Integrated reagent wiring XBA295
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 71
Wirings
5.14. Piercing carriage wiring XBA296
Technical Manual
3 - 72 RAA027BEN
Wirings
5.15. Blood detection cell XBA304
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 73
Wirings
5.16. LMNE Chamber coaxial XBA308
Technical Manual
3 - 74 RAA027BEN
Wirings
5.17. Barcode and tube detector wiring XBA309
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 75
Wirings
5.18. WBC Electrode coaxial XBA314
Technical Manual
3 - 76 RAA027BEN
Wirings
5.19. Home (Motor loading/Rotative tray/piercer) XBA342
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 77
Wirings
5.20. Laser supply control wiring XBA348 (Pentra DX 120 only)
Technical Manual
3 - 78 RAA027BEN
Wirings
5.21. Fluologic board supply wiring XBA349 (Pentra DX 120 only)
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 79
Wirings
5.22. PMT wiring XBA350 (Pentra DX 120 only)
Technical Manual
3 - 80 RAA027BEN
Wirings
5.23. Diffraction photodiode wiring XBA351 (Pentra DX 120 only)
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 81
Wirings
5.24. Fluo CIS coaxial wiring XBA354 (Pentra DX 120 only)
Technical Manual
3 - 82 RAA027BEN
Wirings
5.25. Laser assy wiring XBA374 (Pentra DX 120 only)
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 83
Wirings
5.26. Waste chamber detection cell XBA614
Technical Manual
3 - 84 RAA027BEN
Wirings
5.27. LMNE transfer cell/RBC-WBC/HBB-BASO drain XBA619
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 85
Wirings
5.28. Compressor wiring XCA179
Technical Manual
3 - 86 RAA027BEN
Wirings
5.29. ABX Basolyse heater wiring XDA499
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 87
Electronic principles
6. Electronic principles
6.1. Measure and signal processing
6.1.1. Hgb measurement

Hemoglobin measurement is done on the following dilution:
■ Sample: 10.77µl
■ ABX Diluent: 2000µl
■ ABX Lyse: 500µl
That is to say the final dilution stands at 1:234. The dilution is done directly inside the WBC/Hgb chamber
(No mixing chamber).
The spectrophotometer is a part of the chamber and includes a photodiode and a green LED (550nm).
The Hgb measurement is done through the optial sides of the chamber.
The photodiode is connected to an ADC input of a 68HC11 microcontroller after an amplification step:
A sampling of 256 measures is done during 1 second in order to improve the precision of the
measurement because of the low resolution of the 8 bits controller.
The Hgb result is obtained according to the Beer-Lamber law:
■ Hgb = Log(Blank measure/sample measure) x K
The blank value can be adjusted on the test point of the RBC/WBC/PLT/HGB Signal board to 4.80V
(Which corresponds to 62900), a low limit fixed at 45000 gives a reject of the Hgb value.
The Hgb measure occurs in between the 2 WBC counts.
During a rack cycle, the blank measurement is carried out during the WBC chamber rinsing.
An Hgb reference blank value is measured during the phase A of the piercing cycle. This Hgb reference
blank value will be corrected for each cycle with a fraction of the new Hgb blank value.
For exemple:
- Reference blank value: 62400
- Hgb blank phase B1: 62000
- New reference blank value: 4/5e 62400 + 1/5e 62000 = 62300
This new reference value (62320) will be used for the Hgb calculation of the phase B1 and will be taken
as the Hgb reference blank value for the analysis cycle.
This formulation decreases the influence of small variations of the blank value during a rack cycle as
the WBC chamber rinsing and liquid stabilization time is 5 seconds only.
Technical Manual
3 - 88 RAA027BEN
A maximum of 1.5% variation is allowed between the Hgb reference value and the Hgb blank measure.
If this percentage is overtaken, a suspicion flag is triggered (!).
6.1.2. Resistive count
Overview
■ The resistive count system in the instrument works with a detection chamber and a signal analyser
done with three electronic’s boards. The power supply board does a high voltage supply for the
chamber electrodes. Each electrode is in a different chamber and there is just a gap between the two
chambers. One of the chamber is at atmosphere pressure, the other is at a low pressure (Vacuum). It
does the liquid going from the first to the second through the very small gap (50 to 100µm). The blood
detection ratio is so big, that it is quite impossible to have two cells at the same time in the gap. When
there is no cell between the two electrodes, the voltage between them is the smallest (lowest
resistance). When there is a cell between them, but not in the gap, the voltage stay very low because
there is a lot of place around the cell for the current to go. But if a cell is between the two electrodes
and inside the gap, the space around the cell is really smaller for the current to go. The resistance is
higher, it does, with «I» constant, the voltage increase.
■ Then an electrical signal is delivered to a preamplification board to amplify it. After this board, the signal
goes to an analogic process board (Signal board). First, it compares the signal with a threshold level.
If it is above, the system is activated. This board has a peak detector system, to keep size information
of the cell, until the next board (Pulse board) has read value. A capacitor and a diode store the value
of the peak and a logical switch, driven by «logical glue», reset the peak-detector after read, for the
next incoming pulse. An other signal delivered to the pulse board is in relation with the length of the
signal and a third triggered the two firsts. These reagent ignals are sent to a pulse board, which
digitalizes and stores these information. It counts the total number of cells. At the end of the counting
process, the main system of the instrument reads the results.
■ For the LMNE OD measurement, the signal is generated by a photocell, located in the 5DIFF bench.
After amplification, the analysis process is the same.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 89
WBC resistive count
RBC/PLT resistive count
BASO resistive count
Technical Manual
3 - 90 RAA027BEN
LMNE resistive count
LMNE OD measure
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 91
RETIC & ERB resitive counts
RETIC & ERB fluorescent and difraction measure
Laser command
Technical Manual
3 - 92 RAA027BEN
6.2. Controls and commands
6.2.1. Reagent and waste detection

Instrument is able to control the level of internal reagents and external reagents.
These seven detections use the 2 electrodes principle:

■ 1 electrode is connected to the ground, an electrical current is applied to the other one. The voltage
difference between these 2 electrodes gives the presence or not of the reagent.
■ A command applied to the 7 sets of electrodes allows the polarization and avoid the electrolyze
reaction of the reagents. This polarization current is given by a current generator for each reagent.
■ The voltage difference is measured by the numeric/analogic converter of the 68HC11 microcontroler
of the alarm board.
■ A detection threshold for each reagent is loaded during the alarm board initialization. A default
threshold contained in a ROM is used when no specific threshold is loaded.
■ The applied current in the electrodes of the internal reagents has been increased to 124 µA (Instead of
27 µA for the other reagents ) in order to avoid the reagent detection when residual liquid is present at
the bottom of the reagent tray.
6.2.2. Blood aspiration detection

The blood sample detection is done during the sample aspiration in 2 steps:
■ Detection using 2 infra-red photocells
■2 electrovalves command
Blood detection
1 infra-red photocell is located between the sampling needle and the sampling valve, the second one is
located after the sampling valve.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 93
■ The output voltage of the photocell is compared with Vref threshold adjustable using an E2POT and
analyzed by an input capture of the 68HC11. In order to operate within E2POT acceptable ranges, the
information from the cell is taken from the emiter of the optic U shape.
■ The diagram below shows the photocell answer according to the current applied in the emiter LED and
the detected liquid.
The blood detection photocell has to be calibrated as follow:

■ Mesure on air which gives a current change in the LED until a 6V voltage approximately is obtained.
■ Search for a commutation threshold using a diluted blood having 1.106 RBC/mm3.
In the instrument, the blood detection cell calibration is done automatically through a specific function
of the ASSISTANCE menu.
The automatic adjustment cycle includes the following steps:

■ Commutation threshold adjustment of the photocell at 6V approximately (Vref).
■ Current adjustment in the photocell using an E2POT until the commutation threshold is found (On air).
■ Diluent aspiration in order to check that there is no commutation for Vref max.
■ Aspiration of diluted blood (1.106 RBC/mm3).
■ Vref modification in order to find the commutation threshold (Should be between blood mini and blood
maxi).
Electrovalve command
When the blood has been detected, a command is send to the interface board #2 in order to activate
the sampling electrovalves #2 and #3.
Technical Manual
3 - 94 RAA027BEN
6.2.3. Chamber photocell management

Instrument has 7 chamber photocells in order to prevent any overflowing of liquids inside the instrument.
The concerned chambers are:
■ RBC/PLT chamber
■ WBC/HGB chamber
■ BASO chamber
■ LMNE chamber
■ Regulated vacuum chamber #1
■ Regulated vacuum chamber #2
■ Waste chamber #3
■ The chamber drain detection differentiates the passage of air and liquid inside the flowcell. The
photocell characteristics show that the best dynamic between air and liquid is obtained for a precise
cell adjustment. The information is taken on the cell collector in order to operate in the working range
of the analogic/numeric converter of the 68HC11 microcontroller.
The photocell adjustment procedure consists by adjusting the current in the LED to be located in the
saturation bent of the voltage output curve with water, then to measure the output voltage with air and
to set the commutation voltage in the middle of these 2 voltages .
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 95
On the instrument, the drain chamber photocell adjustment is done automatically using the photocell
adjustment function of the ASSISTANCE menu. The procedure consists in the following steps:
■ Liquid aspiration
■ LED current adjustment to be situated in the bent of the curve
■ Air aspiration
■ Check the dynamic air/liquid
■ Set up the commutation threshold of the photocell
The transition time of the liquid and air in front of the photocell is also taken into account in
the drain alarm management.
6.2.4. Compressor operation

■ The compressor is driven by the Interface board #1. It allows the main system to put it in stand-by
mode, to prevent any too fast wear. The compressor is stoped in case of long no-use of the instrument.
This compressor (Owner compressor for HORIBA Medical) has two chambers, one for the pressure,
the other for the vacuum. Each chamber has two valves, and a piston. Valves work alternately: One for
the filling (Piston down), the other for the emptying (Piston up). For compatibility with other countries,
it is supplyed in 110 Vac (American standart).
6.2.5. BASO heater

■ The BASO reaction can be done only at 47°C. A heater coil has the charge of heating the half of the
ABX Basolyse quantity needed for this reaction. The other part is used to push the sample of blood
from the sampling valve to the BASO chamber. To have a 47°C temperature in the BASO chamber, 50%
Technical Manual
3 - 96 RAA027BEN
of the ABX Basolyse is heated at 74°C. If the room temperature is about 20°C, the temperature in the
BASO chamber will be:
(20 + 74)/2 = 47°C
■ The thermical inertia of the heating coil is needed to heat the ABX Basolyse fast. It is just regulated at
a temperature of 74°C, and when the ABX Basolyse goes through, it becomes warm instantaneously.
■ The heater coil has a probe in it, which is connected to a thermostat. This thermostat stabilizes the
temperature at 74°C. There is no command signals, the BASO heater is always hot when the
instrument is ON.
6.2.6. LMNE heater
LMNE Case
■ For the LMNE/RETIC chamber, the accuracy of such parameters as temperature and incubation time
is a determining factor. Then the control system is more elaborate, and an other way of heating is used.
■ The LMNE/RETIC chamber is placed in a heater. This heater is driven by two probes. The first one,
very close to the heater, is there to protect the heating element (Resistor) from being too hot. The
second one, a thermocouple, is much more precise. It is plunged into the mixe of ABX Leucodiff and
blood sample. It has a short answer time, and tell instantaneously the temperature of the mixture.
■ The reaction time is exact too. To have a proper reaction, the mixture has to go from its temperature
to 35°C in 9 seconds. The thermocouple allows the electronic's board to increase gradually the
temperature of the LMNE/RETIC chamber.
RETIC Case
■ The reaction takes place into the same chamber, with the same temperature. The reagent is not ABX
Leucodiff, but ABX Fluocyte.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 97
6.2.7. 5DIFF pump motion

■ The 5-DIFF pump supplies the 5-DIFF flowcell chamber. It is a high accuracy pump which have a very
steady flow.
■ It has three syringues to push liquids (Diluent). The liquid in the left syringue pushs the blood sample.
The liquid in the right syringue pushs the internal sleeving, and the liquid in the center syringue pushs
the external sleeving.
■ To have good results, the speed of the motor has to be very constant. For that, a phase locked loop is
used. It controls the supply according to the current speed. If the motor is too slow, the supply will be
higher, and the other way round. A fine calculated electronical circuit stabilizes the speed.
■ Two end of run optical sensors detect when the motor has to stop. They give the main system
information about the position of the pump, and protect the pump against mechanical damages.
■ The electronic board is driven by the main system, but is almost independent. The main system can
request 4 phases, Up slow, Up fast, Down slow, Down fast, and the board does itself the 5DIFF
management. If the time of travel is too long, the board will set an alarm 5DIFF error flag. The two used
phases are Up slow (Measure) and Down fast (Loading).
■ The setting of the speed is done on the pump motor driver board.
Technical Manual
3 - 98 RAA027BEN
6.3. Inputs/Outputs
6.3.1. Liquid cristal display
■ The liquid cristal display (LCD) is driven by its dedicated processor system, located under the LCD
panel. This system receives informations as letter binary codes, dots coordinates, or «clear screen»
and «do a new line» commands,... and calculate electronic's signals to activate liquid cristals. It does
the low part of the display work. To calculate windows, to store information until the LCD
microprocessor is ready, an other processor system, located on the LCD board, does the medium part
of the display work. This system is, itself, driven by the main system, from which it receives orders and
data (Like results of blood analyse). The main system does the high part of the display work. At the
starting of the instrument, the main system load a file into the LCD board, which explain the LCD board
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 99
system how to react at orders. It allows to change display ability easily, by changing software, and not
the board.
■ To set the contrast, the LCD board receives commands from the keyboard through the main system.
The digital/analog convertissor of the 68HC11 commands the supply of the LCD panel, and change its
contrast.
■ The backlighting is done by a high voltage low pressure gas tube. To supply it, an integrated
convertissor is used, which furnishs a 1kV voltage from a 12V supply.
6.3.2. Keyboards and open tube cycle switch
■ The LCD board is also the interface between the main system and the two keyboards. One is a
matricial keyboard, the other is an IBM compatible keyboard. The matricial keyboard is a grid of
electrical wires, with rows and columns. Each button is at a cross between a row and a column. The
LCD board sends pulses to each column, one after the other, and checks all rows to know is the pulse
is back. For example, if the pulse is sent on the column number three, and is received on the row
number two, the processor system of the LCD board knows that the pressed button is at the cross (3,
2). The open tube cycle switch is located at a cross of this grid. If it is always pressed by something, a
«keyboard error» will appear on the screen.
■ The IBM compatible keyboard has a grid of buttons too. But a processor system was added, to send
codes of keys through a serial line. This processor check the grid the same way (With pulses). If a
button is pressed, it sends a binary number according to the button. This system allows a low number
of wires (5) be enough to communicate. The binary code is received by the LCD board, which sends it
to the JCM 340 board through a serial line.
Technical Manual
3 - 100 RAA027BEN
6.3.3. Data transfer
■ For a processor to communicate with other processors, two transmission mode can be used: parallel
transmission mode and serial transmission mode. The parallel transmission is fast, but needs a lot of
wires. The serie transmission is slower but needs only three wires.
■ In the parallel transmission mode, they are usually twelve to sixteen wires. eight (One wire stands for
one bit) for data (Byte size), one for the ground, one for the acknowledge, one for validation and a
cupple of more if needed (ex: In case of a printer, it exist a wire called «paper out»). It is fast, because
a byte is transmitted in one clock pulse (Eight wires can transmit eigth bits, and one byte is equivalent
to eight bits).
■ For printers, the standart is, since a long time, with parallel transmission mode.
■ In the serial transmission mode, a byte is transmitted in eight clock pulses. At the first clock pulse is
transmitted the first bit of the byte, at the second clock pulse is transmitted the second bit of the byte,...
at the eighth clock pulse is transmitted the eighth bit of the byte. Then it is very slower. It needs only
three wires (Ground, transmission, reception). The usual standart for series transmission is called
RS232. It works always with +12V and -12V signals, and at definite speed (1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 bits
per second)
■ In the usual cases, the serial transmission is easier to use (Smaller plugs, less wires,...). It explains why
barcode readers, keyboards and host computer connection is usually done with serial transmission. A
barcode reader has a code encoder as a keyboard, but instead of having buttons, it has a photocell
associated with a rotating mirror. The mirror allows the photocell to scan the whole barcode. The
photocell receives the light from the barcode, and the processor system of the reader converts the
series of high and low electrical level to a number. After encoding, it is this number which is sent to the
RS232/Printer board.
■ The RS232/PRINTER board is driven by the main system.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 3 - 101
Synoptics
7. Synoptics
See synoptic diagrams on next page
Technical Manual
3 - 102 RAA027BEN
Analysis cycle technology
4 - Analysis cycle technology
1. Startup ....................................................................................................................2
1.1. Daily Startup ......................................................................................................................... 2
1.2. Standby mode ...................................................................................................................... 3
1.3. Daily shutdown ..................................................................................................................... 3
2. Analysis cycle description ....................................................................................4

2.1. Manual sampling .................................................................................................................. 4
2.2. Automatic rack sampling ...................................................................................................... 5
2.3. Dilutions and measuring cycles ............................................................................................ 6
3. Technology ............................................................................................................8
3.1. Sampling ............................................................................................................................... 8
3.2. Dilutions ................................................................................................................................ 9
3.3. CBC measurement principles ............................................................................................. 15
3.4. Differential measuring principles ........................................................................................ 17
3.5. Reticulocytes measuring principles .................................................................................... 20
3.6. Erythroblasts measuring principles .................................................................................... 23
4. Mechanic principles & description ....................................................................25

4.1. General principles ............................................................................................................... 25
4.2. Stepper motors principles .................................................................................................. 26
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 4-1
Startup
1. Startup
1.1. Daily Startup
■ Press the ON/OFF switch of the laser supply.

■ Press the ON/OFF switch of the instrument. The instrument is initialized, the laser is switched ON after
50 seconds and goes to stand by mode (Full laser power is obtained only during the measuring phase
of the analysis cycle).
■ Wait for the end of the initialization and run a STARTUP cycle. The STARTUP cycle has to be carried
out every day before running sample analyses. This cycle allows a rinsing and a check of the instrument
regarding hydraulic and mechanical parts.
■ This STARTUP cycle also has to be carried out after each SHUTDOWN cycle.
■ The STARTUP cycle performs the following checks:
Duration
Cycle
(in seconds)
1 Door test 1
2 Reagent tests 1
3 Vacuum presure test 10
4 5DIFF Pump position test 1
5 Autocontrol 40
6 Diluent rinsing 90
7 5DIFF Priming 30
8 Blank cycle (1 to 3) 56, 62 or 68
Laser power check
Total (1 blank cycle) 229
Total (2 blank cycles) 235
Total (3 blank cycles) 241
1- Door test: This test checks the protection door position of the manual sampling needle. When this
door is in its upper position (Manual sampling allowed), it is impossible to run an automatic piercing
analysis cycle.
2- Reagent tests: This test checks the presence of the required reagents. When a reagent runs out, a
corresponding alarm message is displayed at the end of the current cycle. Carry out the reagent
replacement procedure.
3- Vacuum 1 pressure test: This test checks the minimum values required for the working pressure and
vacuum. When these values are not reached, a corresponding alarm message is displayed at the end of
the current cycle.
4- 5DIFF position test: This test checks the home position of the 5DIFF pump in order to allow perfect
timing between the pump motions and the different hydraulic cycles.
5- Autocontrol: The autocontrol cycle resets the mechanical axes (Loader, rotation, piercer, ejection)
and checks the hydraulic transfers using the detection cells placed on the main chamber drainage tubes.
When a problem occurs during this autocontrol check, the startup cycle is immediately stopped.
6- Diluent rinsing: A diluent rinsing is mandatory before running samples as the instrument is filled with
detergent by the shutdown cycle run at the end of the working day. This cycle allows the rinsing of the
counting and the measuring parts before the «blank cycle» check.
7- 5DIFF priming: This cycle primes the different reagent lines for the «5DIFF» analyses. The 5DIFF
pump is activated several times in order to flush out the air bubbles eventually contained in the tubes or
inside the pump body.
Technical Manual
4-2 RAA027BEN
Startup
8- Blank cycle: This cycle checks the cleanliness of the instrument parts involved in the countings and
the measures (Counting chambers, HGB flowcell, 5DIFF flowcell, etc...), as well as the pollution of the
different reagents. A «5DIFF» analysis is carried out on reagents only, results of this measure should not
exceed the limits given below. Should this not be the case, a second, and a third measure are launched
to confirm wheteher a possible pollution problem exists.
■ A record of the daily blank cycles is available in ASSISTANCE menu, function <4> in order to follow
up the cleanliness of the instrument. This follow up gives an indication of the cleaning and maintenance
procedures to be carried out.
1.2. Standby mode
■ The STANDBY mode allows the instrument to remain unused for a certain time without any reagent
consumption, and very low electrical consumption. The compressor stops and the remaining pressure
and vacuum are released from the pneumatic circuits.
■ The automatic standby mode after the last instrument operation can be set up by the user.
■ When the instrument remains in standby mode for a long period, it is necessary to perform a rinsing
cycle (Startup cycle) before any analysis cycle.
■ The user has the possibility to set up a final rinse cycle (Shutdown cycle) after a pre-defined standby
duration.
1.3. Daily shutdown
■ The daily shutdown can be automatically performed according to the user setup functions.
■ The daily shutdown can also be run by pressing the Shut down key. The shutdown cycle has a duration
of 130 seconds and includes following steps:
Duration
Cycle
(in seconds)
1 Door test 1
2 Reagent tests 1
3 Vacuum presure test 10
4 5DIFF Pump position test 1
5 Autocontrol 40
6 ABX Cleaner rinsing 69
7 Compresor discharged 8
Total 130
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 4-3
Analysis cycle description
2. Analysis cycle description
2.1. Manual sampling
■ The green LED located above the manual sampling needle is lit; The protection flap of the manual
sampling needle is in its lower position.
■ Lift up the protection flap of the manual sampling needle. Remove the cap of the blood sample tube
and place it in the sampling position, the sampling needle deep inside the tube. Press on the sampling
bar located behind the needle to start the manual cycle.
■ The green and red LED flash during the aspiration period. The sample tube can be removed from the
sampling position when the red LED remains ON.
■ The sampled blood (130µl approximately) is aspirated through the commutation valve and arrives in
the first sample detection cell.
■ The sampled blood fills the loops of the sampling valve and arrives in the second detection cell.
SAMPLING AUTOMATIC
ATMOSPHERE
MANUAL
WASTE
■ When the blood arrival is detected by this second detection cell, the sampling valve is activated and
the different blood volumes contained in the valve loops are transferred to the dilution and measure
chambers.
When a RETIC cycle is requested, the RETIC sample is held in the sampling valve capillary
until the LMNE sample is transferred from the LMNE/RETIC chamber to the LMNE optic
bench. Then, the RETIC sample is transferred to the LMNE/RETIC chamber.
■ The manual sampling needle is rinsed with ABX Diluent internally and externally by the rinsing carriage
which slides up and down along the sampling needle.
Technical Manual
4-4 RAA027BEN
2.2. Automatic rack sampling
■ The green LED on the left-hand side of the rack loader is on. One or several racks containing sample
tubes are loaded into the rack loader.
■ The automatic piercing cycle starts when the Start rack key is pressed.
■ The loading flaps open and the first rack drops down into the rotation mechanism. The mixing of the
sample tubes starts.
■ The detection system checks the rack type (Rack no., analysis type and rack tube capacity) and the
presence of tubes. A second rack is loaded during the mixing of the first one.
■ The first tube to be sampled is extracted from the rack by means of the pneumatic grabber, and placed
into its piercing position.
■ The piercing needle rises and pierces the tube cap. The tube is briefly in contact with the atmosphere
in order to compensate the residual vacuum (or pressure) inside the sample tube. Then blood
aspiration starts (200µl approximately).
■ The sampled blood is aspirated through the commutation valve and arrives in the first sample
detection cell. The sampled blood fills the loops of the sampling valve and arrives in the second
detection cell.
■ When the blood is detected by this second detection cell, the sampling valve is activated and the
different blood volumes contained in the valve loops are transferred to the dilution and measurement
chambers.
When a RETIC cycle is requested, the RETIC sample is held in the sampling valve capillary
until the LMNE sample is transferred from the LMNE/RETIC chamber to the LMNE optic
bench. Then, the RETIC sample is transferred to the LMNE/RETIC chamber.
■ The piercing needle is rinsed internally and externally with ABX Diluent.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 4-5
2.3. Dilutions and measuring cycles
ABX Fluocyte
Pump 1x2.5ml
ABX Leucodiff
Pump 1x1ml
BASO 10µl
ABX Basolyse
RETIC
Pump 2x1ml
ABX Diluent WBC/HGB

Pump 2x1ml 10.7µl LMNE 25µl
ABX Diluent
Pump 5ml RBC 0.5µl
LMNE
BASO WBC RBC
HGB RETIC
ERB
2.3.1. RBC/PLT
■A volume of 0.5µl of blood sample contained in the sampling valve capillary is pushed with 5ml of ABX
Diluent into the RBC/PLT chamber.
■ The 1/10 000 dilution is homogenized by means of air bubbles applied at the bottom of the chamber.
■ The dilution is aspirated through the aperture of the counting head for the first measurement.
■ At the end of the first count, a backflush is applied in order to clean the counting chamber.
After the second measurement, the chamber is drained then rinsed with ABX Diluent. After the second
measurement, the chamber is drained then rinsed with ABX Diluent.
2.3.2. WBC/HGB
■ A volume of 10.7µl of blood sample contained in the sampling valve loop is pushed with 2ml of ABX
Diluent into the WBC/HGB chamber.
■ 0.5ml of ABX Alphalyse is added to the mixture.
■ The 1/234 dilution is homogenized by means of air bubbles applied at the bottom of the chamber.
■ At the end of the first count, a backflush is applied in order to clean the counting chamber. The HGB
measurement is performed at the end of the backflush.
Technical Manual
4-6 RAA027BEN
2.3.3. BASO
■ A volume of 10µl of blood sample contained in the
sampling valve loop is pushed with 2x1ml of heated
ABX Basolyse into the BASO chamber. The 1/200 dilution is homogenized by means of air bubbles
applied at the bottom of the chamber.
■ At the end of the first count, a backflush is applied in order to clean the counting chamber.
■ After the second measurement, the chamber is drained then rinsed with ABX Basolyse.
2.3.4. LMNE
■A volume of 25µl of blood sample contained in the LMNE sampling valve loop is pushed with 1 ml of
ABX Leucodiff into the LMNE/RETIC chamber. The 1/40 dilution is heated to 35°C and homogenized
by means of air bubbles applied at the bottom of the chamber.
■ 1ml of ABX Diluent is injected into the chamber to stop the reaction.
■ The 1/80 dilution is transferred to the optical bench, sleeved with a double hydraulic sleeve and
pushed/aspirated through the LMNE flowcell.
■ After measuring (Absorbance and resistivity), the flowcell is rinsed with ABX Diluent.
When a DIR (DIFF+RET) cycle is requested, the LMNE sample transfer is carried out first, the
sample valve remains activated during the LMNE incubation time of the LMNE/RETIC
chamber, as soon as the LMNE sample is transferred to the LMNE optic bench, the RETIC
sample is transferred to the LMNE/RETIC chamber.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 4-7
Technology
3. Technology
3.1. Sampling
Manual
1- Aspiration of 130µl of blood through the commutation valve.
2- The blood sample goes to:
3- C2 detection cell
4- Sampling valve
5- C1 detection cell
6- C1 triggers the sampling valve switch
7- Blood volumes contained in the valve loops are transferred to the measurement chambers
8- Internal and external needle rinse
Automatic
1- Rack mixing
2- Rack identification and tube detection
3- Tube extraction from the rack and cap piercing
4- Aspiration of 200µl of blood
5- Aspiration of the specimen through the commutation valve
6- Steps 2 to 5 of Manual
Commutation
valve
Sampling
valve
C1
C2
WASTE
Technical Manual
4-8 RAA027BEN
Technology
3.2. Dilutions
RBC/PLT Dilution
Technical characteristics of the RBC and PLT counts

Initial blood volume: 0.5µl
Vol. ABX Diluent: 5ml
Final dilution rate: 1/10000
RBC/PLT measurement
Method: Impedance
Aperture diameter: 50µm
Count vacuum: 225mb
Count period: 2x5 seconds
Temperature of reaction: Ambiant
RBC 0.5µl
ABX Diluent
Pump 1x5ml
RBC
■A volume of 0.5µl of blood sample contained in the sampling valve capillary is pushed with 5ml of ABX
Diluent into the RBC/PLT chamber.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 4-9
Technology
WBC/HGB Dilution
Technical characteristics of the WBC and HGB dilutions

Vol. ABX Lyse: 0.5ml
WBC counts
Method: Impedance
Count vacuum: 225mb
HGB measurement
Method: Photometry
Wavelength: 550nm
Measurement period: 2x5 seconds
WBC/HGB
10.7µl
ABX Diluent
Pump 2x1ml
ABX Lyse
1x0.5ml
WBC
HGB
■ 10.7µl of blood sample contained in the sampling valve loop is pushed with 2ml of ABX Diluent into
the WBC/HGB chamber. 0.5ml of ABX Lyse is added to the mixture.
Technical Manual
4 - 10 RAA027BEN
Technology
BASO Dilution
Technical characteristics of the BASO count

Initial blood volume: 10µl
Vol. ABX Basolyse: 2ml
BASO counts
Method: Impedance
Count vacuum: 225mb
Temperature of reaction: 47.5°C
BASO
10µl
ABX Basolyse
Pump 2x1ml
BASO
■ 10µl of blood sample contained in the sampling valve loop is mixed with 2x1ml of heated ABX Basolyse
and sent to the BASO chamber.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 4 - 11
Technology
LMNE (Double matrix) Dilution
Technical characteristics of the LMNE (Double matrix) count

Vol. ABX Leucodiff: 1ml
First dilution rate: 1/40
Second dilution rate: 1/80
LMNE measurement
Focused flow impedance
Method:
Ligth absorbance
Temperature of reaction: 37°C
ABX Leucodiff
Pump 1x1ml
ABX Diluent
Pump 1x1ml
LMNE
25µl
LMNE
RETIC
ERB
■ 25µl of blood sample contained in the LMNE sampling valve loop is mixed with 1ml of ABX Leucodiff,
and sent to the LMNE chamber.
■9 seconds later, 1ml of ABX Diluent is added to the mixture to stop the reaction.
Technical Manual
4 - 12 RAA027BEN
Technology
RET Dilution
Technical characteristics of the RET count

Vol. ABX Fluocyte: 2.5ml
RET measurement
Scattered light
Method: Fluorescence
Wavelength: 530nm
Incubation time: 25 seconds
ABX Fluocyte RET

Pump 1x2.5ml
RET
0.8µl
LMNE
RETIC
ERB
■ 0.8µl of blood sample contained in the RETIC sampling valve capillary is mixed with 2.5ml of ABX
Fluocyte and sent to the LMNE/RET chamber.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 4 - 13
Technology
ERB Dilution
Technical characteristics of the ERB count

Vol. ABX Leucodiff: 1ml
First dilution rate: 1/40
Vol. ABX Fluocyte: 1ml
Second dilution rate: 1/80
ERB measurement
Scattered light
Method: Fluorescence
Wavelength: 530nm
Incubation times: 25 seconds (lysing)
24 seconds (staining)
ABX Leucodiff
Pump 1x1ml
ABX Fluocyte NRBC

Pump 1x1ml
ERB
25µl
LMNE
RETIC
ERB
■ 25µl of blood sample contained in the LMNE sampling valve loop is mixed with 1ml of ABX Leucodiff,
and sent to the LMNE/RETIC chamber.
■ 25 seconds later, 1ml of ABX Fluocyte is added to the mixture for 24 seconds.
Technical Manual
4 - 14 RAA027BEN
Technology
3.3. CBC measurement principles
RBC/PLT
■ The RBC’s and PLT’s are measured by
an electronic impedance variation
principle. This means that an electronic
field is generated around the micro-
aperture within the chamber in which
the blood cells are pulled through.
■ The sample is diluted with an
electrolytic Diluent (Electronic current
conducting fluid), mixed then pulled
through a calibrated micro-aperture.
Two electrodes are placed on either
side of the aperture and electric current
continuously passes between the two Pulse height
electrodes. Plt Pulse RBC pulse
■ As the blood cells pass through the
aperture, they create resistance
(Impedance) in the electronic field
between the two electrodes. The
voltage, which measures the cells, is Time
proportional to the size of the cell. Number of cells
Since the current is constant and Analogue conversion
remains unchanged, the larger the cell
is, the «more» resistance it has. The
smaller the cell is, the «less» resistance
it has. Cell size
■ These electronic voltages vary in pulse Number of cells Data integration and plotting
size as the cells pass through the of RBC distribution curve
aperture. The pulses are amplified,
channeled according to size and
threshold, grouped and then
RBC
mathematically calculated along with
the calibration coefficients to give a Cell size
final numerical value for both RBC’s
and PLT’s.
Number of cells
Analogue conversion
Results
■ Number of cells counted per volume
unit x calibration coefficient
Cell size
Histograms Number of cells Data integration and plotting
■ RBC: Distribution curves on 256 of RBC distribution curve
counting channels from 30fl to 300fl.
■ PLT: Distribution curves on 256
channels from 2fl to a mobile threshold. PLT
This threshold moves according to the
microcyte population present in the Cell size
analysis area.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 4 - 15
Technology
HGB
■ The hemoglobin freed by the lysis of the red blood cells combines with potassium cyanide to form a
cyanmethemoglobin compound.
■ Absorbance is then measured by spectrophotometry, at a wave length of 550 nm. The absorbance
value obtained is then multiplied by a coefficient in order to obtain the hemoglobin value.
■ During the closed-tube cycle, an HGB blank measurement is performed between 2 chamber rinses,
the final blank value is calculated by incorporating the previous blank measurements (1/5 of the new
value, 4/5 of the previous calculation).
■ In manual mode, an HGB blank value is performed on each cycle.
Result: HGB = Log (Blank value/Sample value) x K
MCV, MCH and MCHC

■ MCV (Mean Cell Volume) is calculated directly from the RBC histogram.
■ MCH (Mean Cell Hemoglobin) is calculated from the HGB value and the RBC count.
Result: MCH (pg) = (HGB/RBC)x10
■ MCHC (Mean Corpuscular Hemoglobin Concentration) is calculated according to the HGB and HCT
values.
Result: MCHC (g/dL) = (HGB/HCT)x100
HCT
The height of the impulse generated by the passage of a cell through the micro-aperture is directly
proportional to the volume of the analyzed red blood cell. The hematocrit is measured as a function of
the numeric integration of the MCV.
RDW
■ The study of the distribution of RBCs detects erythrocyte anomalies linked to anisocytosis.
■A Red Cell Distribution Width (RDW) will enable you to follow the evolution of the width of the curve in
relation to the number of cells and their average volume.
Result: RDW = (KxSD)/MCV
with:
K = system constant.
SD = Determined standard deviation according to statistical studies on cell distribution.
MCV = Mean Corpuscular Volume of erythrocytes.
MPV
The MPV (Mean Platelet Volume) is directly derived from the analysis of the platelet distribution curve.
PCT
Thrombocrit is calculated according to the formula:
PCT (%) = (PLT (103/µl) x MPV (µm3))/10 000
PDW
■ PDW (Platelet Distribution Width) is calculated from the PLT distribution curve.
■ The PDW is represented by the width of the curve between 15% of the number of platelet starting from
2 fl (S1) and 15% of the number of platelets beginning with the variable top threshold (S2).
Technical Manual
4 - 16 RAA027BEN
Technology
WBC
■ Counting channel: The measurement principle is the same as for RBC counting. The WBC count is
performed in the WBC/HGB chamber. The signal processing device places an electronic threshold
between the WBC and the PLT (and the lysed RBC).
Results: Number of cells per volume unit x coefficient of calibration.
■ The results of the count are compared with the results of the BASO count and LMNE channel in order
to give the complete differentiation in absolute numbers and percentages.
3.4. Differential measuring principles
BASO
■ The detection principle is the same as for RBC. The BASO counting is done in the separate BASO
chamber with a specific lysing reagent: ABX Basolyse.
■ After the ABX Basolyse reagent action, all leukocytes except basophils lose their membranes and
cytoplasm. It then becomes easy to separate the basophils from the nuclei of other leucocytes.
■ From the beginning of the volume axis to threshold <1>, debris from hemolized cells is found. The
basophils are located from threshold <2> to the end.
■ The total WBC count is represented by the total number of nucleic particles plus the basophils.
■ Basophil % is calculated from the number of particles counted between threshold <2> and the upper
limit.
■ Results:
Number of cells per volume unit x coefficient of calibration in percentage regarding the total number
of counted cells (BASO + WBC nuclei).
The results of the BASO channel are also associated with those of the other channels (WBC and
LMNE) to give the complete differentiation in absolute numbers and percentages.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 4 - 17
Technology
DOUBLE MATRIX
■ The Double matrix is based on 3 essential principles:
1- The double hydrodynamic sleeving «DHSS» (HORIBA ABX patent).
2- Volume measurement: impedance changes.
3- Cytochemical staining and optical absorbance measurement.
■ Method:
- The whole blood sample contained in the LMNE loop of the sampling valve is sent to the LMNE
chamber where it is mixed with a specific reagent, ABX Leucodiff. This reagent lyses the RBC,
stabilizes the WBC’s in their native forms and differentially stains the leucocytes.
- After the reaction/dilution step in the heating bath, the solution is transferred to the optical bench
using an aspiration, before being analysed in the measuring chamber. The dilution is sleeved with a
double hydrodynamic sleeving and passes through the optical windows and the 60µm diameter
aperture of the LMNE flowcell. Each cell is measured both in absorbance (cytochemistry) and
resistivity (volume).
- From these measurements, a matrix is drawn up with volumes on the X-Axis and optical transmission
on the Y-Axis.
Technical Manual
4 - 18 RAA027BEN
Technology
Light absorbance Impedance

measurement measurement
No cell in the flowcell Baseline
Poorly-stained (agranular) Low absorbance

cell in the flowcell
Hyper segmented with

complex granulority High absorbance
and staining
■ Monocytes: With a relatively high volume, and intermediate optical absorbance post cytochemical
staining, the monocytes are classically located as indicated above.
Platelets and debris from erythrocyte lysis represent the background noise population located in the
left area of the matrix.
■ Lymphocytes: The lymphocytes being small with regular shape, are positioned in the lower part of
both the optical axis and volume axis.
Normal lymphocyte populations are generally observed with a gaussian distribution pattern.
Large lymphocytes are detected in the ALY (Atypical Lymphocytes) zone, where reactive lymphoid
forms, stimulated lymphocytes and plasmocytes are also to be found.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 4 - 19
Technology
The far left side of the lymphocyte zone should normally be empty, but when small lymphocytes are
present, population may exist in this area.
The presence of platelet aggregates is detected by a distribution pattern that moves from the origin of
the matrix (Background zone) into the lymphocyte zone.
The NRBCs having their cytoplasmic membranes lysed like those of the erythrocytes, will have their
nuclei situated to the far left side of the lymphocyte zone.
■ Eosinophils: With reagent action on cytoplasmic membranes, the leukocytes keep their native size
and only eosinophils are colored for optical separation.
Eosinophils will be situated in the upper part of the optical Y-axis due to their strong absorbance
qualities and their size, which is nearly equivalent to large neutrophils.
■ Neutrophils: The neutrophils, with their cytoplasmic granules and their generally segmented nuclei,
will scatter light depending on their morphological complexity. A hypersegmented neutrophil will give
an increased optical response.
■ Additional parameters: LIC (Large Immature Cells) and ALY (Atypical Lymphocytes) complete the
panel available on the matrix. A Blast alarm is generated from increased counts within the LIC area,
this is correlated with Blast detection on the Basophil curve. The sensitivity of all alarms is adjustable.
3.5. Reticulocytes measuring principles
■ 0.8µl of whole blood are sampled by the sampling valve and mixed with 2.5ml of ABX Fluocyte.
This reagent contains a fluorescent stain which is specific to nucleic acids: thiazol orange (Thiazol
orange is a patented product from Becton Dickinson San Jose, CA, USA).
■ The dilution is warmed at 37°C for 25 seconds. The stain molecules enter through the cell membrane
and fix the ribonucleic acid molecules.
■ This binding gives an increase of the fluorescence (enhancement: ~3000x). After 25 seconds, the
solution is transferred to the laser optical bench to be measured.
■ The laser optical bench simultaneously measures the fluorescence of the cells passing through the
measuring point into the flowcell, and volume by impedance.
A cell passing through the flowcell gives 3 types of information:

■ The size of the cell measured by resistivity (Cell Impedance Signal),
■ The scattered light (Forward Scattered Light), measured approximately 200µsec after the aperture
measurement.
■ The fluorescence signal (Orthogonal Fluorescence Light), measured simultaneously with the FSL.
OFL: The fluorescence is collected using a lens focused on the optical flowcell and located at 90° from
the light beam, an interferential filter specific to the thiazol orange stain selecting only the fluorescent
wavelength and a photomultiplier tube.
FSL: The photodiode measuring diffraction is located in the beam axis (0°) behind a dark field which
stops the direct light.
Technical Manual
4 - 20 RAA027BEN
Technology
RET MATRIX
■ The reticulocyte matrix is generated from 2 measurements: resistivity volume (CIS) and orthogonal
fluorescence (OFL) of cells according on the X and Y axes respectively.
■ Mature red blood cells without RNA show little or no fluorescent signal. They are located at the bottom
of the matrix and horizontally distributed according to their MCV and RDW.
■ Reticulocytes are separated from the red blood cells by their fluorescence which is proportional to the
RNA content and their maturity. The most fluorescent elements which are saturated at the top of the
matrix are most as immature. Nucleated Red Blood Cells may also be found in this area.
F4
F3
F2
F1
R1 R2 R3 R4
PARAMETERS AND RESULTS

■ RET%: Percentage of counted reticulocytes
■ RET#: Absolute value of reticulocytes according to the number of RBC counted in the RBC channel
(RBC/PLT chamber).
RET# = (RET% x RBC#)/100
■ RBC#: Absolute value of RBC counted on the RBC channel with the usual method (resistivity).
■ RETL%: Percentage of reticulocytes having a low fluorescence according to the total number of
reticulocytes.
RETL% = (RETL x 100)/RET
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 4 - 21
Technology
■ RETM%: Percentage of reticulocytes having a medium fluorescence according to the total number of
reticulocytes.
RETM% = (RETM x 100)/RET
■ RETH%: Percentage of reticulocytes having a high fluorescence according to the total number of
reticulocytes.
RETH% = (RETH x 100)/RET
The 3 percentages above correspond to the results LFR, MFR & HFR (Bibliography.3, 4 & 5).
■ IMM: Percentage of cells in the IMM area regarding the total number of RBC. Very immature
reticulocytes as well as NRBC may be found in this area.
■ MFI: Mean Fluorescence Index, expressed in %. Calculation mode:
MFI = [Channel of mean fluorescence - F1 Threshold]/([F4 Threshold - F1 Threshold]x 100)
■ MRV: Mean Reticulocyte Volume. Calculation method:
MCV calculation on the RBC channel.
Search for the mean volume (in #channel) of the RBC matrix [CMG].
Search for the mean volume (in #channel) of the reticulocytes [CMR].
MRV = MCV x (CMR/CMG)
■ IRF (Immature Reticulocyte Fraction):
IRF = (RETH# + RETM# + IMM#) / RET#
■ CRC (Corrected Reticulocyte count):
CRC% = Ret% x (patient HCT / normal HCT)
CRC% compensates for the increase in «Stress reticulocytes», in anaemic patients.
Normal HCT = Mean of the HCT normality limits.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1- J.F. KOEPKE MD & J.A. KOEPKE MD; Reticulocytes. Clinical lab. Haemat. 1986, 8, 169-179
2- B.H. DAVIS; Immature Reticulocyte Fraction (IRF): By any name, a useful clinical parameter of
erythropoietic activity. Laboratory Hematology. 2:2-8 ©1996 ISLH
3- B.H. DAVIS, N.C. BIGELOW; Flow cytometric reticulocyte quantification using thazole orange
provides clinically useful reticulocyte maturity index. Arch. Pathol. Lab. Med 113-684, 1989
4- B.H. DAVIS, N.C. BIGELOW, E.D. BALL, L. MILLS, G. CORNWELL; Utility of flow cytometric
reticulocytes quantification as a predictor of engraftment in autologous bone marrow transplantation.
Am J Hematol. 32-81. 1989
5- B.H. DAVIS, M. DICORATO, N.C. BIGELOW, M.H. LANGWEILER; Proposal for standardization of
flow cytometric reticulocytes maturity index measurements. Cytometry 14:318 1993
6- B.H. DAVIS ET AL. Flow Cytometric Reticulocyte Analysis Multiinstitutional Interlaboratory
Correlation Study. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. oct. 1994, vol. 102: 468-477
7- G.F. RIEDLER, R. ZINGG; Tabulae Haematologicae, Rocom, 23-30.
8- Clin. Lab. Haem. 1999, 21, 3-10 JX CORBERAND, C SEGONDS, A M FONTANILLES, JP CAMBUS,
G FILLOLA, P LAHARRAGUE. Evaluation of the PENTRA 120 Haemaotogy Analyser in a university
hospital setting
9- Eur J Clin Chem Clin Biochem 1997; 35(2): 105-111 Clinical Performance of Leukocyte Differential on
the HORIBA ABX Pentra 120 Haematological Analyzer Giuseppe Lippi, Marco Nicoli, Nereo Modena and
Giancesare Guidi.
10- Hematol Cell Ther(1999) 41: 47-50 Evaluation of the monocyte counting by the Pentra 120.
Comparison with the manual method and fluoro-flow cytometry. M. Morillon, J. Maslin, J.J. De Pina, F.J.
Louis and G. Martet
11- Clin Chem Lab Med 2000; 38(3):245-249 Determination of reticulocytes: Three methods compared,
Rüdiger Siekmeier, Alexa Bierlich and Werner Jaroß
12- Journal of hematology ISSN 0390-6078 Assessment of hematologic progenitor engraftment by
complete reticulocyte maturation parameters after autologus and allogeneic hematopoietic stem cell
transplantation. Antonio Torres, Joaquin Sánchez, Didier Lakomsky, Josefina Serrano, Miguel A.
Alvarez, Carmen Martin, Carmen Valls, Lourdes Nevado, Antonia Rodriguez, Javier Casaño, Francisco
Martinez, Pedro Gómez.
13- Laboratory Hematology 7:75-80 Comparison of the Automated Reticulocyte Counts and Immature
Technical Manual
4 - 22 RAA027BEN
Technology
Reticulocyte Fraction Measurements Obtained With the HORIBA ABX PENTRA 120 Retic Blood
Analyzer and the Sysmex XE-2100 Automated Hematology Analyzer. CAROL BRIGGS, DONA GRANT,
SAMUEL J. MACHIN
14- American Journal of clinical pathology. Automated Reticulocyte Counting and Immature
Reticulocyte Fraction Measurement. Comparison of HORIBA ABX PENTRA 120 Retic, Sysmex R-2000,
Flow Cytometry, and Manual counts. Francis Lacombe, MD, PhD, Laurent Lacoste, Jean Philippe Vial,
MD, Alex Briais, Josy Reiffers, MD, Michel R. Boisseau, MD, and Philippe Bernard, MD.
3.6. Erythroblasts measuring principles
ERB MATRIX
The erythroblast matrix is generated from 2 measurements: resistivity volume and orthogonal
fluorescence of cells according on the X and Y axes respectively. Erythroblasts are serarated from the
leukocytes by their volume and from the platelet background by their fluorescence.
WBCN = box 4 + 5 + 7 + 8 + 10 + 11
ERB = box 3 + 6 + 9.
9 10 11
F3
6 7 8
F2
3 4 5
F1
R1 R2 R3
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 4 - 23
Technology
PARAMETERS AND RESULTS

■ ERB%: Percentage of counted erythroblasts.
ERB% = (ERB/WBCN) x 100
■ ERB#: Absolute value of erythroblasts.
ERB# = (ERB/(WBC# + ERB)) x WBC#
■ CWBC#: Corrected WBC.
■ CWBC# = 100(WBC#/(100 + ERB%))
Technical Manual
4 - 24 RAA027BEN
Mechanic principles & description
4. Mechanic principles & description
4.1. General principles
3 mechanical principles are used in the Pentra DX 120 - Pentra DF 120 to provide the mechanical
movements of some instrument parts:
■ Stepper motors: Loading of the rack into the rotation tray.
Rotation of the rack into the rotation system
Movement of the piercer in front of the rack
Ejection of the rack into the ejection tray
■ Aircylinders: Extraction of the sample tube from the rack

Piercing of the tube stopper
Cleaning of the manual sampling needle
Activation of the commutation valve
Activation of the sampling valve
■ DC motor: Movement of the 5DIFF syringes
The movements of the rack into the instrument are a combinaison of the different principles:
1- Loading racks: stepper motor
2- Rotation of the rack to the sampling position: stepper motor
3- Movement of the piercer in front of the sample tube: stepper motor
4- Tube grabbing and extraction: air cylinders
5- Piercing of the sample tube stopper: air cylinder
6- Re-insertion of the tube into the rack: air cylinder
7- Rotation of the rack to the ejection position: stepper motor
8- Ejection of the rack: stepper motor
LOADING
EXTRACTION EJECTION
ROTATION
PIERCING
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 4 - 25
4.2. Stepper motors principles
4.2.1. Generalities
Stepper motors are controlled by the stepper motor command board which is able to command the
different movements. These movements are driven by 4 specific stepper motors under the control of
different opto-detectors and micro-switches.
Each movement includes:

■A stepper motor,
■ An End Of Run 1 (EOR1) giving the reference position (home),
■ An End Of Run 2 (EOR2) giving the end of motion position,
■ The piercer stepper motor includes also a position encoder.
The rotation sequence of a stepper motor can be described with several parameters:
s
Sl
Ra
Rd
Tol
Sst
Sf
Stop EOR x
S: Speed X: Total number of steps to be reached
Sst: Starting speed Sl: Speed level
Sf: Final speed Ra: Acceleration rate
Rd: Deceleration rate Tol: Tolerance
■ The tolerance parameter acts as a security when an EOR sensor has to be reached. A generation order
of (X+Tol) steps is effectively executed and the stop at the EOR has to be included between the steps
(X+Tol) and (X-Tol). This procedure is called Control by generated step counting.
Several test programs are available to check the motor operations. These applications are
dedicated for maintenance purposes only and all requests on these applications will be
executed. None of the security systems will be activated in these menus.
■ Each of the 4 axis (sampler, rotation, ejection, loading) is commanded with a special «Motors» program
accessible in menu «Menus\Assistance\Adjustments».
Technical Manual
4 - 26 RAA027BEN
4.2.2. Absolute and relative homes

2 different figures can be described:
■ The motor has always the same motion from the starting point up to the EOR, which corresponds to
the maximum amplitude. In such a case, the final speed is always the same and the exact number of
steps can be easely calculated. The motor home can be called absolute home. This is the case of the
loading motor, rotation motor and ejection motor.
■ The motor has different motions according to the previous starting point to reach the EOR. In such a
case, speeds and phasis durations are calculated automatically according to the requested motion. As
a matter of fact, when a home detection is requested, the final speed when the home is reached, can
be different according to the motion duration. This can lead to some slight differences in the final stop
position. In order to avoid this problem during automatic cycles, the home reading is done according
to the previous motion. Final speeds to the home are then constant and this is call relative home
detection. This is the case of the sampling motor.
Only the first home detection at the instrument startup is an absolute home detection.
4.2.3. Home recovering

■ During the return to home phasis, the stepper motor turns until the sensor change its status. The motor
stops at this moment. However, a stop in such a position very critical can be dangerous as the sensor
may easely change its status (Vibrations for exemple). In order to make sure that this problem will not
arise, the motor is not stopping at the sensor detection, but few motor steps further.
■ This fixed number of steps is named «home recovering». It is adjustable through a maintenance
program. A minimum value is mandatory. Moreover, in order to cancel the sensor mechanical
adjustments (index, cell, etc...), the «zero» position is corrected when adjusting this recovering value.
4.2.4. Closed tube operation
■ To be able to use rack system, the instrument contains four step-by-step motors. The first is for
loading, the second for turning the rotation carriage, the third for moving the piercer carriage, and the
fourth for ejection.
■ To load a Rack, the rotation carriage has to be in upright position, without any rack in the upper case.
Then, the rack retainers turn down, and allow the whole stack to go down. But at a very precise position
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 4 - 27
(Ttechnician set only), two flaps go in position to jam the stack, except the rack being loaded. Then
rack retainers continue on there way down, and release the rack. It finishs its way in the rotation
carriage. The rack retainers go up, and hold the stack until the next loading. The flaps come back in
home position.
■ After the rack loading, the rotation carriage turn until tubes are put in front of the optical sensor. Then,
the piercer carriage moves, and stop in front of each tube, for the optical sensor to detect them. A
mirror takes place in the rotation carriage, for returning the light coming from the optical sensor (It has
light emitter and photocell in the same case. It allows the instrument to go faster, because it won't care
of free place after that (It won't try to take a sample of blood, or try to read the bar code). When a rack
just come into the instrument, the piercer carriage goes to read the rack barcode. The barcode reader
has an other function. To prevent any mistake such as changing the tube from the rack A to the Rack
B, it reads a sticker printed with barcodes symboles (Code are 0 or 1) on the rotation carriage. This
way, the main system knows from which rack is taken the tube, only by reading the sticker on the
rotation carriage.
Technical Manual
4 - 28 RAA027BEN
■ The barcode reader reads the barcode of the rack. This barcode has three different information. The
first three numbers give the number of the rack, the three letters give to the instrument the type of
measure it has to do, and the last two numbers give the size of the rack. Then, it is the rack which
decides the type of measure (CBR, RET, DIR, DIF, ...).
■ An option in the menus of the instrument allows the user to decide which measure he wants to do,
without taking in account the type of rack (It by-passs the rack type of measure).
■ The barcode reader is a sort of scanner. It means that it reads a line by moving a mirror, which sends
the light on a photocell. An embedded microprocessor analyses the up and down signals from the
photocell, and recognizes the code. To consider a read barcode as true, the barcode has to read four
times the same barcode. Then it accepts it, and sends the barcode number to the main system through
a serial line.
■ To take out a tube of blood, two air cylinder (One to put the clips out, and the other to close the clips)
are used. They extract the tube from the rack, and they maintain the tube up to the piercer. Then an
other air cylinder pushs the needle into the tube, and electrovalves 2 and 3 can take a sample of blood.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 4 - 29
■ To put a rack out of the instrument, an ejection fork come inside the rotation carriage while it is in
horizontal position. Then it turns in vertical position, and the fork holds the rack until it is out of the
instrument. This fork is mechanicaly connected to the door, then there movement are done together.
It is a very precise setting (HORIBA Medical technician only).
Technical Manual
4 - 30 RAA027BEN
4.2.5. Pressure and vacuum control
■ The vacuum circuit has two tanks connected in series. They stands as buffer, to reduces any vibration
due to the variation of the flow (of the consumption) or due to the compressor alternative way of
running. The pressure in these tanks is regulated by two regulators. They have a adjustable inlet valve,
which allows the air to come into if the pressure is too low. Two input filters prevent from any dust in
the circuit. To check the vacuum, the instrument has two gauges. One is mechanical (-330mB), the
other is electronical (-225mB). The mechanical one is located up to the piercer carriage. It just gives an
idee of the vacuum, but is not very sensitive. In case of adjustement. A accurate gauge must be used.
The electrical gauge is located on the pressure/vaccum board. It receives a hole connected to the -
225mB tank, and delivers a analogical signal, which is analysed by the alarm board. If an abnormal
pressure is detected, the instrument's main system will generate a vacuum error.
■ The -330mB vacuum tank supplies the dispensers and the waste chamber to fill them. This chamber
can have the lowest pressure in the instrument, to pump in all liquids. The -225mB vacuum tank
supplies the two regular vacuum chambers, which serve as waste chambers too. These three
chambers are the end of any liquids (mixted or not), their draining hole is connected to the waste can.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 4 - 31
■ The pressure circuit has only one tank, at a pressure of +2,8B, directly connected to the compressor.
An outlet adjustable valve allows the air to go out, if the pressure is too high. An electronical gauge is
connected to this tank. This gauge is on the pressure/vacuum board (Like the -225mB gauge). If the
pressure is abnormal, the alarm board will generate a pressure alarm. Before supplying anything, the
pressured air goes through a moister trap, which take the humidity out. This trap store the water, until
the discharge valve is activated. Then, the pressure pushs the water out of the instrument (into the
waste can). After that, this air is used for two things: The first is the supply of all air cylinders (at +2,8B)
to have a high strength. The second is the supply of the other parts of the instrument through a +1,5B
regulator. A pressure sensor is connected just after, it allows the user to check.
■ Itis important to set the regulator with a more accurate gauge (HORIBA Medical technician only). The
+1,5B air supplies the dispensers. After that, two other regulators connected in parallel drop the
pressure to +0,9B and +0,1B. The +0,9B circuit supplies the waste and regulated vacuum chambers.
The air pushs all liquids in the waste can. The +0,1B circuit supplies all bubbling pipes. It is a very
accurate setting. To regulate the bubbling flow, calibrated pipes are used. They let, under a +0,1B
pressure, a constant flow of air going into the chambers in which roughness is needed.
Technical Manual
4 - 32 RAA027BEN
Software versions
5 - Software versions
1. Software versions and compatibilities ................................................................2
2. Technical notes .....................................................................................................5
3. «Assistance» menu description ...........................................................................7
4. Command interpreter (Shell) ................................................................................9

4.1. Access to Shell ..................................................................................................................... 9
4.2. Shell commands ................................................................................................................... 9
4.3. Commands ......................................................................................................................... 10
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 5-1
Software versions
Software versions and compatibilities
1. Software versions and compatibilities

Software Technical
Main improvements
version note
V1.0.0 First software version RAN004AA
Avoid the instrument alarm: «EMERGENCY STOP Cycle DIF rack second 23
V1.0.1 RAN080AA
Run an AUTOCONTROL cycle, accessible from Other Cycles menu»
QC mode: Suspicion alarms (!) on Baso are disabled in QC mode.
Retic parameters are invalidated on FIT alarm and matrix is disabled (Matrix is
disabled only in «Standard» mode and enabled in «Transfer», «Latex» and
«Raw counts» modes). In any mode all Retic parameters are reported to «----».
V1.1.0 RAN111BA
Harmonization of the results rounding: Harmonization of the results when
displayed, printed or sent to host.
Management of SPS racks: Specific racks for SPS can be used.
Instrument boot and Screen saver: New logo Horiba ABX.
Reagent replacement: It is possible to change ABX Diluent without waiting for
the end of one SPS staining cycle.
Worklist synchronization between Pentra ML and Pentra DX 120/Pentra DF
V2.0.0 120. RAN159BB
Multiple reflex testing management: If the pentra ML reflex, for the same
sample, 2 different tests (SPS+RET), both reflex will be performed before rack
ejection.
V2.0.1 sample, 2 different tests (SPS+RET), both reflex will be performed before rack RAN242AA
ejection.
sample, 2 different tests (SPS+RET), both reflex will be performed before rack
V2.0.2 ejection. RAN243AA
Grabber operation: During grabber operation some tubes may not be correctly
grab, the grabber operation is modified in order to work correctly.
Technical Manual
5-2 RAA027BEN
Software versions
Software Technical
Main improvements
version note
■ WBC Balance:
During a DIF or DIR cycle, if LMNE- and BASO- flags are triggered and if the
value of the BASO/LMNE Balance is lower than the reject threshold
(configurable in Menu > User > WBC Balance), the software:
- Gives WBC result from BASO channel,
- Triggers a suspicion (!) on WBC result,
- Displays LMNE-, BASO- and WBC/BASO flags.
During a DIF or DIR cycle, if LMNE- and BASO- flags are triggered and if the
value of the BASO/LMNE Balance is higher or equals the reject threshold
(configurable in Menu > User > WBC Balance), the software:
- Gives WBC result from WBC channel,
- Triggers a reject (*) on WBC result,
- Displays LMNE- and BASO- flags.
When WBC/BASO flag occurs several consecutive times (configurable number
in Menu > Machine > Automatic Mode > Automatic Stops), the software:
- Does a Rack stop,
- Displays messages: "STOP RACK", "Several consecutive WBC/BASO flags"
and "CAUTION! Result match automatic stop conditions".
■ 10L Diluent Cubitainer
It is now possible to use a 10L cubitainer of Diluent.
■ Platelet Aggregates: New Conditions of «Suspicion» Message
If platelet result is <120 then Platelet Aggregates + is triggered.
If platelet result is <120 and PDW > 19.5 then Platelet Aggregates ++ and WBC
suspicion (!) are triggered.
For normal conditions of message «Platelet Aggregates», Platelet Aggregates
+++ and WBC suspicion (!) are triggered.2.4.
■ Platelet Raw Counts
The displayed raw counts for platelets are now coherent with the platelet
V2.2.0 RAN243D
results.
The Platelet raw count value is no longer sent in ABX format.
■ Suspicion (!) on WBC
If LMNE+, LMNE-, BASO+ or BASO- alarms are triggered, you will get a
suspicion (!) on WBC result.
If a suspicion (!) is triggered on WBC, a suspicion will also be displayed on
absolute values of NEU, EOS, LYM, BAS and MON.
■ SPS Rack Ejection
If the SPS Evolution have been upgraded from the software version V3.1.0.1 to
the software version 3.2.1.2, then it is possible to do a SPS rack ejection while
the Pentra DX 120 - Pentra DF 120 runs a cycle.
Warning, according to current cyles running on SPS Evolution, a message
«Ejection impossible» can be generated. However the rack ejection is
perfomed as soon as the cycle will allow.
■ HGB parameter transmission
HGB, MCHC and MCH are now sent to the LIS with 2 decimals instead of 3.
■ Modification of NE Threshold Default Value
This modification is only done by default on new systems, or when you install
the sofware with default environment (Option 2), or when you install as first
installation with format disk (Option 1).
If you keep environment when upgrading your software version (option 3), you
have to change the default value of NE threshold:
- In Menu > User > Type data capture/selection, choose the type to modify.
- Close the Type Window and go in Menu > User > Type parametering >
Thresholds.
- Change NE default value to 82.
- If needed, go back in Menu > User > Type data capture/selection to choose
another type and repeat the procedure.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 5-3
Software versions
Software Technical
Main improvements
version note
■ 2.1. Automatic sample take in QC mode
The Automatic sample take number was defined by default to 5 and is now set
to 1. This prevents to empty a control tube in one time if the «Setup on closed
tube» option is not readjusted before running the QC analyses.
Access: «Quality Assurance\Quality Control\Setup on Closed tube»
V2.2.1 RAN243E
■ 2.2. «Defect on Syringes block» alarm correction
When a DIR rack is run, then following a RET or CBR rack, an alarm «Defect on
Syringes block» occurs on the first tube of the second Rack and the analysis
cycle is stopped.
This error has been corrected in the V2.2.1 software version.
Technical Manual
5-4 RAA027BEN
Software versions
Technical notes
2. Technical notes
Technical
Date
note Technical note subject
(YYYYMMDD)
part number
Improvement of the matrix quality (Replacement of the emission gun
RAN007AA 20040112
filter, grounding the OD preamplifier board)
RAN021AA New EPL6200 EPSON printer 20040206
New setup of the LCD pcb
RAN034AA 20040302
Default setup in QWERTY mode
RAN035AA Availability of the interconnection diagrams 20040316
Kits master for Pentra DX 120 Workstation COMPAQ (XEA802AS) and
RAN003AA 20040319
FUJITSU (XEA803AS)
RAN024AA Update of Pentra DX 120 user manual 20040330
RAN004AA Kits software version V1.0.0 Pentra DX 120 20040405
RAN080AA V1.0.1 Patch kit XEA824AS 20040709
RAN096BA New barcode reader Datalogic touch65 pro 20040830
RAH965CA New barcode reader Nitsuko BCH5432 20040922
Pneumatic modification : Improvement of the one-way valve fixation on
RAN150AA 20041227
the vacuum circuit
RAN142AA Difftrol floppy disks for the use of ABX Lysebio 20050214
RAN140AA New waste sensors 20050221
RAN133AA Pentra DX 120 Fluocyte circuit teflon upgrade 20050330
RAN167AA LMNE Bench: Optical guns tighteness 20050420
RAN185AA Resistive threshold adjustment on Pentra DF 120 20050831
RAN134AA Valves <65> <79> screwed connectors kit 20050902
RAN111BA V1.1.0 Software upgrade 20050913
RAH389CA XEA422BS Replacement kit for valve <7> 20050913
RAN205AA New cloche HP chamber 20051107
RAN159BB Pentra DX 120/Pentra DF 120 V2.0.0 Software upgrade kit 20051129
RAN161BA pentra ML master installation kit 20060106
RAN217BA New hard drive 40Gb 20060227
RAN170CA V2.0.0 Software Hard Disk kit 20060306
RAN172DA V3.0.1 pentra ML software release 20060419
RAN242AA V2.0.1 Pentra DX 120/Pentra DF 120 software release 20060509
RAN243AA V2.0.2 Pentra DX 120/Pentra DF 120 software release 20060609
RAN243D V2.2.0 Pentra DX 120/Pentra DF 120 software release 20091022
RAN253A 1ml dispenser improvement 20070108
RAN254A Installation of a piercer security device 20070424
RAN271A New Joucomatic valves 20080917
RAN276A Modification of the ABX Leucodiff connection to the sampling valve 20061124
RAN279A Kit for RBC chamber blood injection improvement 20061229
RAN280A Kit for LMNE chamber injection improvement 20061229
RAN282A NE threshold value modification 20070807
RAN297A New tolerances for optical bench lamp adjustment 20070810
RAN306A Creation of flange connectors 20070811
RAN308A Kit temperature probe 20070329
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 5-5
Software versions
Technical notes
Technical
Date
note Technical note subject
(YYYYMMDD)
part number
RAN311A Main cover replacement 20070512
RAN313A New slow-blow fuse for power supply board 20070705
RAN314A Rack Loading 20080205
RAN324A Rack detection switches adjustement 20070309
RAN328A News racks reception assy 20071113
RAN330A New waste detection assembly for waste container 20070801
RAN355A Open tube / close tube correlation coefficient for control bloods 20081031
RAN356A Tiltwatch and Shockwatch packaging 20071204
RAN365A Instrument design harmonisation 20080204
RAN382A New tool Laser Head test 20090626
RAN385A Sample detector obsolescence 20100401
RAN398A Mini keyboard obsolescence 20081023
RAN401A Configuration LCD Eprom v2.1.1/v2.0.2 20090116
RAN404A New ROHS frame plates 20080312
RAN415A New ranges of PMT Voltages 20090624
RAN418A Peelable spacer: flowcell RET 20090503
RAN420A New BASO temperature adjustment 20090330
RAN441A New Diluent straws 20090707
RAN442A Elbow fitting for piercing air cylinder 20100126
RAN447A LMNE bubbling regulator 20100125
RAN450A Improvement of the piercing assy 20100312
RAN458A NRBC’s modification (procedure + addendum) 20100315
RAN472A NRBC’s modification (information only) 20100324
Technical Manual
5-6 RAA027BEN
Software versions
«Assistance» menu description
3. «Assistance» menu description
MENU
Assistance
Printout
1-Calibration records 1-All
2-Selected results
Printout
1-All
F10 2-Selected results
2-User intervention records 1-Record review
F7
Delete all
3-Tech. intervention records 2-Record update
Printout
4-Reagent records 1-Consult records F10 1-All
2-Selected results
2-Autonomy update F1 Batch # data capture
Printout
5-Blank cycle records F10 1-All
2-Selected results
6-Information window
Transmission status
7-Adjustments
1-Connection 1-Spool status
2-Stop spool
8-R.U.O 3-Re-start spool
4-Resetting the spool
9-Connection 5-Driver RS status
6-Abort connection
Monitor mode
2-Terminal mode 1-Display mode
2-Window deleting
3-Monitor mode
Safeguard/Restore
0-Parameters safeguard 1-All the parametering
2-User’s parametering
A-Restoring parameters 3-Machine parametering
B-Shell
C-Application
D-Interrupt printout
Error file
E-Error file 1-Error file F7 1-Printout
2-Copy on floppy disk
3-Delete
Archiving/Consulting
F-Archived records 1-Archiving on FD 1-Blank cycle records
2-Calibration records
G-Floppy disk formating 2-Consulting 3-Daily average
4-Reagent records
H-Tubes in hand 5-User records
6-Technician records
7-All records «Arch. only»
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 5-7
Software versions
«Assistance» menu description
MENU
Assistance
1-Calibration records 1-Human blood Open/Closed tube coef.
2-Control blood Open/Closed tube coef.
3-Calibrator Open/Closed tube coef.

2-User intervention records
4-Alignment
3-Tech. intervention records
5-Blood cell
Rack motors
4-Reagent records 6-Motors 1-Internal barcode reading
2-Sensor reading
3-Barcode setting
4-Piercing needle mov.
5-Rotating system mov.
6-Ejector movements
7-Loading movements
5-Blank cycle records 8-Motor movements
9-Grabber movements
6-Information window 0-Special cycles
7-Adjustments Syringe Cycles

7-Syringe assy 1-Needle up slowly
8-R.U.O 2-Needle down slowly
3-Needle up quickly
4-Needle down quickly
9-Connection
5-Stop needle
6-Block break-in
7-Break-in cycle
LASER
8-Laser 1-Laser
2-RET
3-ERB
0-Parameters safeguard 4-Threshold
A-Restoring parameters Special options

9-Options Normal mode
B-Shell Transfer
Latex Mode
C-Application Raw counts
D-Interrupt printout 0-5P01 LMNE Threshold adj.
E-Error file A-5P01 ERB ERB threshold adj.
Calculation values
B-Haemoglobin Proportion
HGB Blank reject (%)
F-Archived records Minimum blank ref.
G-Floppy disk formating
H-Tubes in hand
Technical Manual
5-8 RAA027BEN
Software versions
Command interpreter (Shell)
4. Command interpreter (Shell)
4.1. Access to Shell
Entering shell can be done in 2 different ways:

■ At the beginning of the instrument initalization, press the <ALT> + <ESC> keys simultaneously, the
following message appears: «a valid OS-9 bootfile was found». Press simultaneously on the <CTRL>
+ <C> keys, the initialization of the application program stops and the shell line is displayed: /h0>.
■ From the main menu, move the cursor to function «Assistance» and validate. Move the cursor to the
function «Shell» and validate. Technician password is requested. Enter the password and validate, the
SHELL line is displayed.
Using shell commands should be done by HORIBA MEDICAL trained personal only and any
suspected fault should be reported to HORIBA MEDICAL representative service department.
4.2. Shell commands
More than 50 different commands can be used. They are contained into a library module called «cio»
which is linked to the startup file. Each command is constituted by different fields which are as follow:
■ The command name: Name of a program, of a command file, a shell integrated command or a shell
option.
■ The target name: A file or a directory (or several of these) on which the command will act.
■ The parameters: They are given to the program to indicate the execution particularities. An option is
normally constituted of a character preceeded by the sign «_». Several options can be given to the
same program.
■ The execution modifiers: They allow the modification of the program execution characteristics by the
redirection of the standard Inputs/Outputs pathways, the priority value or the allocated memory size.
The shell uses special characters called modifiers or metacharacters (; ! < > & ...). They have a specific
signification:
; allows to chain different commands on a same line.
< redirection of the standard entry to a peripheral or a file.
> redirection of the standard output to a peripheral or a file.
>> redirection of the error standard output on a peripheral or a file.
! redirection of the process standard output on another process standard entry (pipe).
& run a process on a background.
■ The separators: They precise the execution mode (sequential or simultaneous) of several programs
requested on the same line.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 5-9
Software versions
4.3. Commands
Most of the OS9 commands are written in C language. They allow different tasks such as:
■ File management.
■ Multi-task management.
■ Time sharing management.
■ Texte edition.
Nearly all these functions have an option «-?». It allows to know the syntax, the use and the command
options. The different functions use on the instrument can be seen in the CMDS directory.
■ PD: Indicates the current unit and the position into the system arborescence.
■ ECHO: Sends a code on an output.

Syntax: echo «TEXTE» ↵
For example, it is possible to check a printer connection by sending the command:
echo «PRINTER TEST» >/ p
■ SETIME: Clock set time

Syntax: setime ↵
■ DATE: Clock check

Syntax: date ↵
Options: -m: Displays the military time.
■ CHD: This command allows to change directory. The path is created by inserting «/» in between each
name of the arborescence.
Syntax: chd XXX/YYY ↵
For example, access to the BOOTOBJS directory is done with the command:
CHD /H0/CMDS/BOOTOBJS ↵
It is possible to return to the upper level with the command: CHD .. ↵
.. gives to the chd command the name of the father directory.
. gives the current directory name.
These 2 indicators allow an indexation move.
■ DIR: This command gives the content of a directory.

Syntax: DIR [option] <DIRECTORY NAME> ↵
For example the content of the SYS directory is given by the command:
DIR /H0/SYS ↵
Options:
-e: Give the following supplementary informations on the directory content: file size, properties,
location, date of the last modification.
-a: Displays all files.
■ MAKDIR: creation of a new directory.

Syntax: MAKDIR <DIRECTORY NAME> ↵
■ DELDIR: Erase a directory.

Syntax: DELDIR [option] <DIRECTORY NAME> ↵
Options:
Technical Manual
5 - 10 RAA027BEN
Software versions
-q: Non verbose mode, normal questions are no more displayed.

-f: Erase all files, even those which are written protected.
■ DEL: Erase files.

Syntax: DEL [option] <file name> ↵
Options:
-q: Non verbose mode, normal questions are no more displayed.
-f: Erase all files, even those which are written protected.
■ RENAME: Rename a file or a directory.

Syntax: RENAME <old name><new name> ↵
■ LIST: Visualisation of a file content.

Syntax: LIST <file name> ↵
A file can be printed out by the command: list <file name> >/P ↵
■ COPY: Copy files.

Syntax: COPY <name of the source file> [option] <name of the target directory>¿
Options:
-r: Re-write the file if it already exists into the target directory.
-f: Re-write the file if it already exists into the target directory even if it is written protected.
-v: Check the copied files with the cmp command.
-w=<dir>: copy the files into the specified directory.
■ CMP: Binary comparison of 2 files.

Syntax: CMP <name of the source file> <name of the target file> ↵
■ DSAVE: Backup an arborescence.

Syntax: DSAVE [option] <name of the target directory> ↵
DSAVE copies all the arborescence from the current level into the target directory. This function allows
environment backups.
Options:
-e: Executes the commande immediately.
-s: Continue the backup even if an error occurs.
■ FORMAT: format a hard disk or a floppy disk.

Syntax: FORMAT [option] <name of a target unit> ↵
The format command allows to format:
*SCSI disks (Warning: These disks must not be physically formated).
*1Mo floppy disk 720Ko (/d0).
*2Mo floppy disk 1.44Mo (/hd0).
Options:
-v=<name>: Name of the formated volume. Maximum 32 characters.
-np: No physical format
-nv: No check
-e: Displays the time for each sector check.
-s: Continue the backup even if an error occurs.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 5 - 11
Software versions
-c=<nb>: Gives the number of sectors by cluster. <nb> must be an integral power of 2 (1, 2, 4, 8 and
so on). Default value is 1.
■ FREE: Displays the available size on the unit.

Syntax: FREE <target unit name> ↵
■ MFREE: Displays the available memory on the system.

Syntax: MFREE [option] ↵
Options:
-e: Displays an extended infomation on the memory zone.
■ DCHECK: Check the links integrity between directories and files.

Syntax: DCHECK [option] <unit name> ↵
options:
-r: Repair mode. Rebuilt allocation map from file structure.
-y: Repair mode. Answer «Y» to all questions. To be used with the -r option.
■ LOAD: Load a module in memory.

Syntax: LOAD [option] <file name> ↵
Display the data in lines of 16 bits in hexadecimal and ASCII formats. This allows the visualization of
modules non interpretables by a text editor.
Options:
-d: Load the file from the current directory and not from the execution directory (CMDS in general).
■ DUMP: Displays the files as character tables (HEXA and ASCII).

Syntax: DUMP [option] <file name> ↵
Display the data in lines of 16 bits in hexadecimal and ASCII formats. This allows the visualization of
modules non interpretables by a text editor.
Options:
-m: Dump the module residant in memory.
■ PRINTENV: Displays the environment variables.

Syntax: PRINTENV ↵
Displays the terminal type in use, the source unit, the paths ...
■ IDENT: Displays the identification of an OS9 module.

Syntax: IDENT [option] <file name> ↵
Displays the module edition, its size, its CRC module, the header parity...These informations are usefull
in order to recognize modules into an application, specially in the drivers.
Options:
-m: Search the resident module in memory.
■ DEVS: Gives the name of the peripherals recognized by OS9.

Syntax: DEVS ↵
The function displays a table giving:
*the descriptor name
*the driver name
*the associated file manager name
*the storing address of the driver
*the link counter
The link counter indicates the number of modules having a permanent access with the peripheral. As
long as the number is not null, the peripheral is known.
Technical Manual
5 - 12 RAA027BEN
Software versions
■ INIZ:Allows the peripheral to be recognized by the OS9 kernel.

Syntax: INIZ <peripheral name> ↵
When a peripheral is known, a recognition step is not required, its access is faster.
Example: Iniz h0 d0 p ↵
The kernel will create links with peripherals h0, d0 and p without beforehand search.
■ DEINIZ: Removes a peripheral from the link table of the system in order to replace it for example.
Syntax: DEINIZ <peripheral name> ↵
In order to «DEINIZ» a peripheral, it is necessary that its link counter has a 0 value. Repeat
the command if necessary until it is not present any more into the link table.
■ PROCS: Displays the active processes.

Syntax: PROCS [option] ↵
Options:
-a: Display alternate data.
-b: Display both normal and alternate data.
-e: Display every valid process.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 5 - 13
Software versions
Technical Manual
5 - 14 RAA027BEN
Output format
6 - Output format
1. Connection between Analyzer and Pentra ML ...................................................2

1.1. From analyzer ....................................................................................................................... 2
1.2. From Station ......................................................................................................................... 4
2. Connection to laboratory .....................................................................................6
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 6-1
Output format
Connection between Analyzer and Pentra ML
1. Connection between Analyzer and Pentra ML
1.1. From analyzer
■ From menu\Machine\Connection\RS232-C configuration, setup the instrument as follows:
Transmission speed (Baud rate): 38400

Parity: None
Length: 8
Stop bit: 1
Protocol: None
Mode: Bidirectionnal
Format: ABX
CRC Check: not selected
SOH-EOT: not selected
Timeout (ENQ/ACK/NACK): 15 seconds
Waiting time (2°SOH): 17 seconds
Automatical disconnection: selected
Term to disconnection: 23 seconds
Reject same files: not selected
Analyser no.: 1
Work separator: ;
■ From menu\Machine\Connection\RS Output Format (ABX)\Numeraical values, setup the
instrument as follows:
Technical Manual
6-2 RAA027BEN
Output format
All the parameters must be selected.
■ From menu\Machine\Connection\RS Output Format (ABX)\Alarms and pathologies, setup the

All alarms and pathologies selected except for ERB (Not defined at the time).
■ From menu\Machine\Connection\RS Output Format (ABX)\Curves and thresholds, setup the
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 6-3
Output format
All parameters must be selected.
■ From menu\Machine\Connection\RS Output Format (ABX)\PAtient file, setup the instrument as

follows:
Default parametering for patient file.
1.2. From Station
■ From menu Settings\System\Communication\Instrument Settings, setup Station as follows:
Technical Manual
6-4 RAA027BEN
Output format
Name: pentraDX
Format: pentraDX
Port: 1
Transmission speed (Baud rate): 38400
Data bits: 8
Stop bits: 1
Parity: None
XON-XOFF: not selected
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 6-5
Output format
Connection to laboratory
2. Connection to laboratory
■ See HORIBA MEDICAL output format:
- RAA034 for Pentra DX 120 - Pentra DF 120
- RAA026 for pentra ML
Technical Manual
6-6 RAA027BEN
Troubleshooting
7 - Troubleshooting
1. Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................2
1.1. All parameters ....................................................................................................................... 2
1.2. RBC/PLT parameters ........................................................................................................... 3
1.3. WBC/HGB parameters ......................................................................................................... 3
1.4. LMNE BASO parameters ...................................................................................................... 4
1.5. RETIC parameters ................................................................................................................ 5
2. Error message file .................................................................................................6
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 7-1
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
1. Troubleshooting
■ The procedures described below should be performed whenever the precision of a parameter is not
within the specifications noted above, or a parameter result is incorrect or suspicious.
■ When all parameters are affected, it is necessary to look for a common cause (vacuum/pressure,
sample aspiration, common reagent pollution, etc ...).
■ When only one parameter is affected, it is necessary to look for a cause in this specific channel. The
different tables below give the possible causes for the concerned parameter, the instrument response
(flags, error messages, etc ...) and the necessary actions.
1.1. All parameters
Possible causes Effects Instrument response Action

High background Reagent
Expired reagents noise Poor Startup rejected or replacement
Polluted reagents repeatability run systematically on Cleaning cycle
Dirty instrument QC outside 3 blank cycles Autoconcentrated
acceptable limits cleaning
Poor calibration QC outside Flags on QC results
Expired calibrant acceptable limits Suspicious message Calibration with a
Contaminated or Suspicious patient or flags on all new vial
diluted calibrant results parameters
Incorrect sampling
Message printed and Cleaning cycle
Low level of blood into
displayed instead of Autoconcentrated
the tube
No result the result cleaning
Clotted samples
Cycles stop if the Sampling valve
Rubber cap particules
alarm persists cleaning
(poor quality caps)
Vacuum pressure
Vacuum/Pressure No result Current cycle stops
adjust.
incorrect adjustment Poor chamber drain Drain chamber alarm
Autocontrol cycle
High background Startup rejected or Check
noise Poor run systematically on environment
repeatability 3 blank cycles (Electrical
Incorrect envi ronment QC outside Flags on QC results interferences,
acceptable limits Suspicious message Electromagnetic
Suspicious patient or flags on all fields from other
results parameters instruments)
Technical Manual
7-2 RAA027BEN
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
1.2. RBC/PLT parameters

Startup rejected or run
RBC/PLT high
systematically on 3
Blocked aperture background noise Reagent replacement
blank cycles
Dirty counting chamber RBC/PLT poor Cleaning cycle
Flags on QC results
RBC/PLT reagent line repeatability Autoconcentrated
Suspicion flags or
dirty QC results outside RBC/ cleaning
alarms on RBC/PLT
PLT acceptable limits
results
QC results outside RBC/ Flags on QC results
RBC/PLT poor PLT acceptable limits Suspicion flags or RBC/PLT calibration
calibration Patient results alarms on RBC/PLT with a new vial
suspicious results
RBC/PLT poor Flags on QC results
RBC/PLT incorrect repeatability Suspicion flags or Adjust RBC/PLT
bubbling QC results outside RBC/ alarms on RBC/PLT bubbling
PLT acceptable limits results
RBC/PLT poor Flags on QC results Cleaning cycle
RBC/PLT loop of the repeatability Suspicion flags or Autoconcentrated
sampling valve dirty QC results outside RBC/ alarms on RBC/PLT cleaning
PLT acceptable limits results Sampling valve cleaning
No result
Vacuumlpressure Current cycle stops Adjust vacuum pressure
Poor RBC/PLT chamber
incorrect adjustment Drain chamber alarm Autocontrol cycle
drainage
1.3. WBC/HGB parameters

WBC/HGB background
systematically on 3
Blocked WBC aperture noise Reagent replacement
blank cycles
WBC/HGB chamber Poor WBC/HGB Cleaning cycle
Flags on QC results
dirty repeatability Autoconcentrated
Suspicion flags or
WBC/HGB lines dirty QC outside limits for cleaning
alarms on WBC/HGB
WBC/HGB
parameters
QC outside hits for
Suspicion flags or
Poor calibration on WBC/HGB WBC/HGB calibration
alarms on WBC/HGB
WBC/HGB Patient results with a new vial
parameters
suspicious
Poor WBC/HGB Flags on QC results
lncorrect bubbling on repeatability Suspicion flags or Adjust WBC/HGB
WBC/HGB QC outside limits for alarms on WBC/HGB bubbling
WBC/HGB parameters
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 7-3
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Cleaning cycle
Poor WBC/HGB Flags on QC results
Autoconcentrated
WBC/HGB loop of the repeatability Suspicion flags Or
cleaning
sampling valve blocked QC outside limits for alarms on WBC/HGB
Cleaning of the sampling
WBC/HGB parameters
valve
WBC/HGB increased DIL flag on WBC Check ABX Alphalyse
ABX Alphalyse line values Suspicion flags or lines
blocked Patient results alarms on WBC/HGB ABX Alphalyse
suspicious parameters replacement
No results
Vacuum pressure Current cycle stops Adjust vacuum/pressure
Poor drainage of the
incorrect adjustment Chamber drainage alarm Autocontrol cycle
WBC/HGB chamber
1.4. LMNE BASO parameters

systematically on 3
Reagent replacement
LMNE flowcell blocked Matrix noise too high blank cycles
Cleaning cycle
LMNE chamber durty Poor separation of the Flags on QC results
Autoconcentrated
ABX Leucodiff lines dirty matrix populations Suspicion flags or
cleaning
alarms on the 5DIFF
parameters
systematically on 3 Reagent replacement
BASO aperture blocked BASO noise too high
blank cycles Cleaning cycle
BASO chamber dirty Patient results
Flags on QC results Autoconcentrated
ABX Basolyse lines dirty suspicious
Suspicion flags or cleaning
alarms on the BASO
Flags on QC results
Poor LMNE repeatability
lncorrect bubbling on Suspicion flags or
QC results outside limits Adjust LMNE bubbling
LMNE chamber alarms on the 5DIFF
on LMNE
parameters
Poor BASO repeatability Flags on QC results
lncorrect bubbling on
QC results outside limits Suspicion flags or Adjust BASO bubbling
BASO chamber
on BASO alarms on the BASO
Flags on QC results Cleaning cycle
Poor LMNE repeatability
LMNE sampling loop Suspicion flags or Autoconcentrated
QC results outside limits
blocked alarms on the 5DIFF cleaning
on LMNE
parameters Sampling valve cleaning
Cleaning cycle
Poor BASO repeatability Flags on QC results
BASO sampling loop Autoconcentrated
QC results outside limits Suspicion flags or
blocked cleaning
on BASO alarms on the BASO
Sampling valve cleaning
Technical Manual
7-4 RAA027BEN
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
1.5. RETIC parameters

LMNE/RETIC chamber Important background Startup failed or run on 3
dirty noise on the RETIC blank cycles Reagent replacement
RETIC flowcell aperture matrix Flags on QC Cleaning cycle
blocked Poor separation of the Suspicion messages or Autoconcentrated
ABX Fluocyte reagent populations on the flags on RETIC cleaning
lines dirty RETIC matrix parameters
Poor RETIC repeatability Flags on QC
Incorrect bubbling into
QC outside acceptable Suspicion messages or RETIC bubbling
the LMNE/RETIC
limits on RETIC flags on RETIC adjustment
chamber
parameters parameters
Cleaning cycle
Poor RETIC repeatability Flags on QC
Blockage of the RETIC Autoconcentrated
QC outside acceptable Suspicion messages or
loop of the sampling cleaning
limits on RETIC flags on RETIC
valve Cleaning of the sampling
parameters parameters
valve
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 7-5
Troubleshooting
Error message file
2. Error message file

The SYS directory contains the errmsg file which keep all error messages generated by the OS9
system.This file can be printed out by the command:
list /h0/sys : errmsg >/p ↵
Print of the error message list

■ Make sure that the printer is ON.
■ At the instrument power ON, press simultaneously the <Ctrl> + <Alt keys>. When the message «A
valid OS-9 bootfile was found», press simultaneously the <Ctrl> + <C> keys several times until the
system goes to shell.
■ Initialize the printer on the normal mode. /PF (printer operating on a FIFO mode) has to be replaced
with /P: iniz p ↵
■ Print the error message list: list trace.err >/p ↵
■ De-initialize the printer at the end of the printout: deiniz p ↵
■ Re-enter the deiniz command line several times in order to make sure that he printer is de-initialized.
Technical Manual
7-6 RAA027BEN
Maintenance
8 - Maintenance
1. Maintenance procedures .....................................................................................2
2. Service technician maintenance & adjustments ................................................3
3. Procedures ..........................................................................................................14
RAS437A: ABX Cellcount Installation and setup
RAS438A: Additional station installation and setup
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 8-1
Maintenance
Maintenance procedures
1. Maintenance procedures
Customer maintenance has to be carried out according to the recommended frequency chart
table and after having performed an HORIBA MEDICAL approved customer training course.
The system warranty may be affected if damage occurs after a non trained technician
intervenes or if replaced spare parts and consumables do not come from an HORIBA
MEDICAL approved origin.
1.1. Daily customer maintenance
No special adjustments or maintenance has to be done on your equipment if the recommended startup
and shutdown procedures are explicitly respected.
1.2. Weekly customer maintenance
An overall check for cleanliness of the system is recommended every week.

All traces of blood or reagent have to be wiped off as soon as possible using a piece of cloth and distilled
water.
Never use solvent or abrasive cleaning material to clean the system.
Technical Manual
8-2 RAA027BEN
Maintenance
Service technician maintenance & adjustments
2. Service technician maintenance &

adjustments
2.1. Maintenance frequency chart tables
2.1.1. Mechanical and pneumatic maintenance table
Frequency
Mechanical &
Workload 1/
pneumatic 3/year 1/year On request
2 years
Stepper motors Check & Adjust operation RAS406
Grabber assy Check & Adjust operation RAS405
Filter replacement RAS402
Compressor
Compressor kit replacement RAS404
Pressure and
Check & Adjust operation RAS409
vacuum
Filter replacement RAS402
Vacuum regulators
Cleaning & lubrification RAS401
Electromagnetic
Check operation RAS406
switch
Vacuum/Pressure
Drain tanks RAS426
tanks
Discharge
Check operation X
electrovalve
Sampler endless
Check X
screw
Air cylinder Check operation X
Replacement of the adhesive
Ejection tray RAS402
guides
Check & Cleaning X
Fans & filters
Filter replacement X
Racks Physical check X
Switches Check tightening X
Driving belts Check belt tension X
Clean window RAS401
Barcode reader
Check operation RAS408
Tube detector Check operation RAS408
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 8-3
Maintenance
2.1.2. Hydraulic maintenance table
Frequency
Hydraulic Workload 1/
3/year 1/year On request
2 years
O’ring replacement
Sampling piercing Furon sealing replacement
RAS401
needle Cleaning
Rinsing cup cover replacement
Sampling valve Cleaning RAS410
Teflon sealing replacement
Manual sampling
O’ring replacemen RAS401
needle
Needle replacement
Commutation
Cleaning RAS411
valve
LMNE flowcell Pentra DX/DF 120 OAM/Diftex
RAS415
position adjustments
Chamber cleaning
RBC & BASO
Counting heads maintenance RAS401
chambers
Electrode maintenance
Chambers cleaining
Waste chambers RAS402
O’ring replacement
5DIFF syringe
O’ring & seal replacement RAS401
block
Membrane Check operation X
pumps Assy replacement RAS432
One-way reagent
Cleaning RAS402
valves
Chamber cleaning
WBC chamber &
Counting head maintenance
spectophotomete RAS401
Electrode maintenance
r
Spectrophotometer check
Liquid valves Check operation X
Check X
Reagent needles
Replacement X
Anti-foam filters Replacement RAS402
2.1.3. Electrical & Electronic maintenance table
Frequency
Electrical & Electronic Workload 1/
2 years
Power supply module Check & Adjustment RAS403
Matrix optical gain adjustment
Matrix Baso curve resistive
LMNE Baso results
gain adjustment RAS418
adjustment
Flowcell transfer time check
Differential repeatability
WBC, RBC, PLT gains Check & Adjustment RAS414
Thresholds Check X
Technical Manual
8-4 RAA027BEN
Maintenance
Frequency
Electrical & Electronic Workload 1/
2 years
Baso chamber temperature
Temperature adjustment RAS416
LMNE chamber adjustment
Sampling detection
Check & Adjustment X
cells
Waste detection cells Check & Adjustment X
Check & Adjustment
Optical bench lamp
Replacement RAS402
HGB blank Check & Adjustment RAS413
Pressure/Vacuum
Check & Adjustment RAS406
display
2.2. Maintenance kits
2.2.1. Every 4 month maintenance kit XEA384AS
P/n Designation Qty

FAA025A O’ring 2.4x1.9 nit. 70sh (sampling needle) 1
FAA026A O’ring 2.6x1.9 nit. 70sh (5DIFF syringe 127µl) 2
FAA040A O’ring 12.1x2.7 silic. (5DIFF syringe) 1
FAA046A O’ring 2.75x1.6 viton (Electrode) 5
FAA049A O’ring 2.2x1 silic. 70sh (Aperture) 3
FAA057A O’ring 15x1 nit. (Rinsing cup) 1
FAA058A Furon joint (Rinsing cup) 1
FAA060A O’ring 12.1x1.6 (Rinsing cup) 1
GAH024A Needle teflon joint 2
GAL074A Sampling needle joint 1
GBD689A Filter 1
HAU075A Rinsing cup cover 1
2.2.2. Yearly maintenance kit XEA380AS
P/n Designation Qty

DAJ006A Lamp 50W Philips 1
EBB051A Compressor filters 1/4 2
EBB053A Silent filter 1/8 4
EBB056A Silent filter 0.22µm 1
FAA023A O’ring 16x1.25 Nit. 70sh 1
FAL008A Shock absorber 4
GAL098AS Sleeving 10
JAJ007A Polyethylene ribbon 1
XCA165A Regulated vacuum filter 3
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 8-5
Maintenance
P/n Designation Qty

XEA286AS O’ring + Waste chamber joint 3
XEA425AS Compressor maintenance kit 1
2.2.3. Tygon tube maintenance kit XEA410AS
Qty
P/n Designation
(m)
EAE001AS Tube tygon 0.254mm (0.010’’) 1
EAE011AS Tube cristal 3x6 1
EAE019AS Tube silicon 0.78x2.58 1
EAE020AS Tube silicon 1x3 1
EAE025AS Tube silicon 1.5x3.5 1
EAE027AS Tube cristal 1.5x3 1
EAE032AS Tube silicon 1.5x3 1
EAE035AS Tube tygon 2.29mm (Green) 1
EAE036AS Tube tygon 2.29mm (Blue) 1
EAE037AS Tube polyurethane 4x6 1
EAE039AS Tube teflon 0.8x1.8 1
EAE040AS Tube teflon 0.56x1.06 1
EAE042AS Tube polyurethane 5.5x8 1
EAE045AS Tube viton 1/16’’ 1
EAE046AS Tube teflon 1.5x2 1
EAE051AS Tube silicon 4.5x8 1
2.2.4. Screws and washers kit XEA293AS
P/n Designation Qty

JAG004A Plastic box 1
KAA002A Screw CHC M3x6 20
Technical Manual
8-6 RAA027BEN
Maintenance
P/n Designation Qty

KAB002A Screw FHC M3x6 20
KAB016A Screw FX M3x8 5
KAC002A Screw TC M3x5 20
KAE003A Screw BHC M4x12 20
KAH001A Nut HU M3 20
KAH024A Nut 1/4 10
KAJ001A Washer M d=3 20
KAJ007A Washer AZ d=3 20
KAJ008A Washer AZ d=4 20
KAJ009A Washer d=5 20
KAJ010A Waasher (Grower) d=5 20
KAM002A Cross piece M3x6 lgt=8mm 10
KAM004A Cross piece M3.5x6 lgt=6mm 10
KAM010A Cross piece M3x6 lgt=10mm 10
KAM011A Cross piece M3.5x6 lgt=5.7mm 10
KAM017A Brass wire cross piece M3.2x6 lgt=3mm 10
2.2.5. Fitting and connector kit XEA311AS
P/n Designation Qty

JAG004A Plastic box 1
EAA005A Straight connector d=1.6mm 1/8 10
EAA006A Straight connector GES 3M5 10
EAA009A Bent connecctor 10/32 10
EAA013A Bent connector WES4 / R1/8 10
EAA014A Straight connector GES4 / R1/8 10
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 8-7
Maintenance
P/n Designation Qty

EAB002A «L» connector 10
EAB003A Connector d=4 20
EAB005A «T» connector d=1.6mm T10-6 30
EAB006A «T» connector d=2.3mm 30
EAB009A Straight connector d=1.6mm 30
EAB021A «Y» connector d=3mm 3
EAB026A «Y» connector d=2.5mm 3
2.3. Maintenance & adjustment procedures
Maintenance and adjustments that need to be done on Pentra DX 120 - Pentra DF 120 are
divided into «procedures» according to concerned assemblies.
Each procedure has to be read entirely before beginning the intervention.
Disposable gloves, eyes protection and lab coat must be worn by the operator.
Local or national regulations must be applied in all the operations.
2.3.1. Piercer security device

In order to prevent any injury when handling the piercer, a security device has been created. This security
is placed on the piercer guide before any intervention of cleaning, dis-assembling, re-assembling, etc....
It has to be remove after installation of the piercer block on the instrument. This security piercer kit is
available with the part number : XEA956AS.
Technical Manual
8-8 RAA027BEN
Maintenance
2.3.2. Procedure chart table
P/n Workload
RAS400B: Installation Installation
RAS401B: Every 4 month maintenance Maintenance
RAS402A: Yearly maintenance Maintenance
Switching power supplies - Linear supplies -
Aperture current
RAS404A: Compressor maintenance Maintenance
RAS405A: Grabber cleaning Cleaning
RAS406B: Stepper motors adjustment Checks & adjustments
RAS408B: Internal BC reader & Tube detector
Check & adjustment
adjustment
RAS409A: Pressure/Vacuum adjustment Display adjusment
RAS410A: Sampling valve maintenance Maintenance & cleaning
RAS411A: Commutation valve maintenance Check & adjustment
RAS412A: Sample detection cells adjustment Check & adjustment
RAS415B: LMNE adjustments OAM adjustment - DIFTEX adjustment
RAS416B: Temperature adjustment BASO T° adjustment - LMNE T° adjustment
RAS417A: Bubbling check & adjustment Adjustment
Matrix optical gain adjustment - Matrix Baso
RAS418A: BASO result adjustment resistive gain adjustment - Flowcell transfer time
check - Differential repeatability
RAS419A: WBC Balance adjustment Adjustment
RAS420A: RETIC Flowcell adjustment Alignement
RAS421A: RETIC Resistive gain adjustment Adjustment
RAS422B: RETIC Results & Correlation final adjustment Final checks
RAS423A: PMT Replacement & adjustment Replacement
RAS424B: ERB adjustment Pentra DX 120 adjustment
RAS425A: Instrument decontamination Decontamination
RAS426A: Vacuum/Pressure tank maintenance Maintenance
RAS427A: External barcode reader setup Setup
RAS428B: LASER Optical bench replacement Replacement
RAS429A: LMNE Flowcell replacement Replacement
RAS430A: LASER Optical bench board replacement Replacement
RAS431A: Motor power board replacement Replacement
RAS432A: Membrane pump dismantling Maintenance
RAS433B: RETIC Flowcell replacement Replacement
RAS434A: Open/Close tube correlation Piercer /Manual correlation adjustment
RAS435B: Control blood Open/Close tube correlation Control blood Piercer /Manual correlation adjust.
RAS436A: Calibration Calibration
RAS439A: Soft pneumatic Training procedure
Concentrated cleaning - Repeatability - Control -
Calibration
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 8-9
Maintenance
2.3.3. Procedure chart table (Training order)
P/n Type of procedure

RAS400B: Installation Installation
RAS404A: Compressor maintenance CBC
RAS426A: Vacuum/Pressure tank maintenance CBC
RAS409A: Pressure/Vacuum adjustment CBC
RAS401B: Every 4 month maintenance CBC
RAS402A: Yearly maintenance CBC
RAS411A: Commutation valve maintenance CBC
RAS410A: Sampling valve maintenance CBC
RAS432A: Membrane pump dismantling CBC
RAS413A: HGB Blank adjustment CBC
RAS414B: WBC/RBC/PLT Gain adjustment CBC
RAS412A: Sample detection cells adjustment CBC
RAS431A: Motor power board replacement Electronic
RAS403B: Power supply module check & adjustment Electronic
RAS406B: Stepper motors adjustment Mechanic
RAS405A: Grabber cleaning Mechanic
RAS407A: Piercer & Grabber mechanical adjustment Mechanic
RAS408B: Internal BC reader & Tube detector adjustment Mechanic
RAS427A: External barcode reader setup Mechanic
RAS417A: Bubbling check & adjustment 5DIFF
RAS416B: Temperature adjustment 5DIFF
RAS415B: LMNE adjustments 5DIFF
RAS418A: BASO result adjustment 5DIFF
RAS419A: WBC Balance adjustment 5DIFF
RAS428B: LASER Optical bench replacement 5DIFF
RAS429A: LMNE Flowcell replacement 5DIFF
RAS430A: LASER Optical bench board replacement 5DIFF
RAS420A: RETIC Flowcell adjustment RETIC
RAS421A: RETIC Resistive gain adjustment RETIC
RAS422B: RETIC Results & Correlation final adjustment RETIC
RAS423A: PMT Replacement & adjustment RETIC
RAS433B: RETIC Flowcell replacement RETIC
RAS424B: ERB adjustment ERB
RAS434A: Open/Close tube correlation Check up
RAS435B: Control blood Open/Close tube correlation Check up
RAS436A: Calibration Check up
RAS425A: Instrument decontamination Check up
RAS439A: Soft pneumatic Check up
RAS440A: Check up after intervention Check up
Technical Manual
8 - 10 RAA027BEN
Maintenance
2.3.4. CBC Maintenance

*: Each maintenance
**: Check when you have a problem
Procedures for CBC maintenance When P/n

Power supply module check &
** RAS403B: Power supply module check & adjustment
adjustment
Compressor maintenance ** RAS404A: Compressor maintenance
Every 4 month maintenance * RAS401B: Every 4 month maintenance
Yearly maintenance * RAS402A: Yearly maintenance
Commutation valve maintenance * RAS411A: Commutation valve maintenance
Sampling valve maintenance * RAS410A: Sampling valve maintenance
Pressure/Vacuum maintenance * RAS409A: Pressure/Vacuum adjustment
Sample detection cells adjustment * RAS412A: Sample detection cells adjustment
HGB blank adjustment * RAS413A: HGB Blank adjustment
WBC/RBC/PLT Gain adjustment ** RAS414B: WBC/RBC/PLT Gain adjustment
2.3.5. Steppers motors Maintenance

*: Each maintenance
Procedures for Steppers motors

When P/n
maintenance
Steppers motors adjustment ** RAS406B: Stepper motors adjustment
Piercer & Grabber mechanical adjustments ** RAS407A: Piercer & Grabber mechanical adjustment
Internal barcode reader & tube detector RAS408B: Internal BC reader & Tube detector
**
adjustment adjustment
Grabber cleaning ** RAS405A: Grabber cleaning
2.3.6. 5DIFF Maintenance

*: Each maintenance
Procedures for 5DIFF maintenance When P/n

Bubbling check & adjustment * RAS417A: Bubbling check & adjustment
Temperature adjustment * RAS415B: LMNE adjustments
LMNE Flowcell position adjustment * RAS415B: LMNE adjustments
LMNE Baso result adjustment * RAS418A: BASO result adjustment
WBC Balance adjustment * RAS419A: WBC Balance adjustment
2.3.7. Retic Maintenance

*: Each maintenance
Procedures for Retic maintenance When P/n

Retic flowcell adjustment ** RAS420A: RETIC Flowcell adjustment
Retic resistive adjustment ** RAS421A: RETIC Resistive gain adjustment
RAS422B: RETIC Results & Correlation final
Retic results & correlation final adjustment *
adjustment
PMT replacement & adjustment ** RAS423A: PMT Replacement & adjustment
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 8 - 11
Maintenance
2.3.8. Final check

*: Each maintenance
Procedures after maintenance When P/n

Open and close tube correlation * RAS434A: Open/Close tube correlation
Calibration * RAS436A: Calibration
2.3.9. Troubleshooting
Procedures for troubleshooting P/n

Vacuum/Pressure tank maintenance RAS426A: Vacuum/Pressure tank maintenance
Membrane pump dismantling RAS432A: Membrane pump dismantling
LMNE Optical flowcell adjustment RAS429A: LMNE Flowcell replacement
Laser bench replacement RAS428B: LASER Optical bench replacement
Optical bench board replacement &
adjustment
Motor power board replacement RAS431A: Motor power board replacement
External barcode reader setup & test RAS427A: External barcode reader setup
Instrument decontamination RAS425A: Instrument decontamination
2.3.10. Required tools & products
Tools P/n Product P/n

Allen keys size: 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5.5 Empty sample tubes
Pipette (Capacity 0.1ml) Siliscon grease
Clamps Versilube grease XEA218A
Scalpel Liquid soap
Stopwatch Loctite «Tubetanche»
Pair of scisors Silicon grease L250L LAM003A
Cutting pliers Latex WBC
Punch GAK165A Latex RBC
OAM (Optical Alignement
Voltmeter
material)
Screwdriver (Philipps) FAM LAD005AS
Barflex RETEX LAD004AS
Manometer (Range 0 to 5b) DIFTEX
Wrenches Soft tissue paper
Thermometer Soft optical tissue
Flat ruler Cleaner SRB4-A
Board extractor Cyclohexanone LAF007A
Extension board Minoclair
Syringe 5ml Cleaner «Essence C»
Barcode labels Micropipette
Technical Manual
8 - 12 RAA027BEN
Maintenance
2.4. Lubrification and greasing methodology
2.4.1. Greasing
Remove the old grease and clean the part. Place a small quantity of grease and spread
it between 2 fingers. Cover all surfaces of the part to grease with the fingers.
2.4.2. Lubrification with oil
Clean the part to lubricate to remove all traces of the old oil and dust. Place a little drop
of oil on the end of a flat screw driver and put it in contact with the part. Move the
mecanism several times in order to spread the oil on the whole part surfaces.
2.4.3. Cleaning with ethanol or essence C
Never use methanol for cleaning. This product is very toxic and dangerous.
Clean the part to remove old grease deposits or dust. Wet slightly a non fluffy piece of
cloth with the solvant or use a pencil when the access is difficult. Cover all surface
without excess, then dry the part to remove any trace of solvant.
Lubrification
Assemblies Parts to Grease / Recommendations Product Methodolgy
Do not lubricate the tefloned endless screw and the right
hand side rail
Carriage
Clean the endless screw with ethanol or essence C
Clean the right hand side rail with ethanol or essence C
Counting
chamber: Slightly grease the FAA023A stopper O’rings LAM004A
stoppers
Cover:
Grease the manual sampling door guides
Manual sampling LAM004A
Grease the “omega” door sides
door
Do not lubricate the endless screw
Motorisation: Clean the endless screw with ethanol or essence C
Ejection Clean the 2 guides with ethanol or essence C
Apply a thin film of oil on both guides XEA821A
Motorisation: Grease the internal and external sides of the right and left
LAM004A
Flap mechanism cams and their axis
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 8 - 13
Maintenance
Procedures
Lubrification
Assemblies Parts to Grease / Recommendations Product Methodolgy
Slightly grease the FAA060A and FAA057A O rings before
LAM004A
installation
Slightly grease the needle threads before screwing the needle
Piercer LAM006A
in its support
Grease the needle fixation grooves and the rinsing block
LAM006A
grooves before installation
Syringe:
Do not grease the 127 µl and 5.65ml syringe pistons
LMNE assembly,
Grease the 127µl syringe piston holders
Pistons LAM004A
Syringe: Clean the endless screw with ethanol or essence C

LMNE assembly,
Endless screw Apply a thin film of oil on the endless screw XEA821A
Syringe:
Do not grease the manual syringe needle
Manual syringe
Upper stopper:
Clean both axis with ethanol or essence C
(tube stopped in
sampling
Apply a thin film of oil on both axis XEA821A
position)
Vacuum
Grease the metal spring in case of vibrations LAM004A
regulator
Grease the large diameter of the axis, do not spread grease LAM006A
Valve: on the threads
Commutation Apply a very thin film of grease on the contact surfaces of the LAM006A
valve external ceramics
Grease the driving index which is in contact with the ceramic LAM004A
Apply a thin film of grease on the external sides of the metallic
LAM010A
Valve: holder of the mobile ceramic
Sampling valve Apply a very thin film of grease on the contact surfaces of the
LAM006A
external ceramics
3. Procedures
Technical Manual
8 - 14 RAA027BEN
RAS400B
Installation
■ Concerns
■ Instrument unpacking and assembling

■ Installation
and startup
■ pentra ML installation and startup
■ Printer connection
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Smallflat screw driver
■ Voltmeter
■ Required products
■ None
■ Intervention time
■4 hours
■ Frequency
■ On request
■ Specific kit or consumables

■ XEA323E Installation kit
Disposable gloves, eyes protection and lab coat

must be worn by the operator.
Local or national regulations must be applied in all
the operations.
Installation
1. Site preparation
1.1. Power Supply Requirements
See Technical Specifications for precise details of the power supply requirements:
■ Power supply: from 100Vac to 240Vac (+/-10%) 50Hz to 60Hz
■ Power consumption: Maximum 900VA
■ Laser: 800W in stand by mode 2000W max.
■ Printer: Depends on printer model (See printer’s manual)
Before switching on the instrument it should be checked that the operating voltage pre-set
on the Pentra DX 120 - Pentra DF 120 is the same as the main voltage.
■ For protection against shock hazards, the equipment should be connected to approved power
sources, such as 3-wire grounded receptacle for the 100 -125 V or 200 - 240 V line voltage ranges.
■ Where an ungrounded receptacle is encountered, have a qualified electrician replace it with a properly
grounded receptacle in accordance with the official Electrical Code.
■ Do not, under any circumstances, remove the grounding prong from the power plug.
■ Do not use extension cords.
1.2. Uninterruptable Power Supplies
■ An uninterruptable power supply is not a mandatory requirement for the Pentra DX 120 - Pentra DF
120. Nevertheless the heart of the system is a computer and it is known that such devices can
unusually be unfavourably affected by power failures or unexpected power line conditions that fall
outside the normal specifications. For this reason and also to avoid inconvenience to clients it may be
preferred to install an Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS).
■ If circumstances at a site are such that power supply failures are expected to constitute an
unacceptable nuisance then an uninterruptable power supply may be installed in agreement with the
customer.
■ Selection and installation of an UPS should be carried out in consideration of the local circumstances
and the power requirements of the Pentra DX 120 - Pentra DF 120.
■ No facilities exist for indication to the Pentra DX 120 - Pentra DF 120 to automatically initiate a switch
over to standby operation before the UPS battery support period has elapsed. It is therefore
recommended that the UPS be capable of drawing the operators attention when the normal power
supply is removed (or out of limits) to allow the system to be manually closed down before the battery
supported supply expires.
Technical Manual
RAS400B - 2 RAA027BEN
Installation
1.3. Waste Disposal Requirements
The Pentra DX 120 - Pentra DF 120 must be provided with a waste receptacle which should be regularly
disposed off by the operator, for details please refer to the user manual.
1.4. Space and accessibility
In addition to the space required for the analyzer, consider the following:
■ Comfortable working height.
■ Access to the rear of the instrument is required for servicing. Allow at least 50cm (18in.) for work space.
Instrument may be moved for additional work space.
1.5. In site transfer
■ In-house transit routes must be carefully considered. Vertical, horizontal and turning clearances should
be calculated from the shipping crate dimensions of the Analyser Instrument which is the largest unit
in the system.
■ Particular attention should be paid to the clearances of any doors in the transit route to the final
location where the instrument is to be installed.
■ It is recommended that the instrument be transported as close as possible to its intended final
position, using the original pallet and a pallet trolley.
■ Nevertheless keep in mind that an unobstructed distance of at least 120cm is necessary around the
instrument to allow removal of the pallet.
■ Install the instrument lifting handles in their location, make sure they are correctly secured lift the
instrument using the four handles up on to the installation bench.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN RAS400B - 3
Installation
Note that the instrument weight 80kgs (160 Lbs) approximately (Pentra DX 120: 110Kgs).
Make sure that the bench is suitable for such a weight.
1.6. Installation kit XEA323E
P/n Qty Designation P/n Qty Designation

CAE006A 1 Microswitch XC5 GAL074A 1 Sampling needle seal
CAE011A 1 Microswitch XCH5 GBD015A 1 Rotation tray spring
DAJ006A 1 Lamp 50W 12V PHILIPS GBD200AS 1 Sampling needle
DAR046A 1 Fuse 5x20 0,2A TT JAA022A 1 Card board box 43X30X12
DAR010A 3 Fuse 5x20 1,25A JAG004A 1 RAACO plastic box
DAR013A 1 Fuse 5x20 2,5A T KAA001A 3 Screw CHC M3 x 5
DAR014A 2 Fuse 5x20 3,15A KAA004A 3 Screw CHC M3 x 10
DAR015A 1 Fuse 5x20 6,3A KAA005A 1 Screw CHC M3 x 12
DAR037A 2 Fuse 6,3x32 TT 10A 125V KAA013A 5 Screw CHC M4 x 6
DBH001A 10 Tyrap LA=2,4 L=92 KAA015A 1 Screw CHC M4 x 8
DBH002A 10 Tyrap LA=3,6 L=140 KAA017A 3 Screw CHC M4 x 16
EAB006B 4 T connector DI=2,3mm KAA027A 1 Screw CHC M4 x 10
EAB012A 1 T connector DI=3,1 KAA043A 3 Screw CHC M2,5 x 8
EAB013A 2 Straigth connector DI=2,3/3,1 KAA049A 3 Screw CHC M2 x 10
EAB014A 1 Straigth connector DI=1,5/1,5 KAA059A 4 Screw CHC M4 x 6 TÍte
EAB015A 2 Straigth connector DI=1,5/2,5 KAB008A 3 Screw FHC M4 x 8
EAB024A 2 T connector DI=3/2,5 KAE001A 2 Screw BHC M3 x 8
EAB032A 4 T connector DI=1,6mm T210 KAH001A 2 Nut HU M3
EAC004A 2 Fem. connector LUER I=2,5 KAH002A 1 Nut HU M4
EAC010A 2 Fem. connector LUER I=3 KAH003A 2 Nut HU M5
EAC018A 2 Male connector I=2,5 KAJ001A 2 Washer M d=3
EAC019A 2 Male connector I=3 KAJ002A 2 Washer M d=4
EAD001A 1 Green restrictor 0.005 KAJ005A 2 Washer L d=4
EAD002A 1 Red restrictor 0.006 KAJ007A 3 Washer AZ d=3
Technical Manual
Installation
P/n Qty Designation P/n Qty Designation

EAD003A 1 Turquoise restrictor 0.00 KAJ008A 2 Washer AZ d=4
EAD004A 1 Yellow restrictor 0.010 KAJ009A 2 Washer AZ d=5
EAD005A 1 Black restrictor 0.012 MAB001A 1 Allen key 2mm
EAD007A 2 Blue restrictor 0.020 MAB002A 1 Allen key 2,5mm
EAE003A 2 Tygon tube 0,762mm (0,030) MAB003A 1 Allen key 1,5mm
EAE005A 2 Tygon tube 1,02mm (0,040) MAB018A 1 Allen key 3mm
EAE006A 2 Tygon tube 1,295mm (0,051) MAB069A 1 Male straight key 2,5
EAE007A 2 Tygon tube 1,52mm (0,060) XBA246A 1 BASO detection straw
EAE008A 2 Tygon tube 2,06mm (0,081) XBA321C 1 20 L Diluent straw
EAE011A 6 Cristal tube 3x6 XBA322D 1 Waste detection straw
EAE033A 2 Tygon tube 1,143mm (0,045) XBA509B 1 Barcode reader
EAE034A 2 Tygon tube 2,54mm (0,100) XDB041A 1 Liquid valve 2V NF 24V 4W
EAE037A 2 Polyurethane tube 4x6 XDB042A 1 Liquid valve 3V 24V 4W
EAJ001A 4 Collar 5,77 ‡ 6,55 XEA019A 1 Grease KM 1011
EAR007A 2 One way valve GBD689A 5 Filter
EBB051A 1 Muffler filter 1/4 MAJ003A 1 Thickness gauge 0,3
EBB056A 1 Air filter 0,22 µm DAR038A 2 Fuse 6,3x32 TT 4A 250V
FAA025A 1 O Ring 2,4x1,9 NIT. 70SH DAR039A 2 Fuse 6,3x32 TT 8A 250V
FAA049A 4 O Ring 2,2x1 SILIC. 70SH CAJ023A 1 Con. HE5 adap. F25-M9
FBL001A 3 Rubber stopper 2 holes EAE030AS 1 TUBE SILICONE 6x9 Lg=2M
GAB067A 1 Reagent straw Length=360mm XBA785A 1 10 L Diluent straw
Technical Manual
Installation
2. Installation
■ Check the Installation file supplied with the Instrument.
2.1. Ejection tray
■ Unscrew the 3 instrument cover screws and open the instrument cover:
■ Release the reagent tubes from the compressor locking pin and remove the tyraps from the pin.
■ Remove the transport locking pin from the compressor and install into the holes the rubber stoppers
contained in the plastic bag attached to the pin:
Carry out the reverse procedure if the instrument has to be moved to another location.
■ Connect the reagent detection plug between the instrument and the reagent/ejection tray. Unscrew
and remove the fixation screws of the reagent/ejection tray located on the front, right handside of the
instrument frame:
Technical Manual
Installation
■ Push the piercer inside the instrument to get access to the inside of the instrument, connect the Tygon
tubes to their respective connectors.
■ The ejection tray should be assembled to the instrument as shown below:
■ Check that the piercer does not touch the reagent tubes when moving frontward and backward inside
the instrument.
■ Assemble the ejection tray on the instrument by means of the two screws as shown:
Technical Manual
Installation
2.2. Barcode connection
■ Connect the external barcode reader to the specific plug at the rear of the instrument.
2.3. Adjustment of the feet height
■ In case the height adjustment of the ejection tray does not fit exactly with the instrument, adjust the
height by means of the instrument or ejection tray as shown:
■ Control that the angle between the rack loader and the tray is 90°: install a rack as shown to check the
angle.
■ When the angle is not correct, re-adjust by unscrewing/screwing the feet. A finest adjustment can be
done using the 2 screws of the right hand side of the ejection tray cover:
Technical Manual
Installation
2.4. Installation of the feet cover
■ Clip the feet cover on the instrument feet:
Technical Manual
Installation
3. Reagent and Waste connections
3.1. ABX Diluent
■ The ABX Diluent container must be placed below the instrument level (Under the bench). Clean the top
of the diluent container before opening it. Remove the container stopper and install the reagent straw
equipped with the level detection and the rubber stopper.
■ Connect the other end of the Tygon tube on the connector located on the instrument rear panel, use
the label fixed above the reagent connections to identify the ABX Diluent connector.
■ Connect the level detection plug to the corresponding connector of the rear panel.
3.2. ABX Basolyse
■ Cleanthe top of the ABX Basolyse container and open it. Remove the container stopper an install the
reagent detection straw with its rubber stopper. Place the air filter on the free hole of the rubber stopper
as shown. The ABX Basolyse container has to be placed at the same level than the instrument.
■ Connect the other end of the Tygon tube to the ABX Basolyse connection of the instrument rear panel
and the ABX Basolyse level detection plug to the corresponding connector.
Technical Manual
Installation
3.3. Plugged-in reagents (Depends on the instrument)
■ ABX Alphalyse/ABX Lysebio, ABX Cleaner, ABX Fluocyte, ABX Leucodiff: Identify the bottles, make
sure they are equipped with the rubber stopper. Return the bottle and firmly insert it inside its
corresponding position in the ejection tray:
■ Check the reagent connections between instrument and reception tray that there is no reagent leak.
3.4. Waste to instrument
■ The waste container must be placed below the instrument level (under the bench). Remove the waste
container stopper and install the waste container straw (the shorter one) equipped with the waste level
detection and the rubber stopper.
■ Instrument must be connected to the waste container using the waste straw delivered with the
instrument. This waste straw allows a best operation of the instrument as well as the waste level
detection alarm.
■ In the case where the waste straw cannot be used, it is mandatory to use a length of a 4x6 tube equal
to the total length of the straw (tube + straw): 2m + 0.145m = 2.145m.
■ Connect the other end of the Tygon tube to the corresponding connector located on the instrument
rear panel, use the label fixed above the reagent connections to identify the waste connector. Connect
the level detection plug to the corresponding connector of the rear panel.
■ In order to prevent reagent leaks from the Pentra DX 120 - Pentra DF 120 tray overflow, it is necessary
to connect a silicon tube EAE030AS, length 2meters from the blue connector located at the backside
of the tray to the waste container stopper. This tube is added to the Pentra DX 120 - Pentra DF 120
installation kit.
Technical Manual
Installation
4. Laser power supply installation

Laser supplies are available under the following part numbers:
■ XBA367AS Laser supply 220V
■ Connection to instrument: The cable to connect the Laser power supply must be located as shown on
next picture.
■ Remove the Power switch key.

■ Dismantle the supply cable protection from the power supply assembly, plug the cables and Then re-
install the cable cover protection as follows:
Technical Manual
Installation
5. Startup
5.1. Laser power supply startup
■ After having checked that the voltage shown on the rear of the laser power supply corresponds to the
laboratory main voltage, press the ON/OFF switch and check that the voltage lamp is ON.
■ Turn the key of the laser power supply located above the ON/OFF switch to the position 1.
5.2. Instrument startup
■ After having checked that the voltage shown on the rear of the instrument corresponds to the
laboratory main voltage, press the ON/OFF switch located on the rear left of the instrument.
■ If
necessary, modify the voltage as shown:
- Open the fuse holder using a flat screw
driver.
- Remove the fuse holder to access to the
voltage selector.
240 120
■ Turn the voltage selector to have the correct
voltage in the fuse holder window.
■ Regards to the selected voltage, install the 4A Fuse 8A Fuse
corresponding fuses (the fuses are included (DAR038A) (DAR039A)
in the installation kit).
■ Install the fuse holder back.
220 100
■ Press the menus key and move the cursor to the «Machine» function. Press Enter and move the cursor
to the «Alarms» function. Unvalidate all the chamber drain alarms. Press the esc key to return to the
main menu.
■ Run a manual blank cycle in order to check the possible leaks of pressure and vacuum.
■ Press the other cycles key and run an «Autocontrol» cycle in order to check the mechanical
operations.
■ Run reagent priming cycles, diluent first to prime the hydraulic lines. Check the correct drainage of the
chambers.
■ Run several manual blank cycles and check that the reagent lines are correctly primed, without air
bubbles.
■ Perform a Startup cycle.
Technical Manual
Installation
6. Pentra ML installation
6.1. Pentra ML connection
■ The Workstation package includes:
P/n Designation
CCC019A Fujistu E600 computer (Central Unit)
CCC018A Flat screen
NAJ036A Pentra ML licence for 1 connexion
NAJ045D Pentra ML software version (V3.0.1)
RAX049C Pentra ML User Manual (CDROM)
DAC033A USB cable A/B Length=1,8m
DAC038A RJ45 crossed cable (x2)
CAJ032A RJ49/DB9 Connector (x2)
CAJ033A RJ49/DB25 Connector
HAN510A Mouse pad
JAM001A 3 plugs adaptor
DAC011A Supply cable
DAC012A USA Supply cable (According to model)
NAJ061A EQC licence (Option)
■ Connect the Pentra ML as follows:
COMPAQ
1 2
■1 - Keyboard
■2 - Mouse
■3 - RJ45/DB9 Connector (CAJ032A) 3&4
■4 - RJ45 crossed cable (DAC038A) 5
■ 5 - Dongle key (Supplied with the installation 6

floppy disk)
■6 - Monitor 7
■7 - USB Cable to printer
■8 - LIS Connection
Technical Manual
Installation
COMPAQ
■1 - Keyboard
■2 - Mouse
■3 - RJ45/DB9 Connector (CAJ032A)
■4 - RJ45 crossed cable (DAC038A) 8
■ 5 - Dongle key (Supplied with the installation
floppy disk)
7
■6 - Monitor
■7 - USB Cable to printer
■8 - LIS Connection 6
5
3&4
2
1
Instrument (Pentra DX 120 - Pentra DF

120) 2
■1 - RJ45 crossed cable (DAC038A)
■2 - RJ45/DB25 Connector (CAJ033A) 1
6.2. Pentra ML startup
■ The dongle key (see Previous pictures) has been factory installed on the Pentra ML and it is not
necessary to reinstall it.
■ The following procedure has to performed, only if the OS has been reinstalled on this station (see
Technical note RAN003).
Preliminary: the OS and STVDX software should have been previously installed.
■ Switch the PC on and login under «administrator», password «admin1224».
■ Install the dongle on the parallel port of the PC and click «Start» in the Taskbar, then «Run».
■ Then in the displayed window, type in «pmf».
■ A «Dos» window is displayed and a message to insert the floppy disk (supplied with the dongle)
appears.
■ Insert the floppy into the drive and press «Enter»
■ Wait for the end of the installation and remove the floppy disk.
Technical Manual
Installation
6.3. Settings
6.3.1. RS232 settings

■ From menu «Machine\Connection\RS232-C configuration» setup the instrument as follows:
■ Transmission speed (Baud rate): 38400 ■ SOH-EOT: Not selected

■ Parity: None ■ Timeout (ENQ/ACK/NACK): 15 seconds
■ Length: 8 ■ Waiting time (2°SOH): 17 seconds
■ Stop bit: 1 ■ Automatical disconnection: Selected
■ Protocol: None ■ Term to disconnecion: 23 seconds
■ Parity: None ■ Reject same files: Not selected
■ Mode: Bidirectionnal ■ Analyzer
no.: 1 (or other if already use, but
■ Format: ABX same as ABX Pentra ML setup)
■ CRC Check: Not selected ■ Work separator: ;
6.3.2. Pentra ML settings
■ At the computer startup, logon as:

- Login «abx»
- password «421»
■ From menu
«Settings\System\Communication\Instru
ment Settings» setup Station according to
the connected instrument (Example is for
Pentra DX 120):
- Name: pentraDX
- Format: pentraDX
- Port: 1
- Baud rate: 38400
- Data bits: 8
- Stop bit: 1
- XON-XOFF: not selected
Technical Manual
Installation
6.3.3. Pentra DF 120 startup setting

■ From menu «Settings\Machine\Startup» setup the instrument with the «Startup DIF» option.
6.4. Printer installation
6.4.1. Printer connection

■ The printer has to be connected both on Pentra ML (via USB port of the printer to the Pentra ML) and
on Pentra DX 120 - Pentra DF 120 instrument (via parallel port of the printer to the instrument):
RS232
Instrument Pentra ML
Parallel USB
Printer
6.4.2. EPSON M2000 Management on Instrument

EPSON M2000 printers can be connected to the instrument (Pentra DX 120 - Pentra DF 120) directly
instead of an EPL6200, EPL5500, EPL5700, EPL5800, EPL5900 or EPL6100.
No installation procedure is required for the installation and printer setup does not need to be modified.
6.4.3. Installation on Pentra ML
Installation Management
According to the following cases follow the concerned steps for installation of the EPSON M2000
printer:
1- Replacement of an EPL6200 by an Epson M2000 printer:
Connection of the printer (“6.4.1.Printer connection, page 17”)
Requires the installation of Epson M2000 drivers (“Drivers installation, page 18”)
Requires the new printer to be set as default printer (“Set default printer, page 18”)
Requires the printer to be tested (“Printer test, page 19”)
2- Replacement of an Epson M2000 by another Epson M2000 printer:

3- Full re-installation of Workstation system and softwares (Ghost):

Requires the installation of Epson M2000 drivers (“Drivers installation, page 18”)
4- First installation of a Pentra DX 120:

Technical Manual
Installation
Drivers installation
1- At the computer startup, logon as: Login

“abx”.
2- Click over title bar with right mouse button
and open Explorer menu.
3- Switch printer on and connect USB port to
workstation.
4- Insert printer’s driver installation CD-ROM
(Delivered with the printer) into the CDROM
drive. The installation screen is displayed
after few seconds.
5- Choose «User installation».
6- In the next screen choose «Easy install».

7- In the next screen choose «Local»
8- In the next screen, uncheck all the options
and click «Install»
9- When the driver installation is completed,

click the «Exit» button.
10- Remove Printer’s driver installation
CDROM.
Set default printer

To set a printer as default printer to the system, enter Windows Explorer menu “settings/printers and
faxes”.
Click with the right mouse button the icon of the printer you want to set as default printer for the system.
Technical Manual
Installation
■ Select in the menu “Set as default printer”

option
■ When printer is selected, a black selected
circle appears on printer’s icon.
■ Shutdown and Restart the computer.
Printer test
At the computer startup, logon as: Login “abx”.
When in pentra DX software, open menu “settings/print/print settings”.
Check printout is correct.
Technical Manual
Installation
7. Adjustment and parametering

■ Perform the following procedures:
1- RAS409A: Pressure/Vacuum adjustment
2- RAS412A: Sample detection cells adjustment
3- RAS413A: HGB Blank adjustment
4- RAS414B: WBC/RBC/PLT Gain adjustment
5- RAS415B: LMNE adjustments
6- RAS416B: Temperature adjustment
7- RAS419A: WBC Balance adjustment
8- RAS420A: RETIC Flowcell adjustment
9- RAS421A: RETIC Resistive gain adjustment
10- RAS424B: ERB adjustment
11- RAS434A: Open/Close tube correlation
12- RAS435B: Control blood Open/Close tube correlation
13- RAS436A: Calibration
Technical Manual
RAS401B
Every 4 month maintenance
■ Concerns
■ Instrument maintenance
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ 8 mm fork wrench
■ None
■2 hours
■ Frequency
■ 3/year

■ XEA384AS Every 4 month maintenance kit

the operations.
When working on the chambers, avoid using any sharp instruments which cause damage to
the chamber. Any defects on the internal surface of the chamber will affect its cleaning and
the homogeneity of the dilutions.
XEA384AS Every 4 month maintenance kit
P/n Designation Localization Qty.

FAA025A O’ring 2.4x1.9 (Nitrile) Sampling needle 1
FAA026A O’ring 2.6x1.9 (Nitrile) 5DIFF syringe 127µl 2
FAA040A O’ring 12.1x2.7 (Silicon) 5DIFF syringe 1
FAA046A O’ring 2.75x1.6 (Viton) Electrode 5
FAA049A O’ring 2.2x1 (Silicon) Aperture 3
FAA057A O’ring 5x1 (Nitrile) Piercer 1
FAA058A Furon joint Piercer 1
FAA060A O’ring 12.1x1.6 (Nitrile) Piercer 1
GAH024A 127µl syringe Needle joint (Teflon) 5DIFF syringe 127µl 2
GAL074A Sampling needle joint Sampling needle 1
HAU075A Rinsing chamber sticker Piercer 1
GBD689A Piercing filter Piercer 1
Run a «Other cycles\Drain chamber» cycle before starting the maintenance.

Turn off the Pentra DX 120 - Pentra DF 120.
Technical Manual
1. 5DIFF syringe maintenance

2x FAA026A, 2x GAH024A, 1x FAA040A
The 127µl syringe piston must be re-fitted in the same position.

Record the piston direction before dismantling.
Do not remove the intermediate O’ring on new syringe type.
■ Untightthe headless screw (1) to free

syringe piston.
■ Unscrew the 2 syringe fixation screws (2).
■ Disconnectthe 2 tubings over a piece of
absorbant paper.
■ Open the syringe over a piece of absorbant

paper
■ Replace the O’ring (1 - FAA026A).

■ Replace the O’ring seal (2 - GAH024A).
5
■ Screw the 2 syringe screws (4) until they
touch the white part (3) then add between a
quarter and a half turn (The piston must 0.5mm.
move smoothly inside the O’ring), leave a
play around 1mm between both part.
■ Re-assemble in reverse order (Use new 2 1
tightening sleeves included into the
Maintenance kit) and perform the same way
for the other syringe. 3
Technical Manual
■ Unscrew the 2 fixation screws and

disconnect the tubing.
■ Remove the syringe and drain it into a
waste container.
■ Open the syringe over absorbant paper.

■ Screw the 2 syringe screws (2) until they
touch the white part then add between a
quarter and a half turn (The piston 3 must
move smoothly). 1
■ Re-assemble in reverse order.
■ Connect the tubing (Use new tightening
sleeves), install the syringe, and tight the 2
fixation screws. 2
■ Check that the 3 syringes are parallel.
Technical Manual
2. WBC/HGB chamber maintenance

1x FAA046A, 1x FAA049A
2.1. Chamber dismantling and cleaning
■ Remove the WBC chamber cover.
■ Disconnect the HGB photocell coaxial

cable from the plug located on the
pneumatic door (1) and disconnect the HGB 4
LED supply (2).
■ Disconnectthe grounding wire (3) and
unscrew the counting head grounding (4). 2
■ Record the position of the hydraulic tubes 1
and disconnect them (Remove the cap).
Make sure that no liquid will flow down
inside the spectrophotometer.
■ Remove the WBC/HGB chamber assy from
its clip, beware of the WBC coaxial cable 3
which is still connected to the instrument.
■ Unscrew the 2 screws of the electrode on

the back of the WBC chamber and seperate
the electrode from the chamber.
■ Remove the counting head fixation screws.
Remove gently the counting head, beware
of the O’ring and the aperture which may be
stuck on the counting head.
■ Unscrew on both side of the

spectrophotometer the fixation screws and
carefully remove it from the chamber.
■ Using a soft brush or air pressure, clean the
window of the photocell and the HGB LED.
Make sure there is no trace of liquid on the
optical window.
Technical Manual
Beware to spectrophotometer O’rings (on both side) when re-installing spectrophotometer.
■ Clean the chamber with ABX Cleaner (or ABX Minoclair), do not introduce any sharp instruments inside
so as to avoid damaging the inside of the chamber and the apertures.
■ Rinse thoroughly with distilled water.
■ Dry the exterior of the chamber with a soft paper.
■ Clean the counting head with liquid soap, do not introduce any sharp instruments inside.
■ Using a little syringe flush the counting head inlets with distilled water.
■ Dry the exterior of the counting head with a soft paper.
2.2. Aperture O’ring replacement
■ When the counting head is removed replace the O’ring (FAA049A).

■ Re-assemble the chamber in reverse order (Counting head screws tightening torque: 100mN.m).
2.3. Electrode O’ring replacement
■ To replace the electrode O’rings, use a

previously cut micropipette tip as shown.
■ Replace the O’ring (FAA046A) and re-

assemble the chamber on the instrument.
Technical Manual
3. RBC chamber maintenance

■ Record the tube positions before

dismantling the chamber.
■ Disconnect the chamber tubes.
■ Remove the electrode holding clip and
carefully remove the electrodes.
■ Clean the chamber with Cleaner (or
Minoclair), do not introduce any sharp
instruments inside so as to avoid damaging
the inside of the chamber and the apertures.
■ Drythe exterior of the chamber with a soft
paper.
■ Unscrew the counting head and replace the

O’ring (FAA049A).
Technical Manual
■ Use a previously cut micropipette tip to

change the electrode O’rings (FAA046A) as
shown.
■ Replace the O’rings (FAA046A) and re-

Beware to coaxial orientation when reassembling the chamber.
1mm
■ Check the correct location for the RBC 15mm
injection tube.
■ Make sure that the flow does not come into
contact with the electrode or the aperture.
3mm
Check on several analysis that at the end of the injection of the blood into the RBC chamber:
NO BLOOD DROP IS STUCK BETWEEN THE RBC CHAMBER AND THE INJECTION TUBE.
Technical Manual
4. BASO chamber maintenance

■ Perform
BASO chamber maintenance the
same way as for RBC chamber.
5. Piercer maintenance
5.1. Maintenance
1x FAA057A, 1x FAA058A, 1x FAA060A, 1x GBD689A
■ Remove the sampling start bar.
Technical Manual
■ Installthe piercer security device (A) on the

piercing needle block.
■ Lift
the locker and remove the piercing
needle block.
■ Disconnect the needle channel tubings and
the rinsing block tubing as well. A
Be carefull when manipulating the piercer, not to prick your fingers. Always manipulate the
piercer hands besides, and never in the needle axis, as shown below:
3 1
■ Unscrew the needle nut (1) then the axis
support screws (2).
■ Remove the needle support (3) and the
spring.
2
■ Unscrew the rinsing block screws and

remove the needle.
■ Ifthe needle is partially blocked connect a syringe to it by means of transmission tubing

and flush it several times with distilled water.
■ Check the good general state of needle.
■ Replace needle O’ring (FAA057A).
Technical Manual
1 2

■ Remove the «Furon seal» (2).
Be carefull the «Furon seal» is a very fragile part and must be installed perfectly parallel into
its support.
■ Turn the «Furon seal» (FAA058A) over the

threads then push it gently with the
tightening plate into its support.
■ Make sure the «Furon seal» is properly

installed.
■ Replace the rubber foam (GBD689A).
■ Re-assemble the rinsing block on the

needle, screw the nut along the needle on
its upper position, install the spring. Screw
the needle support.
■ Present the piercing needle assy in front of
its location.
Before handle the piercing assy, install the protection.
Technical Manual
When the needle heigth adjustment has to be performed, it is mandatory to have the
compressor running during the procedure as the heigth maximum value is given when the air
cylinder is pushed at the bottom by the air pressure.
5.2. Needle height adjustment
■ Screw or unscrew the needle on its support

to adjust the heigth of the rinsing block: This
one, on its upper position, must exactly fit in
the location.
■ Turnthe needle anti clockwise to the
maximum possible (A).
■ Tight the nut (B) to fix the needle. A
■ Install the piercer and connect the tubings.
■ When installing the piercer fitted with

rubber foam, use a flat ruler as shown on
this diagram
Technical Manual
6. Manual sampling needle maintenance

1x FAA025A, 1x GAL074A
1
2
■ Disconnect the needle tubing (1) and

untight the needle screw (2).
■ Remove the needle by pulling it downward.

■ Open the rinsing block loosening the 2
screws (1). 1
■ Remove the teflon washer (2 - GAL074A)
inside the rinsing block, and replace it, and
also the O’ring (3 - FAA025A). 2
■ Re-assemble the rinsing block without
tightening the 2 screws (they must be
tightened only when the needle is inside the
3
O’ring).
■ Install
a new needle at around 5mm. from
the top of the tightening part.
■ Screw the 2 rinsing block screws until they

quarter and a half turn (Needle inside the
rinsing block). 0.5mm.
■ Make sure the needle guide (white part of
the rinsing block) is parallel to the rinsing
block body.
■ Adjustneedle position, start the instrument

and run menu «Machine/Alarms/
Adjustments/Vacuum-pressure
function». Press valve <53> to make rinsing
block go down.
■ The needle bottom aperture must

correspond to the rinsing channel.
■ If
the needle position is not correct,
unloosen the probe holding screw and
readjust it.
Technical Manual
7. Vacuum regulators maintenance
■ On the right hand side of the instrument,

unscrew both vacuum regulator needle
■ Clean the needles with a piece paper and

grease the O’ring.
It is mandatory to perform a -225mB & -330mB vacuum adjustments after regulators

cleaning. See procedure RAS409A Pressure/Vacuum adjustment.
Technical Manual
8. Cleaning and check
8.1. Barcode and mirror maintenance
■ Check that barcodes, on both side of the

rotative carriage, are in good state.
■ Clean the tube detector mirrors or labels
(both side).
■ Clean the stickers of the rotative carriage.
Barcodes are different from one side to the other:

Side A (With the white square) <=> Barcode=0
Side B <=> Barcode=1
8.2. Perform the following cleaning maintenances
■ RAS405A: Grabber cleaning

■ RAS410A: Sampling valve maintenance
■ RAS411A: Commutation valve maintenance
8.3. Check and perform following points
■ Switch the instrument on.

■ Adjust -225mB and -330mB, follow procedure RAS409A: Pressure/Vacuum adjustment.
■ Run «Miscelaneous cycles\Cleaning cycle» and check for no leak.
■ Run an analysis on blood and verify the needle rinse (No blood must leak on the rinsing channel nor
under the rinsing block assembly).
■ Run an Autoconcentrated cleaning of the BASO, WBC, RBC chamber.
■ Perform a repeatability test on 10 analysis in manual and automatic modes.
■ Perform a Control then a Calibration if required.
Technical Manual
Technical Manual
RAS402A
Yearly maintenance
■ Concerns
■ Instrumentmaintenance
NOTE: Yearly and Every 4 month maintenances
must be done at the same time.
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Voltmeter
■ None
■2 hours
■ Frequency
■ Once a year

■ XEA380AS Yearly maintenance kit

the operations.
Yearly maintenance
When working on the chambers, avoid using any sharp instruments which cause damage to
the chamber. Any defects on the internal surface of the chamber will affect its cleaning and
the homogeneity of the dilutions.
XEA380AS Yearly maintenance kit
P/n Designation Localization Qty.

DAJ006A Lamp 50W 12V Optical bench 1
EBB051A Filter 1/4 Compressor 2
EBB053A Filter 1/8 4
EBB056A Filter 0.22µm 1
FAA023A O’ring 16x1.25 (Nitrile) WBC/HGB, RBC and BASO chambers 3
FAL008A Shock absorber Compressor 4
GAL098AS Sleeving 10
JAJ007A Polyethylen tape Rack ejector 1m
XCA165A Filter regulated vacuum 3
XEA286AS Joint and washer Waste chambers 3
XEA425AS Compressor maintenance kit 1
Run a «Other cycles\Drain chamber» cycle before starting the maintenance.

Turn off the Pentra DX 120 - Pentra DF 120.
Technical Manual
RAS402A - 2 RAA027BEN
Yearly maintenance
1. Optical bench lamp

1x DAJ006A
1.1. Lamp replacement
■ Switch off the instrument and wait for the lamp to cool down for at least 10 minutes.
As for halogen/quartz lamp, do not touch the bulb with your fingers. This will reduce
significantly the shelf life of the lamp. In case of finger contact, clean the bulb with a solution
of 90% alcohol and a soft paper.
■ Open the cover, release the lamp tightening

screw and remove the lamp cover.
■ Remove the lamp with a piece of paper.
■ Clean the lamp support with a dry tissue or
compressed air. Also clean the end of the
lighting bench.
■ Take the new lamp with its protective
blisterpack. Free only its contacts in order
not to touch the bulb. Plug in the contacts in
the lamp support and make sure they are
properly fitted.
■ Put back the protective cover and tighten
the screw.
1.2. Lamp voltage adjustment
■ Make sure the flowcell is full of liquid, if not run a «Rinse Diluent» cycle.
■ Make sure that there is no bubble inside the flowcell.
■ Make sure of the cleanliness of the flowcell optical window and objectives.
■ Make sure when adjusting the preampli optical board voltage that the lamp has warmed up
for at least 15 minutes.
Before lamp voltage adjustment check the voltage (between TP1 and TP2 on preampli optical
board) in order to determine which Optical bench is fitted on the instrument:
■ When voltage value is around 8.8V use the «Previous optical bench» adjustment value.
■ When voltage value is around 4V use the «New optical bench» adjustment value.
Different type of filters

The optical bench part number XDA377CS received optical modifications. These modifications
concerns the replacement of the optical filter of the emission gun and the removal of the filter located
under the optical preamplifier board.
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN RAS402A - 3
Yearly maintenance
Depending on the optical bench installed on the instrument, the lamp voltage adjustments are differents.
The Pentra DX 120 having the following serial numbers are equipped with the optical bench XDA377CS:
■ Pentra DX 120: #307ERBP05, #311PDX0006, #312PDX0011, #312PDX0012, #312PDX0013,
#312PDX0013, #312PDX0014, #312PDX0015 and all instrument from serial number 312PDX0016.
1.2.1. Previous optical bench
■ Unscrew the 2 screws (1). 1 2

■ Disconnect the coaxial (2) and the supply
cable (3).
■ Remove the optical preampli board cover.
1
■ Reconnect supply cable and coaxial (2&3).
3
■ Connect the voltmeter between TP1

(ground) and TP2.
■ Turn R11 potentiometer fully clockwise in
order to obtain the maximum négative
voltage.
■ If maximum voltage obtained is higher than

-12V (example -11V): Try to readjust lamp
cover
■ If maximum voltage is still higher than -12V: Try another lamp.

■ If maximum voltage is still higher than -12V: See technical note RAH455 to adjust power supply.
■ When the best position is found (maximum negativ voltage on the voltmeter), tighten the lamp in this
postion.
■ Adjust R11 to get target value: -8.8V +/-0.3V
■ Once the adjustment is done, re-assemble in reverse order.
1.2.2. New optical bench

■ On power supply, connect a voltmeter on the lamp adjustment test points (TP8, ground on TP1).
■ Adjust the voltage to +9.4V +/-0.2V with R34.
■ On the preamplifier optical board, connect the voltmeter , test points TP1 and TP2.
■ Increase voltage to the maximum with R11, check that the maximum voltage is around +5V.
■ Adjust voltage with R11 to +4.0V +/-0.1V.
Technical Manual
Yearly maintenance
2. Rack ejector
JAJ007A
■ Replace the 2 adhesive tapes on the top of
the rack ejector
3. Compressor filters replacement

2x EBB051A
■ Remove the rack ejector to access to the

filters.
■ Remove the filters manually and replace
them.
4. Vacuum regulated filters replacement

4x EBB053A
■ Remove the rear upper left panel.

■ Unscrew by the means of the hands the 4
filters and replace them
Technical Manual
Yearly maintenance
5. Filter 0.22µm replacement

1x EBB056A
■ Replace the filter on the ABX Basolyse

container’s straw
6. WBC/RBC and BASO chambers O’ring

replacement
3x FAA023A
■ Remove the WBC/HGB chamber black

cover.
■ Remove chamber’s cap from each chamber

and replace O’rings.
Technical Manual
Yearly maintenance
7. Regulated vacuum filters replacement

3x XCA165A
■ Replace the filters shown on the diagram.
8. Waste chamber joint and washer replacement

3x XEA286AS
■ Remove the waste chambers from their

support.
■ Remove the waste chambers cap (4
screws).
■ Replace the joints and the washers.
■ Replace all the tubings under the each
cover.
Be carefull not to disconnect tubings from the caps.
9. Compressor maintenance
1x XEA425AS
■ Follow procedure RAS404A: Compressor maintenance to perform replacement of valves and joints of
the compressor.
Technical Manual
Yearly maintenance
10. After maintenance

■ Perform procedure RAS415B: LMNE adjustments.
■ Clean the mirrors of the Retic bench (If RETIC instrument).
■ Perform procedure RAS401B: Every 4 month maintenance.
It is mandatory to perform procedure RAS401B: Every 4 month maintenance after Yearly

maintenance.
Technical Manual
RAS403B
Power supply module check & adjustment
■ Concerns
■ This procedure allows the technician to check and

adjust the different voltage supplies required for the
instrument operation.
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Voltmeter
■ None
■ 30 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
1. Introduction
■ This procedure allows the technician to check and adjust the different voltage supplies required for the
instrument operation.These supplies are delivered by the power supply module which can be operated
separatly from the instrument.
■ The power supply module includes as well the vacuum/pressure board which transforms the pressure
and vacuum signals into electrical signals. This board has its own adjustment procedure: RAS409A:
Pressure/Vacuum adjustment.
■ Open instrument cover.
■ Switch the instrument ON and check the following:
The green LED voltages are ON.
The power supply module fan is operating.
The 2 cardcage fans are operating.
The optic bench light is ON.
The display shows the program start.
Technical Manual
2. Switching power supplies

■ Connect the voltmeter between the ground (TP1) and the following test points in order to check the
different voltages. Readjust if necessary with the corresponding potentiometers:
Test
Voltage Target Potentiometer Fuse Function
Point
TP7 +5.15V +/-00.5V R18 F1 Digital disks
RS232 - Fans - Disk - BC LEDs - Tube
TP11 +12V +/-0.03V R120 F3
detector
TP8 +9.4V +/-0.1V R34 F2 Optical bench lamp
TP9 +26V +/-0.5V R44 F4 Valves
TP10 +24V +/-0.5V R57 F5 Stepper motors power - Heaters
3. Linear supplies
■ Check the correct value of the following supplies:
Test
Voltage Target Fuse Function
Point
TP2 +18V +/-0.5V F8 Analog
TP3 -18V +/-0.5V F7 Analog
TP5 +24V +/-1V F9 Pump SD motor
TP4 -12V +/-0.5V F9 Pump SD motor
TP6 +206V +/-5V F6 Apperture current
4. Aperture currents
■ Check and adjust the aperture currents according to the following procedure. Run an «Autocontrol»
cycle, then several manual cycles.
■ Disconnect the 2 HE13 connectors from the

preamplifier boards.
Technical Manual
■ During the counting periode, connect the voltmeter between the followings aperture current test points
and the ground (TP1). Check voltage and readjust if necessary with the corresponding potentiometer.
Test
Voltage Target Potentiometer Fuse Function
Point
TP12 +60V (RBC AC1) R73 F6 Apperture current
TP13 +60V (WBC AC2) R84 F6 Apperture current
TP14 +100V (BASO AC3) R108 F6 Apperture current
TP15 +60V (LMNE AC4) R96 F6 Apperture current
■ Reconnect the 2 HE13 connectors when the adjustment is completed.
If one voltage supply is missing, the corresponding LED will be OFF, check and replace the
corresponding fuse.
■ Risk of short circuit between TP4 and TP6

■ Put a piece of tube around test point to isolate while measuring on the other.
If you have re-adjusted one of the apperture current it is necessary to follow a gain
adjustment procedure:
■ TP12 or TP13 adjustment -> RAS414A WBC/RBC/PLT Gain adjustment.
■ TP14 or TP15 adjustment -> RAS418A BASO result adjustment
5. Cardcage
Check cardcage voltages if you suspect connexion problems.
Name Value(s) Location

Cardcage fans connector 12V
PIN1
between 3A: 0V and 1A: +18V PIN2
x2 Resistive preamplifier board PIN3
between 3A: 0V and 2A: -18V
PIN4
PIN5
between 1B: 0V and 1A: +18V

Optic preamplifier board Optical bench board
between 1B: 0V and 2B: -18V
Technical Manual
Name Value(s) Location
between 4A: 0V and 1A: -18V

OD signal board between 4A: 0V and 2A: +18V
between 4A: 0V and 3A: +5V
between Pin 3: 0V and Pin 2: +18V Locate on cardcage

LMNE/BASO signal board
between Pin 3: 0V and Pin 4: -18V position
between 3A: 0V and 1A: +18V Locate on cardcage
RBC/WBC/PLT/HGB board
between 3A: 0V and 2A: -18V position 7
Locate on cardcage
Alarm board (connector J3) between ground and Pin 3B: +26V
position 4
between Pin 2: 0V and Pin 1: +24V Locate on cardcage
Pump motor command
between Pin 2: 0V and Pin 3: -24V position 2
between Pin 3: 0V and Pin 1: +12V
Hard disk connector Behind hard disk
Floppy disk connector between Pin 2: 0V and Pin 1: +5V Behind floppy

Temperature control board
between Pin 2: 0V and Pin 4: -18V
between Pin 2: 0V and Pin 6: 0V
Optic bench lamp between Pin 1 and Pin 3: +9.4V Lamp connector
Stepper motor power board between Pin 7: 0V and Pin 2: +12V Behind rack loader
Technical Manual
Technical Manual
RAS404A
Compressor maintenance
■ Concerns
■ This procedure allows technician to perform the

compressor maintenance.
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Box wrench size 11 (or 7/16)
■ Wrench size 12
■ Philipps screw driver
■ Flat screw driver
■ Tubetanche: LAK001A
■ Alcohol
■ 30 min.
■ Frequency
■ Once a year

■ XEA425AS
(Included to Yearly maintenance kit XEA380AS)

the operations.
1. Introduction
1 x2
■ The compressor maintenance kit

XEA425AS includes following parts:
1 - 2x flat joint x2
2
2 - 2x O’rings
3 - 2x cups
4 - 2x square valves
5 - 2x rouded valves 3 x2
6 - 2x 2 screws
x2
4
x2
5
Technical Manual
2. Procedure
■ Switchoff instrument and remove the

power cable.
■ Open instrument rear left covers
■ Lift up the compressor.
■ Unscrew the tube connectors and

disconnect the tubes.
■ Remove the compressor
It is recommended to perform the compressor maintenance heads one by one.
■ Usinga box wrench size 11, unscrew and

remove the 3 bolts of the first compressor
head.
Technical Manual
■ Remove the head
■ Remove the head gasket and the valve

plate assy
■ Remove the cylinder and its O’ring and

clean the cylinder with alcohol.
■ Remove the shims, record their position

order, generaly the thiner shim is placed in
between 2 larger ones.
■ Clean the shims with alcohol.
Technical Manual
■ Unscrew and remove the screws of the

retainer plate.
■ Remove the cup and clean the retainer

plate with alcohol.
■ Place the new cup in the retainer plate.

■ Note that the new cup is nearly flat and
needs to take the «shape» of the retainer
plate.
■ Manually introduce the retainer plate and its

cup inside the cylinder by the bottom of the
cylinder (angled part) to «shape» the cup
Technical Manual
■ Hold up the connecting rod, place the

shims in the correct order position
■ Place the cylinder in its position.
■ Put a drop of «tubétanche» at the end of the

2 new screws.
■ Screw slightly the 2 retainer plate and cup

assy screws in order to get a perfect
alignment of the 3 parts.
■ Screw tightly the retainer plate fixation
screws onto the connecting rod assy
Technical Manual
■ Replace the cylinder O ring
■ Remove the valve from one side of the

plate.
■ Clean carefully the air passage hole.
■ Draw a line with a permanent pen in the
valve axle (axle of the 2 holes,
■ Reinstall the new valve across the 2 holes

axle line.
■ Use a drop of «tubétanche» on the screws
The 2 valves are different, make sure to replace the valve with the correct one (The square
valve is located on the upper side of the head gasket).
■ Make sure that the «tubétanche» does not come into contact with the operating part of the
valves.
■ If the valve centering (square side) is not well done, the compressor might be noisy.
■ Repeat the same operation for the valve located on the other side of the plate.
Technical Manual
■ Re-installthe head gasket and the

compressor head.
■ Tighten alternatively the 3 screws in order
to get a perfect tightening (Head gasket
tightening torque: 9 Nm).
■ Follow the same procedure for the second

compressor head.
■ Check silent-block state, they must not be
cracked. Replace them when necessary.
■ Re-install the compressor into its location
and reconnect the vacuum pressure tubes.
Bend the wirings over the compressor.
3. End of procedure
■ Perform a vacuum pressure adjustment as described in the procedure RAS409A: Pressure/Vacuum
adjustment.
■ Run control blood samples, check the results.
■ Recalibrate the instrument if necessary RAS436A: Calibration.
Technical Manual
RAS405A
Grabber cleaning
■ Concerns
■ This procedure allows the technician to clean

grabber’s jaws.
■ The jaws of the grabber become sticky after a
certain time of operation because of the glue of the
barcode labels of the sampling tubes..
■ Required tools
■ None
■ Sampling sticks with cotton
■ Alcohol
■ 10 min.
■ Frequency
■ Once a year

■ None

the operations.
Grabber cleaning
1. Grabber cleaning
In order to facilitate the access to the grabber, it is necessary to command the rotating and
the piercer motors manually. Always keep in mind that there is no protection against a wrong
action when the motors are controlled manually.
■ Switch on the instrument and open the instrument cover.

■ Turn the rotative carriage in order to facilitate the access to the grabber: function «Turn 90 deg.
anticlockwise» from menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Rotating system movements».
■ From menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Grabber movements» run a «Grabber out»
command and a «Open» command.
■ Run «Disconnect motors» from menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Rotating system
movements».
■ Push the carriage back in the instrument

and using the sampling cotton stick with
alcohol, clean the internal and external parts
of the grabber.
■ From menu
«Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Grabb
er movements» run a «Grabber in»
command and a «Close» command.
2. End of procedure
■ From «Other cycles» menu, run an «Autocontrol», and check there is no problem.
Technical Manual
RAS406B
Stepper motors adjustment
■ Concerns

adjust mechanically the operation of the stepper
motors.
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Ruler
■ Square: GBD350A
■ Silicon
■2 hours
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
Several test programs are available to check the stepper motor and grabber operations.
These applications are dedicated for maintenance purposes only and all requests on these
applications will be executed. None of the security systems will be activated in these menus.
1. Rotative carriage belt

■ Run the function «Keeping the motor to full power» from menu
«Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Rotating system movements».
■ Manualy try to rotate the rotative carriage,

and check there is no play.
■ If necessary tight the belt with the belt-
adjuster:
■ Unscrew the belt-adjuster bolt.

■ Move to the right the belt-adjuster and re-
tight the bolt.
Do not tight the belt too much.
Technical Manual
2. Rotative carriage Home adjustment

■ Run a «Home» command for the rotative carriage, from menu
■ Place the square tool GBD350A as shown.

■ Check that the vertical side of the rotation
carriage makes the correct angle with the
frame.
■ Remove the square.
The «Adjustment for home recovery» number of step has to be included between 5 and 45
steps.
1 2
■ Run an «Adjustment for home recovery»
command from menu
«Assistance\Adjustments\
Motors\Rotating system movements».
Change the number of step value and check
the result after another «Home» command.
- Decrease «Adjustment for home

recovery» number of step value to turn
rotative carriage anticlockwise (1).
- Increase «Adjustment for home
recovery» number of step value to turn
rotative carriage clockwise (2).
Technical Manual
3. Rack loader and Rotative carriage alignement
3.1. Alignement check & adjustment
■ Check that the rotative carriage finger is

aligned with the rack loader guide.
■ If necessary adjust the rack loader as

described below:
- Unscrew the 3 screws on each side of the
rack loader.
- Align rack loader guide and rotative
carriage finger, then tight the 6 screws.
Technical Manual
4. Rotative carriage sensor adjustment
Before any adjustment of the detection cells, make sure that the ambient light will not
interfere with the cell adjustment.
■ A wheel, behind the rotative carriage, with 4

indexes (+ one for the «Home» position)
allows the rotative carriage to check its
position each 1/4 turn.
■ To get the best adjustment, detection cell

must detect the window in the wheel with +/
- 6 steps.
■ Run a «Home» command for the rotative carriage from menu

■ Run the «Sensor reading» function, menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Motors».
■ Check that EOR22 (position of rotating

assy) is ON. If not detection cell must be
moved up or down.
■ Enter «No. of steps data capture» function, menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Rotating

system movements» and enter 6 steps.
■ Run a «Movement parametrable clockwise» command for the rotative carriage from menu
«Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Rotating system movements»: The rotative carriage will turn 6
steps clockwise.
Technical Manual
■ Check that EOR22 (position of rotating assy) is ON. If not detection cell must be moved up or down.
■ Run a «Home» command.
■ Run a «Movement parametrable anticlockwise» command for the rotative carriage, menu
«Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Rotating system movements»: The rotative carriage will turn 6
steps anticlockwise.
■ Run the «Sensor reading» function, menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Rack motors».
■ Check that EOR22 (position of rotating assy) is ON. If not detection cell must be moved up or down.
This adjustment should not be too critical as vibrations for example may give some errors.
Try to move the whole mechanism by hand and check that the sensor does not change its
status.
The detection cell must be perfectly horizontal to get the best results.
■ Check for the 3 other positions (90°/180°/270°) the same way.

■ Check adjustment stability by running 10 turns clockwise, «Turn 90 deg. clockwise» from menu
«Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Rotating system movements», and 10 turns anticlockwise,
«Turn 90 deg. anticlockwise» from the same menu. If the reading failed during these tests restart the
adjustment.
Technical Manual
5. Rack ejector adjustment
■ The «Home recovery adjustment» is setup to 70 steps (2 mm) and should not be modified.
■ The endless screw is covered with teflon, do not apply grease on it, just remove the dust.
■ Remove the rack receptor.

■ Run «Disconnect motors» command, to switch off the motor supply, from menu
■ Manualy turn the endless screw and move

the carriage in the home sensor direction in
order to turn EOR31 ejection home switch
on (you will hear a «Click»).
■ At this precise moment, the distance

between the carriage and the external side
of the ejection tray must be 124.5mm.
■ Readjust,
if necessary, the position of the
home sensor switch.
■ Run a «Home» command for the ejector
from menu
«Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Ejecto Home
r movements». sensor
Ejector
full sensor
■ When the motion is completed, measure

the distance between the carriage and the
external side of the ejection tray. The value
should be 126.5mm (<=> 124.5 + 70 steps
for switch stability).
Technical Manual
6. Rack ejection switch adjustment
■ Turn the endless screw in order to reach the

EOR32 switch.
When this switch is activated, the measured
distance between the carriage and the
external side of the ejection tray must be
9.5mm.
If not, readjust the switch position.
■ If you could not reach easily this switch, it

may be because of a BAD stepper motor
alignement:
Untight the 4 silent block motor screws,
move the ejection tray against the right side
of the ejector (close to the motor) and tight
the screws.
Technical Manual
7. Ejection shutter
■ Runa «Home» for the ejector, menu

«Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Ejecto
r movements».
■ Measure distance between the shutter and
the tray.
■ If
you don’t have 44mm readjust the
ejection shutter by the mean of pulley and
the cable
■ Run a «Sensor reading» command from

menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Motors»,
and check that AUX2 (ejection flap switch)
is ON, if not readjust switch position
■ Check after the installation of the rack ejector that the ejection system (Rack ejector,
Ejection switch and Ejection shutter) works correctly.
■ If the ejection shutter touch the rack ejector, increase the distance of 44mm.
Technical Manual
8. Rack loader adjustment
■ Unscrew the protection plate located below

the rack ejection tray.
■ Run a «Home» command for the loader
from menu
«Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Loadi
ng movements».
■ When the motion stops, check that the stub

axles of the shutters are in the autoblockage
position (they must be vertical as shown:
■ This position is called autoblockage
because it is the only position where the
weight of the rack stack will not move the
gears and let the bottom rack open the
shutters.
■ With a flat ruler check the distance between

the 2 axles in the upper and lower position,
the two measures must be equivalent
(around 49 mm).
■ If not, adjust the «Home recovery adjustment» number of steps from menu
«Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Loading movements» (factory adjusted to 42).
■ Run a «Home» command for the loader from menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Loading
movements» and check the adjustment again. If necessary repeat the procedure several times.
Technical Manual
9. Rack loader shutters adjustment
9.1. Shutter closed
■ Run a «Home» command for the loader

from menu
ng movements».
■ Check on the right shutter that an allen key,
size 4, just fits betwen the shutter and the
loading frame. The allen key must be along
the axle of the loading frame.
■ If
necessary readjust the right shutter:
Unscrew the fixation straps and adjust the
shutter. While tightening the straps push the
shutter to the rear of the instrument, and pull
the axle to the front, to cancel the gap
between the parts.
■ Adjust the left shutter as the right.
Both shutters must be perfectly symetrical (the right shutter is used as reference).
Technical Manual
9.2. Shutter open
■ Run the «Opening» command for the loader

from menu
ng movements».
■ Shutters opened, check the complete

opening of the clips on the rotation tray, the
shutters must be opened enough to make
sure that no rack will blocked during
loading.
■ Ifthe position is wrong, carry out the same
procedure with a bigger allen key.
■ Run «Closing» command for the loader
from menu
ng movements».
Technical Manual
10. Rack retainer adjustment
■ Run «Opening» command for the loader

from menu
ng movements».
■ Check that the rack retainers are parrallel to
the loading tray when the shutters are in
open position (1). If not, readjust the straps.
■ Check that the rack retainers are pushed to

the back of the instrument and axles to the
front of the instrument, and that the nylon
ring turns freely.
■ Run «Closing» command for the loader
from menu
ng movements».
Technical Manual
11. Rack detection switches
■ Insert a rack in the hoper (rack loader), the

rack should be detected by the «Rack
detection switches» in any positions (front
or rear). A
■ Pull the rack to the front.
■ Check that the rack comes at mechanical
stop against the white front guide (A), and
not against switches (B).
■ Ifthe «Rack detection switches» are
constrained by the racks, their life time B
decreases.
■ Ifthe «Rack detection switches» are

constrained, adjust the white front guide
position by installing an adjustable gauge
(GBD871A).
■ This gauge is factory installed from Pentra
DX 120 #0531 (adjustment done with
washer from PDX N° 0479) and is located
between the front plate and the white front
guide
■ Check the correct descent of the rack in the
rotative assy.
■ Check the detection of the switches in any
rack position (front or rear).
■ Place some more racks into the tray and

check that if the 3rd one is not positioned
properly, it will press the position default
switch.
■ If not, readjust the switch position.
12. Loading and ejection check

■ Make sure that the whole loading and ejection mechanisms are operating properly after the
adjustment. Proceed as follows: Fill the loader with 10 racks and run several «Loading ejection cycle»
from menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Special cycles» and check that rack’s loading and
ejection are correct.
Technical Manual
RAS407A
Piercer & Grabber mechanical adjustment
■ Concerns

adjust mechanically the piercer and grabber
operation.
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Ruler
■ Square: GBD350A
■ Mirror
■ None
■1 hours
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
Several test programs are available to check the stepper motor and grabber operations.
These applications are dedicated for maintenance purposes only and all requests on these
applications will be executed. None of the security systems will be activated in these menus.
It is highly recommended to proceed to the mechanical adjustments in the following order:

■1 - Rotation carriage (see RAS406B: Stepper motors adjustment)
■ 2 - Ejection carriage (see RAS406B: Stepper motors adjustment)
■ 3 - Loading mechanism (see RAS406B: Stepper motors adjustment)
■ 4 - Piercing carriage and grabber.
1. Carriage parallelism adjustment

■ In order to be able to move the assemblies by hand, diconnect the motors power supply from menu
«Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Rotating system movements\Disconnect motors».
■ Run a «Home» of the rotating device (menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Rotating system
movements»).
■ Push the piercer carriage at 7cm from the

front plate, and measure the distance (Xmm)
between the frame of the piercer and the
rotative plate having the barcode label.
■ Push the piercer carriage completely to the
back of the instrument and take a second
measure. The 2 measures should be
equivalent +/-0.5mm.
■ If not, unscrew the 3 screws centering the

piercer axle screw, and adjust the piercer.
Technical Manual
■ If necessary re-adjust the piercer rail guide:
■ Restart «Piercer parralellism adjustment»

to the beginning and check adjustment
again.
2. Adjustment of the piercer position in front of

the tube
■ Insert an empty rack into the rack loader and run an «Opening / Closing» command from menu
«Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Motors movements\Loading flaps».
■ Run a «Home» command then 3 times the «Turn 90 Deg. Clockwise» cycle from menu
«Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Motors movements\Basic cassette movements».
■ Run an «Relative Home» menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Piercing needle movements».
■ Run a «Cassette position data capture» menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Motors
movements\Basic cassette movements» and validate the position 5.
■ Run «Close» command for the grabber, from menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Grabber
movements».
■ Run a «Grabber out» command menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Grabber movements».
■ Check grabber is perfectly centered on one

tube’s axis.
■ If not, run a «Grabber in» command menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Grabber

movements» and adjust the «Home recovery adjust.» from menu
«Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Piercing needle movements».
■ Once you have modified the «Home recovery adjust.» check the new adjustment as previously
described.
Technical Manual
Always run a «Grabber in» cycle before re-adjusting the «Home recovery adjust.».
■ The number of steps value should be included between 17 and 38 steps.

■ When the grabber is too far to the front of the instrument, it is necessary to decrease the
number of steps.
■ When the grabber is too far at the rear of the instrument, it is necessary to increase the
number of steps.
■ 1 stepper motor revolution corresponds to 400 steps which corresponds to 1 turn of the
endless screw which corresponds to 12mm of the piercing carriage motion.
1
■ If the value cannot be obtained within the
limits, re-adjust the position of the detection
plate located below the piercer carriage (2
screws 1) and restart the «Adjustment of the
piercer position in front of the tube»
procedure.
Technical Manual
3. Grabber adjustment
■ In order to be able to move the assemblies by hand, diconnect the motors power supply from menu
«Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Rotating system movements\Disconnect motors».
■ Run «Open» command for the grabber, from menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Grabber
movements».
■ Move the carriage from alI along the rack

and check that the grabber is parallel and
comes very close to the rack.
■ Ifnot, readjust the grabber position using

the 4 screws of the grabber air cylinder.
Center the height position regarding the
clips of the rack.
It may be necessary to open the pneumatical door to reach the air cylinder screws shown on
previous diagram.
It is mandatory to perform the «Piercing position adjustment» after adjustment of the grabber
position as described further.
Technical Manual
4. Piercing position adjustment

■ Make a mark in the center of the stopper of an empty sample tube. Place this tube on the position 2
of the rack.
■ Check there is no rack in the rotative carriage and the insert the rack into the rack loader. Load the
rack, run an «Opening / Closing» command from menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Motors
movements\Loading flaps».
■ Run a «Home» command then a «Turn 90 Deg. Anticlockwise» cycle from menu
«Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Motors movements\Basic cassette movements».
■ From menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Motors movements\Basic cassette movements»
run a «Cassette position data capture» command, and validate the position 2, to move the piercer in
front of the tube #2.
■ Install the piercing assy protection.

■ Pull the piercing needle assy out from its
location.
■ Run «Open» command for the grabber, from menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Grabber

movements».
■ Run «Close» command for the grabber, from menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Grabber
movements».
■ Run a «Grabber in» command menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Grabber movements».
■ The tube is now piercing position, with a

small mirror check the piercing position:
Technical Manual
■ According to the marked position on the

tube stopper, adjust the piercing position by 1 2
the means of the air cylinder stopper screws
(1). Untight the counter nuts (2) and adjust in
the same proportion the air cylinder stopper
screws (1).
If the piston stopper is screwed clockwise (1), the tube will move on the right handside of the
piercing position.
■ When the adjustment is completed, re-tight the counter nuts.

■ Check the correct piercing operation again.
■ From menu «Other cycles» run an «Ejection cassette» cycle.
Technical Manual
Technical Manual
RAS408B
Internal BC reader & Tube detector adjustment
■ Concerns

adjust the operation of the barcode reader and the
tube detection
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ None
■ 45 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
Internal BC reader & Tube detector
adjustment
Several test programs are availables. These applications are dedicated for maintenance
purposes only and all requests on these applications will be executed. None of the security
systems will be activated in these menus.
1. Internal barcode window cleaning
■ Open the cover. 2

■ Unscrew the 2 fixation screws (1).
■ Remove the protection window (2).
■ Clean the window with soapy water and
rinse thoroughly with distilled water.
■ Check that barcode reader external part is
clean too.
1 1
■ Re-install the window.
Technical Manual
adjustment
2. Internal barcode reading check

■ Load an empty rack (Menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Special cycles» command «Loading
2 cassettes»).
■ Start a «Barcode reading test (10 tubes)» from menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Special
cycles».
■ During the reading the barcode lights in red.

Check that the red light is accross the
sample # written on the rack.
■ Ifthe red light is well positioned, eject the
rack: menu
«Assistance\Adjustments\Motors\Speci
al cycles» command «Ejecting 2
cassettes». If not adjust internal barcode
position as described below.
3. Internal barcode adjustment

■ From the observations of the reading test, adjust the barcode.
■ Untightscrews 2 & 3 and adjust barcode

using the screw 1.
■ When adustment is ended tight screws 2
and then the screw 3.
■ Checkan «Internal barcode reading 1
check» again and eject the rack.
2 2
Technical Manual
adjustment
4. Tube detector reading check
4.1. Full rack detection check
■ Fill 2 racks with 10 tubes each one.

■ Run a Home of the 4 axes:
- Menu: 4. Assistance\7. Adjustments\6. Motors\0. Special cycles\4. 4 axes home
■ Load these 2 racks:
- Menu: 4. Assistance\7. Adjustments\6. Motors\0. Special cycles, select: 5. Loading 2 cassettes
■ Move the rotating assembly to have the first rack in front of the detector:
- Menu: 4. Assistance\7. Adjustments\6. Motors\5. Rotative system movements, select: 5. turn
90 deg. anticlockwise
■ Read the first rack:
- Menu: 4. Assistance\7. Adjustments\6. Motors\4. Piercing needle movement, select: 6: Tube
present (cassette 10 tubes)
■ Check the tube present reading:
present reading
■ Move the rotating assembly to have the second rack in front of the detector:
180 deg clockwise.
■ Read the second rack:
■ Check the tube present reading:
present reading
■ Eject the racks:
- Menu: 4. Assistance\7. Adjustments\6. Motors\0. Special cycles, select: 6. Ejecting 2 cassettes
If one or more tube are NOT detected, refer to “5.Tube detector adjustment, page 6”
4.2. Rack with 3 tubes detection check
■ Fill 2 racks with 3 tubes each one position 1, 5 and 10).

Technical Manual
adjustment

■ Check the tube present reading (only the tubes present in position 1, 5 and 10 should be detected):
present reading
180 deg clockwise.
■ Check the tube present reading (only the tubes present in position 1, 5 and 10 should be detected):
present reading
■ Ejectthe racks:
If one or more tube are detected in an empty position (positions 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9), refer to
“5.Tube detector adjustment, page 6”
4.3. Empty rack detection check
■ Prepare 2 empty racks.

■ Check the tube present reading (no tube should be detected):
present reading
180 deg clockwise.
■ Check the tube present reading (no tube should be detected):
present reading
■ Eject the racks:
Technical Manual
adjustment
If one or more tube are detected, refer to “5.Tube detector adjustment, page 6”
5. Tube detector adjustment
Depending on the instrument, two detectors are available:

- Previous: XBA337AS (obsolete)
- New: XBA337BS
In case of replacement, refer to technical note RAN385 (reflective bands on the rotation
assembly are different for each detector).
5.1. For XBA337A detector
■ Check that tube detector is around 40mm.

out from its support.
40mm.
■ Check that tube detector’s LED and cable

output are horizontal.
Technical Manual
adjustment
5.2. For XBA337B detector
■ Check that tube detector is around 36 mm

out from its support.
■ The potentiometer must be positioned in
front of the operator.
■ If 10 tubes are detected on the full racks, no
tubes are detected on the empty rack, and
only the 3 tubes are detected in the correct
position (1, 5 and 10) with the other racks, 36 mm
no adjustment is necessary.
■ If one or more tube are NOT detected, the sensitivity of the detector must be slightly
increased. In this case, gently turn the potentiometer clockwise.
■ If
one or more tube are detected in an empty position (positions 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9 of
the 2 racks filled with only 3 tubes, or position 1 to 10 on the empty racks), the
sensitivity of the detector must be slightly decreased. In this case, gently turn the
potentiometer counterclockwise.
■ In caseof potentiometer adjusment, check the correct functioning again, see “4.Tube detector reading
check, page 4”.
The adjustment of the sensitivity should not be excessive regards to the median position (+/
-20° maximum).
Technical Manual
adjustment
Technical Manual
RAS409A
Pressure/Vacuum adjustment
■ Concerns

adjust the nominal and displayed Pressure/Vacuum
of the instrument.
■ Required tools
■ Manometer 0-10b (Barflex)
■ Insulatedscrewdriver
■ Voltemeter
■ Hexagonal keys
■ None
■1 hour
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
1. Vacuum & pressure regulators

■ Vacuum and pressure regulators are located on the right side of the instrument:
■A - Main pressure regulator (2,8b)

B
■ B- Pressure regulator (1,5b)
■C - Vacuum regulator (-330 mb)
■ D- Vacuum regulator (-225 mb) A
D C
Regulator service pressure is different when regulator is locked or unlocked.
Technical Manual
2. Pressure adjustments
2.1. Main pressure 2.8b (Compressor)
■ Disconnectthe tube coming from the valve

«53» and connect a Barflex instead.
■ Using the Main pressure regulator located
on the right side of the instrument (A) adjust
the 2.8b +/-0.1b pressure (clockwise to
increase pressure, anticlockwise to
decrease pressure).
■ Lock regulator to check pressure value.
■ When the adjustment is completed, it is
necessary to check the displayed value
(Menu «Machine\Alarms\Adjustment»).
2.2. 1.5b pressure (Membrane pump operation)
■ Open the instrument pneumatic door. On

instrument rear side, disconnect the tube
coming on the «T» connector between the
valves «11» and «9». Connect the Barflex on
the pressure tube.
■ Adjust the pressure to 1.5b +/-0.05b using
the pressure regulator located on the right
side of the instrument (B).
■ Lock regulator to check pressure value.
Technical Manual
2.3. 900mb pressure (Backflush and chamber drain)
■ Open the pneumatical door and disconnect

the output of the 900mb regulator (the top 1
output) and connect a Barflex to the
pressure tube (1).
■ Using a flat screwdriver, adjust the 900mb
+/-5mb pressure with the regulator located
on the right handside of the pneumatical
door (2).
3
2.4. 100mb pressure (Chamber bubbling)
■ Disconnect the output of the 100mb

regulator (the top output) and connect a
Barflex to the pressure tube (4). 4
■ Using a flat screwdriver, adjust the 100mb
+/-2mb pressure with the 100mb regulator
located on the right handside of the
pneumatical door (3).
Technical Manual
3. Vacuum adjustments
3.1. -330mb Vacuum
■ -330mb is used to drain chambers, membrane pump operation and blood aspiration.
■ Using vacuum regulator located next to the

pressor regulator (C) adjust the -330mb
(tolerances: -360mb to -325mb) vacuum
measured by the Barflex connected on the
free nipple of the waste chamber #3.
3.2. -225mb Vacuum (Cell counts)
■ By the means of the vacuum regulator

located next to the pressure regulator (D)
adjust the -225mb +/-2mb vacuum,
measured by the Barflex connected on the
free nipple of the waste chamber #1
It is recommended after a -225mb adjustment to check again the -330mb vacuum because
of a slight interference between the 2 adjustments.
Technical Manual
4. Vacuum/Pressure displayed values check &

adjustment
4.1. Vacuum & Pressure displayed check
■ From menu «Machine\Alarms\Adjustment» select «Vacuum/Pressure» option and press ENTER,

working pressure and vacuum are diplayed for 20 seconds. Displayed values must be around: 2.8b for
pressure and -225mb for vacuum.
■ When the instrument is in STAND BY mode and the Vacuum/pressure adjustment cycle is
activated, the compressor starts and needs 30 seconds approximately to reach the correct
pressure and vacuum.
■ The vacuum/pressure board has to be adjusted once a year or when necessary to have a
perfect correspondance between displayed and nominal pressure and vacuum values (see
begining of this procedure).
■ If the values are not correct, perform adjustment as described further.
It is necessary to perform a repeatability test after the vacuum/pressure adjustments as the

chamber bubbling have a significant influence on the stability of the measures.
4.2. Vacuum & Pressure board: Pressure adjustment
■ Using a LUER male/female connector

(EAC019A), install a derivation with a «T»
connector on the tube connected to the
Barflex (0-10b).
■ Open the instrument cover, open the

pneumatical door and disconnect the
pressure tube coming from the compressor.
Technical Manual
■ Install
the Barflex at the level of the
pressure/vacuum connection.
- One end is connected to the tube going to
the vacuum/pressure board,
- The other end is connected to the tube
coming from the compressor.
■ Connect a voltmeter on the test point TP3

of the Vacuum/pressure board located on
the power supply module side, ground on
TP1.
If one sensor or the vacuum/pressure board is changed, you will need to setup instrument to
default values (ground on TP1):
■ On TP3 adjust R28 potentiometer to get 5.88V.
■ On TP2 adjust R24 potentiometer to get 5.88V. Using the 2.8b pressure regulator, adjust
the pressure to get 3.0b on the Barflex.
■ Decrease pressure regulator to get 2.2b on the Barflex.
■ Adjust R17 potentiometer to have the same pressure value between the measure of the Barflex and
the displayed value.
■ Increase the pressure to have 3.4b. Adjust R17 in order to compensate by half the reading error
between the Barflex and the instrument’s display (for example: Barflex reading is 3.4b, display reading
is 3.3b, adjust R17 to read 3.35b on the display.).
■ Decrease the pressure to 3.0b. Readjust R24 to get the same value between the Barflex reading and
the display reading.
■ Check the display reading for 2.2b and 3.4b.
■ Readjust the pressure final target value to 2.8b +/- 0.05b.
Technical Manual
4.3. Vacuum & Pressure board: Vacuum adjustment
■ Disconnect the free output of the regulated

chamber #2 and connect the Barflex.
■ Adjust the -225mb vacuum regulator (D) in
order to get the -225mb vacuum reading on
the Barflex.
■ Disconnect the barflex and put the stopper
on the free output of the regulated chamber
#2.
As the vacuum regulators are linked together, it is necessary to re-adjust the first regulator
when the second had been adjsuted.
If one sensor or the vacuum/pressure board is changed, you will need to setup instrument to
default values:
■ Connect a voltmeter on the test point TP6 of the Vacuum/pressure board. Adjust R45
potentiometer to have 7.84V.
■ Using the vacuum regulator, adjust the vacuum to have -200mb.
■ Connect the voltmeter on TP5, adjust R39 potentiometer to have 7.84V.
■ Adjust the vacuum to get -170mb.

■ Adjust R34 potentiometer to have the same vacuum value between the measure of the Barflex and the
displayed value.
■ Increase the vacuum to have -255mb (+0mb/-2mb). Adjust R34 potentiometer in order to compensate
by half the reading error between the Barflex and the instrument’s display (for example: Barflex reading
is -255mb, display reading is -240mb, adjust R34 to read -247mb on the display.).
■ Decrease the vacuum to -200mb. Readjust R39 to get the same value between the Barflex reading
and the display reading.
■ Check the display reading for -170mb and -255mb.
■ Readjust the vacuum final target value to -225mb.
■ Disconnect the Barflex and re-install the tube.
Technical Manual
RAS410A
Sampling valve maintenance
■ Concerns
■ This procedure allows the technician to maintain

the instrument sampling valve.
■ Required tools
■ Clothpaper
■ Little
syringe
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Distilled water
■ ABX Minoclair
■1 hour 30 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ Versilube grease XEA218A

the operations.
■ During all the following operations, make sure that the compressor remains under power.
Release the pressure pushing several times valve <53>.
■ Do not disconnect tubes at the sampling valve but from the connectors behind.
■ Run a diluent rinse before any manipulation.
1. Sampling valve dismantling
■ Open the cover.

■ Draw a line across the sampling valve
ceramic parts.
■ Holding the valve with one hand pull out the

lever and the position knob to remove the
valve.
When you open the valve diluent may leaks from outlets 9 et 10, use absorbant paper to clean
and sweep leakages.
■ Gently slide the valve parts in order to open

it .
■ Remove the central part of the sampling
valve.
Technical Manual
2. Valve cleaning
■ Immerse the central part in a recipient

containing ABX Minoclair and let them soak
for 10 minutes.
■ Rinse it thoroughly with distilled water.
3. Unblocking the apertures

■ If one of the aperture is blocked by a piece of tube top or a clot. Try to locate the clot or the piece of
tube top and disconnect the tygon tube from the aperture connector (Do not disconnect all the tubes
at the same time from sampling valve).
■ Use a syringe to push out the clot from the valve.
■ Reconnect the tygon tube on the connector and reassemble the valve as described below.
4. Re-assembling
■ Apply a thin film of Versilube grease on your glove then on the valve parts which come into contact.
■ Make sure not to block the ceramic apertures.
Technical Manual
5. Valve tightening pressure adjustment
This adjustment has to be carried out only in case of a blockage or leaks problems on the
customer site.
■ In case of leak problems, proceed as follow:

Make sure that the ceramical parts of the valve have been cleaned according to the procedure above.
Make sure that the inputs and outputs of the valve are not blocked.
Release the pressure lever and check that the valve is not tightened.
■A slight action on the toothed wheel will considerably change the tightening pressure
applied on the ceramical parts (see below).
■ The authorized adjustment on the toothed wheel is factory adjusted to +/- 10°.
■ At the end of the adjustment operation, it is mandatory to observe the functionning of the
sampling valve for one hour during routine work operation.
■ Before adjustment unscrew the screw (2).

■ The valve tightening torque is factory
adjusted (9.3cm/kg) but this one should not
be adjusted on the field. A mark on the
toothed wheel indicates the factory
adjustment.
■ Each graduation on the toothed wheel (1)
indicates 10°. 1
■ Turning the wheel (previously adjusted to
210N) 2
- 10° clockwise will raise the strength of
15N.
- 10° anticlockwise will decrease the
strength of 30N.
■ Turn the toothed wheel clockwise or
anticlockwise a maximum to one graduation
from the origin.
■ Check the valve operation. Too much
pressure will block its operation, too low
pressure will give leaks.
■ Tight the screw (2).
Technical Manual
RAS411A
Commutation valve maintenance
■ Concerns
■ This procedure allows the technician to maintain

the instrument commutation valve.
■ Required tools
■ Clothpaper
■ Little
syringe
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Distilled water
■ ABX Minoclair
■ 30 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ Versilube grease XEA218A

the operations.
1. Valve dismantling
■ Run a «Rinse» cycle from menu «Other

cycles», before any manipulation.
■ Switch off the instrument and release the
pressure by pressing several times valve
<53>.
■ Using a small tool (hexagonal key for
example), unblock the valve tightening
screw.
■ Unscrew the valve tightening screw.
■ Remove the tightening screw and the front

part of the valve. Disconnect the tubes from
the valve. Beware as some liquids may flow
from the valve apertures.
Technical Manual
2. Valve cleaning
■ Using a little syringe and distilled water,

flush the valve aperture to remove any
blockage.
■ Putthe valve into ABX Minoclair for half an
hour, then rinse toroughly with distilled
water.
■ Gently wipe the 2 parts of the valve and
apply a thin film of Versilube grease on the
parts which come into contact. Make sure
not to block the ceramic apertures.
■ Clean the screw and grease it gently with

Versilube grease (Only on the pointed area
shown
Make sure not to block the ceramic apertures.
3. Valve re-assembling
■ Check that the commutation aperture

(indicated on diagram) is perfectly cleaned.
■ Reassemble the valve in the reverse order,
beware of the tube positions when
reconnecting them.
■ Tighten and block the fixation screw.
■ Switch on the instrument and run a «Vacuum/Pressure» function from menu

«Machine\Alarms\Adjustments».
■ Press several times on the pneumatic switch <58> to check the correct operation of the valve.
■ Run several manual cycles and check for no leak.
Technical Manual
Technical Manual
RAS412A
Sample detection cells adjustment
■ Concerns
■ This procedure allows the technician to adjust the

sensitivity of the blood sample detection cells C1
and C2 located on each side of the sampling valve.
■ Required tools
■A clamp
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Control blood
■A diluted fresh and normal human blood having:
RBC around 0.8x106/mm3
Hgb between 2 and 2.5g/dl
■ 30 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
1. Disable the «Blood detection» cells alarm

■ Run a Control blood to check HGB is within the acceptable control blood limits.
■ In order to run a blood sample having RBC around 0.8x106/mm3 and Hgb around 2.5g/dl, it is
necessary to disable the sample detection cell alarm (otherwise the results will not be displayed).
■ Open the «Worklist» window. Identify the sample if necessary.
■ Move the cursor to the sample patient file (or to the last file of the worklist).
■ In the «S» column, select the patient file (press the space bar to display a ✓). Do not exit the Worklist
window to run the analysis.
■ Prepare a blood sample tube having RBC around 0.8x106/mm3 and HGB around 2.5g/dl. Use the
instrument diluent for the dilution.
■ Plunge the manual probe into the sample and press the OT start cycle bar.
■ Check the liquid comes through the

commutation valve, up to the second
detection photocell (between the sampling
valve and the liquid valve <48>, 1 on
diagram), then press the start bar once 1
again in order to stop the sample aspiration.
■ Run the sample several times to check the RBC value.

■ Re-adjust the dilution if necessary.
Technical Manual
2. Blood detection cells adjustment

■ Run «Blood cells» from menu «Assistance\Adjustment».
■A message warning the operator is displayed: All previous adjustments will be replaced by the actual
adjustments. Enter «Y» to confirm.
■ Place the previously diluted blood sample and press «Y» key. The cycle starts and the diluted blood is
aspirated.
■A chart table gives the status (OK or FAILED) of the 2 detection cells: Upstream photocell and Down
stream photocell.
AIR BLOOD
Upstream Photocell 1 OK OK
Upstream Photocell 2 OK OK
1- Adjustment is completed: instrument returns to «Alarms» menu.

2- Adjustment failed on air: the result data are displayed for the cells C1 and C2.
Check the cell connection.
Check the presence of air inside the cell before the adjustment.
3- Adjustment failed on blood: the result data are displayed for the cells C1 and C2.
Check the freshness of the blood sample.
Check the dilution of the blood sample.
Check the presence of blood inside the cell during the adjustment.
■ If the adjustment failed and all the previous checks have been achieved, with air and with blood,
replace the cell.
■ Once the procedure has been completed, run several blood samples with high and low RBC values
and check that the blood detection is correct.
Technical Manual
Technical Manual
RAS413A
HGB Blank adjustment
■ Concerns

to adjust the HGB blank.
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Flatinsulated screwdriver
■ Voltmeter
■ None
■ 20 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
HGB Blank adjustment
■ Hgb blank adjustment has to be carried out only on a clean and repeatable instrument.
Make sure that the ABX Diluent is clean (blank cycle values within the limits).
■ Beware risk of short circuits between test points and the capacitor C11 located behind the
test points.
■ An HGB calibration is required after HGB blank adjustment.
On previous WBC-RBC-PLT-HGB boards, there is no R95’ potentiometer, adjust with R95.
■ Open the instrument cover and switch the

instrument on.
■ Open the spectrophotometer black cover.
■ Install thermometer sensor in between the
LED wires.
■ IMPORTANT: Re-install the black cover
and close instrument cover. Wait at least
15mn for the temperature to be stabilized
and record the value.
■ Connect a voltmeter between TP2 (Ground)

and TP1 (Signal) on the WBC-RBC-PLT-
HGB board located on the cardcage.
■ Run a prime cycle for ABX Diluent «Other
cycles\Diluent priming».
■ Wait for the end of the cycle and readjust
R95' in order to get the correct voltage
value according to the room temperature,
see following table.
■ Run an HGB calibration.
Temperature Voltage Temperature Voltage Temperature Voltage

17°C 4.80V 25°C 4.64V 33°C 4.48V
18°C 4.78V 26°C 4.62V 34°C 4.46V
19°C 4.76V 27°C 4.60V 35°C 4.44V
20°C 4.74V 28°C 4.58V 36°C 4.42V
21°C 4.72V 29°C 4.56V 37°C 4.40V
22°C 4.70V 30°C 4.54V 38°C 4.38V
23°C 4.68V 31°C 4.52V 39°C 4.36V
24°C 4.66V 32°C 4.50V 40°C 4.34V
Technical Manual
RAS414B
WBC/RBC/PLT Gain adjustment
■ Concerns

to adjust adjust RBC, PLT and WBC gains.
■ Required tools
■ Clamp
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Flatscrewdriver
■ Micropipette 0-10µl
■ None
■ 20 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ LAD001DS WBC Latex
■ LAD002BS RBC/PLT Latex

the operations.
1. Preliminary
■ Perform an Autoconcentrated cleaning.
■ Check that the printer is feed with paper and ready.
■ From menu «Other cycles» run a «Blanck cycle» and check instrument cleanliness.
■ Select «DIF» mode for manual analysis.
■ Select «Latex mode» from menu «Assistance\Adjustment\Options».
■ Unselect «Blood detection» alarm from menu «Machine\Alarms\Options».
■ Open the cover.
■ Put the RBC/PLT Latex and WBC Latex to mix on a Vortex during 5 mn or shake thoroughly.
■ Blank cycle results have to be as low as possible in order to avoid any interference in the
latex measuring cycle.
2. WBC gain adjustments

In order to adjust the WBC gain:
1- Run the LYM latex.
2- Run the GRA Latex.
2.1. LYM Latex adjustment
■ Prepare to clamp between valve <48> and

detection cell .Do not clamp yet.
■ Present the LYM Latex vial to the sampling
needle, holding the clamp in the other hand.
Technical Manual
■ Start sampling WBC latex.

■ Waitfor the liquid to be aspirated until the
second detection cell. As soon as the latex
can be seen in the tubing (from the
detection cell to the valve <48>) clamp it.
■ Keep it clamped until the commutation of
the sampling valve is triggered. Release the
clamp.
■ Waitfor the results to be printed out and
superpose the standard sheet to the printed
curves.
Numerical results on the standard sheet must not be used for the WBC gain adjustment.
Check that both curve have the same width and the same location on the graph abscissa.
■ Printout the curves resulting from the

analysis and superimpose this curve with
the reference curve
■ The 2 curves must have the same peaks,

even if their shapes are different. Should this
not be the case, readjust the WBC gain by R8 (WBC)
the mean of the R8 potentiometer of the
WBC\RBC\PLT signal board located on the
cardcage (Turning R8 clockwise increase
WBC gain).
Technical Manual
2.2. GRA Latex adjustment
■ When the LYM Latex adjustment is correct,

perform the GRA Latex adjustment in the
same way as LYM Latex adjustment.
■ Print out the curves resulting from the
analysis and superimpose this curve with
the reference curve.
■ The 2 curves must have the same peaks, even if their shapes are different. Should
this not be the case,
re-adjust WBC gain by the mean of the R8 potentiometer of the WBC\RBC\PLT signal board located
on the cardcage (Turning R8 clockwise increase WBC gain) with LYM Latex then GRA Latex, repeat
until the superimposition of both curve is correct.
3. RBC and PLT gains adjustment
■ Use the micropipette to sample 8µl of the

RBC/PLT latex.
■ Present the micropipette as shown on the
diagram.
■ Press the sampling bar to run a cycle.
■ Wait for the RBC chamber to be drained.
■ Send the latex as soon as the dilution is
poured in the chamber (Hold the pipette in
order to send the latex in the dilution flow
coming from the injection tube).
■ Remove the micropipette from the RBC

chamber.
■ Wait for the results to be printed out and
proceed as described for «WBC gain
adjustment» to compare the curves.
Technical Manual
■ If
necessary adjust R19 for RBC gain/R53
for PLT gain from the WBC\RBC\PLT signal
board located on the cardcage (Turn R19 (RBC)
clockwise to increase the gain).
R53 (PLT)
4. After adjustment
■ Re-setup the instrument:
Unselect «Latex mode» option.
Re-select «Blood detection» alarm.
Technical Manual
Technical Manual
RAS415B
LMNE adjustments
■ Concerns
■ This procedure allows the technician to adjust

LMNE flowcell: Centering & Focusing (OAM and
WBC Latex).
■ LMNE Threshold and gains adjustments.
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Screwdriver
■ Voltmeter
■ 5ml tube with rubber cap
■ EAE004AS: 0.89x50mm Tube
■1 hour 30 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ Optical alignment Material LAD003A
■ Time transfer tool XEA432AS

the operations.
LMNE adjustments
1. Optical lamp supply voltage
■ Check the Lamp power supply voltage:

+9,4V +/-0,1V.
Beware of this voltage value as it depends on your instrument serial number (see Service
Information Letter «Improvement of the matrix quality» RAN007A or see RAS402A: Yearly
maintenance procedure). Previous instruments that have not been modified on the optical
bench (replacement of the gun filter) must be adjusted to the old value (8,8V +/-0,1V). Refer
to this SIL to verify this number.
Depending on the power supply some lamp voltage may not exceed 9.2V.
The potentiometer must never be to its maximum, at least remove a half turn from the
maximum position of the potentiometer.
2. Flowcell adjustment
The purpose of adjustment is to center the flow of samples in the middle of the light pathway,
at the optimum focusing point. This is possible only by running liquids which have different
light refraction indexes in the flowcell.
This adjustment is possible only when difraction and emission guns are properly aligned.
Attempt to readjust this alignement on the field will never give satisfactory results.
Technical Manual
LMNE adjustments
1 - Sample flow
2 - Sheath stream M1
3 - Sheath stream M2
4 - Light beam
5 - Aperture
6 - Cone nozzle
7 - Injector
8 - Sheath M1
9 - Sheath M2
10 - Optical glass window
11 - Optical pathway
■ Replace ABX Leucodiff bottle by OAM.

■ Prime the OAM by running an ABX Leucodiff prime cycle from «Others cycles».
■ Run «Alignment» option from menu «Assistance\Adjustments» (or an «Optical flowcell cleaning»
cycle from menu «Other cycles»).
■ Differences between liquid indexes should show on the optical window two areas corresponding to
the flow edges.
Correct Adjustment Wrong Focalisation Wrong Focalisation Wrong Centering
■ Check that these flow edges respond to the «Correct Adjustment». If not or if nothing appears on the
window perform the procedure as follows.
■ Before carrying out an OAM adjustment, replace the «0.19x39mm tube + 1.85x10mm tube» from the
flowcell injector (inlet 6) by a «0.89x50mm tube».
■ Release the two tightening screws (3) and
try to position the flowcell right on the
center of the two objective lenses with the
focusing toothed wheel (2).
■ Run «Alignment» option from menu
«Assistance\Adjustments» and when the
syringes rise, adjust the centering of the 1 2
liquid stream with the toothed wheel (1).
■ Finally, adjust the focusing with the toothed
wheel (2) and gently recentre if necessary
with the toothed wheel (1). A correct
adjustment is made when the window can
be divided in three areas, with the sample 2
stream in the window.
■ The stream shadow above and below the 1
window has to be in the same alignment as
the stream in the window. If not readjust
using the right toothed wheel. 3
■ Tightenthe fixation screw (3) of the
centering toothed wheel (1) and run once
more an «Alignment» option from menu
«Assistance\Adjustments» in order to
confirm the adjustment of the flow stream.
Technical Manual
LMNE adjustments
■ Replace the «0.89x50mm tube» connected to the flowcell injector (inlet 6) by the original «0.19x39mm
tube + 1.85x10mm tube».
■ Replace the OAM by the previous bottle of ABX Leucodiff and run an «ABX Leucodiff prime» cycle
and follow this procedure.
3. LMNE Result adjustment
3.1. Resistive and Optical threshold adjustments
3.1.1. Resistive threshold
■ Pentra DX 120
The threshold is adjustable only by the mean of the software. From menu
«Assistance\Adjustments\Laser\Thresholds», check the LMNE threshold value is: 900mV +/-
50mV
■ Pentra DF 120
This adjustment is done on the Signal
processor board.
Connect voltmeter between Ground
(external part of the coaxial cable) and the
middle point of R19.
Check and if necessary adjust threshold, by
the mean of R19, to the following value:
900mV +/-50mV
R19
Technical Manual
LMNE adjustments
3.1.2. Optical Threshold
Ground
■ Connect the voltmeter between Ground

and R23.
■ Adjust the voltage to 700mV +/-7mV by the
means of R24 potentiometer. R24
Test Point R23
3.2. Resistive and Optical gain adjustments
3.2.1. Resistive gain adjustment (Pentra DX 120)
R98
■ The resistive gain is set on the Optical
bench board located on the right handside
of the Laser bench, by means of R98
potentiometer.
■ Adjusting the Resistive gain will move the cells populations along the resistivity axis but in different
proportions according to the populations.
■ According to the resistive gain adjustment, populations of cells will move to the left or to the right on
the matrix:
If the Resistive gain is increased (R98 turned right), cell populations will move to the right on the matrix.
If the Resistive gain is decreased (R98 turned left), cell populations will move to the left on the matrix.
■ Run several fresh blood samples (Normal values) and check the general appearance of the matrix.
■ During cycles, with fresh blood samples, adjust the resistive gain by means of R98 on the Optical
bench board.
Technical Manual
LMNE adjustments
Too Low Correct Too High
Resistivity Axis
3.2.2. Resistive gain adjustment (Pentra DF 120)

■ The resistive gain is set by R1 on the signal processing board located on the cardcage.
■ According to the resistive gain adjustment, populations of cells will move along the resistive axis in
different proportions according to the populations:
If the resistive gain is increased, cell populations will move to the right of the matrix.
If the resistive gain is decreased, cell populations will move to the left of the matrix.
■ During cycles, with fresh blood samples, adjust the resistive gain by means of R1 on the signal
processor board.
If the LMNE resistive gain has been modified, it is necessary to adjust RET resistive gain (R95)
to the opposit number of turns.
3.2.3. Matrix Optical gain adjustment
Check and adjust if necessary the optical preamplifier board to the corresponding value (9V
or 4V) depending on the type of LMNE bench filter (See RAS402A: Yearly maintenance
procedure).
■ The Optical gain is set by R11 on signal

processor board located on the top right,
R11
above the pneumatical door of the
instrument.
■ According to the gain adjustment of the optical distribution signal, populations of cells will move to the
top or to the bottom of the matrix:
If the Optical distribution gain is increased, cell populations will move upward on the matrix.
If the Optical distribution gain is decreased, cell populations will move downward on the matrix.
Technical Manual
LMNE adjustments
Beware of this voltage value as it depends on your instrument serial number (See RAS402A:
Yearly maintenance procedure). Previous instruments that have not been modified on the
optical bench (replacement of the gun filter) must be adjusted to the old value (8,8V +/-0,1V).
Refer to this SIL to verify this number.
Too High
Optical Distribution Axis
Correct
Too Low
■ During cycles, with fresh blood samples, slightly adjust R11 and wait for several new results to readjust
if necessary (R11 is reachable by the small aperture in the board cover).
R11 turned clockwise moves populations upward.
R11 turned anticlockwise moves populations downward.
■ It can be necessary to readjust the resistive gain after having modify the optical gain.
Technical Manual
LMNE adjustments
4. Flowcell transfer time check and adjustment
4.1. Flowcell transfer time check
■ Transfer time is the time needed for a blood cell to go from the resistive aperture to the optical
measurement location (from the resistive count to the optical measurement). Each cell has to achieve
the 2 measurements within 200µs, the low threshold is set to 100µs, the upper threshold is set to
300µs.
■ This adjustment must be done in DIF mode, on a clean and perfectly adjusted instrument.
■ From menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Options» select «Transfer Mode» option. The transfer time
will be displayed and printed.
■ Run several fresh whole bloods.
1- Number of cells counted on resistive mode (1/2 of the total WBC number approximately).
2- The correlation percentage (The number of cells validated on the optical mode compare to the
number of cells validated on resistive mode).
3- Transfer time check.
The first bar of the graph must be located on the BA1 threshold.
■ If the graph is located too much on the right side, the transfer time is too long.
It means that the length between the 2 measurements (Resistive and optical) is too important: Transfer
time must be shortened (see see "4.2. Transfer time adjustment").
■ If the graph is located too much on the left side, the transfer time is too short:
It means that the length between the 2 measuring points (Resistive and optical) is too short: Transfer
time has to be increased ( see "4.2. Transfer time adjustment").
Result interpretation
■ For a perfectly adjusted instrument, the correlation has to be above 90% on fresh blood samples.
Transfer time must show a distribution curve where the first line (left) coincides precisely with the BA1
threshold (+/- 1 line) and the total width of the distribution curve does not exceed BA2 threshold.
■ If the transfer time has to be readjusted follow this procedure.
Technical Manual
LMNE adjustments
4.2. Transfer time adjustment
Transfer time adjustment kit XEA432AS:
Reference Designation Qty

KAD004A Screw HC M5x8 2
KAM034A Brass spacers 4,3x8 L=5mm 2
KAN020A Spacers M/F L=35 M4x10 2
GBD642A LMNE Flowcell adjustment tool 1
RAH456B Technical note 1
XBA271A Extension coaxial Lg=600mm 1
■ Switch the instrument off.
■ Disconnect the LMNE coaxial cable from

the bushing located next to the adjustment
knobs
■ Unscrew the terminal of the grounding wire

located next to the optical preamplifier
board cover.
■ Disconnect the supply connector of the
optical preamplifier board.
■ Preparethe 2 column assemblies using the

2 crosspieces male/femelle 35mm length
equipped with the crosspieces 5mm length.
■ Remove the 3 bench fixation screws,

collect the 3 nylon spacers.
Technical Manual
LMNE adjustments
■ Screw the 2 columns already equipped on

the 2 holes M4 of the pneumatic door.
■ Installthe adjustment tool as shown while

holding the bench horizontally.
■ Install the bench into its location, make sure
that the tool stay in place. Use the 2 screws
CHC M4x20 (included in the tool kit).
■ These 2 screws will not be completely
screwed in order to prevent any damage on
the tubes located below the flowcell.
■ Detach the valve assy of the optical bench

unscrewing slightly the 2 CHC M3x8 screws
■ Tighten the 2 STHC screws of the tool to fix

it on the bench support. Push it to the top
while tightening the screws.
■ Connect the «T» coaxial connector to the

bushing of the pneumatical door using the
coaxial extension wire, if the instrument is
equipped with it.
■ Re-install the valve assy.
■ Screw the 2 M3x14 screws until they come
into contact with the carriage.
Technical Manual
LMNE adjustments
■ Slightly
unscrew the 4 carriage fixation
screws at the back of the bench in order to
allow the carriage to be moved on its
support but being still attached.

■ Run analyses and check the results.
■ If the transfer time has to be shortened, the flowcell has to be lifted up. Slightly screw the 2 screws
M3x14 of the tool while watching the light rectangle at the front of the optic bench. This rectangle has
to be always centered. It is necessary to play alternatively on both screws.
■ If the transfer time has to be increased, the flowcell has to be lowered. Slightly and equally unscrew
the 2 screws M3x14 from 1/2 turn. Unscrew the 4 carriage fixation screws at the rear of the bench in
order to allow the carriage to come into contact with the 2 screws of the tool. Gently tighten the
carriage fixation screws. Run analyses in order to check that the transfer time has been increased
enough to be «too long».
■ When the transfer time adjustment is correct, block the 4 carriage fixation screws.
■ From menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Options» deselect «Transfer Mode» option.
■ Remove the adjustment tool, follow the reverse procedure in order to:
Remove the coaxial cable extension (when used)
Unscrew the optical bench from the columns
Remove the adjustment tool and the 2 columns
Re-install the optical bench, with the spacers
Reconnect the coaxial cable as well as the ground cable.
Re-install the valve assy.
Technical Manual
LMNE adjustments
Technical Manual
RAS416B
Temperature adjustment
■ Concerns
■ This procedure allows the technician to adjust:

Instrument BASO chamber temperature
Instrument LMNE/RETIC/ERB chamber
temperature
■ Required tools
■ Thermometer
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Flatscrew driver
■ Voltmeter
■ None
■ 45 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request (When heating system has been

replaced)

■ None

the operations.
Before any temperature adjustment, make sure that the bubbling is correct.
Refer to the bubbling adjustment procedure RAS417A: Bubbling check & adjustment.
1. BASO Chamber temperature adjustment
1.1. Adjustment of the BASO voltage reference
To carry out correct procedure, the BASO heating coil must be at room temperature:
Instrument must be switched off for at least half an hour.

■ Open instrument cover and remove F5 fuse to prevent BASO heating coil heating.
■ Switch the instrument on and wait until the end of the initialization.
■ The temperature control board is located on

behind the pneumatical door on the lower
part.
■ Connect a voltmeter between TP4 and TP5

(Ground on TP5) of the temperature control
board.
■ Lean the sensor of the thermometer against
the heating coil (nearest to the temperature
sensor).
■ Note the temperature after thirty seconds of
stabilization.
■ According to the table below, note the voltage corresponding to this temperature.
■ Then adjust R68 to get this voltage on the voltmeter.
Technical Manual
Temperaure Voltage Temperature Voltage Temperature Voltage

33°C 3.062V 26°C 2.992V 20°C 2.932V
32°C 3.052V 25°C 2.982V 19°C 2.922V
31°C 3.042V 24°C 2.972V 18°C 2.912V
30°C 3.032V 23°C 2.962V 17°C 2.902V
29°C 3.022V 22°C 2.952V 16°C 2.892V
28°C 3.012V 21°C 2.942V 15°C 2.882V
27°C 3.002V
1.2. BASO chamber temperature adjustment
■ Switch the instrument off and re-install F5 fuse.

■ Remove the cap of the BASO chamber without disconnecting it.
■ Install thermometer sensor in the bottom of the chamber as centered as possible.
■ Re-install the cap making sure no leak is possible.
■ Switch the instrument on. Wait for the instrument to reach room temperature.
■ From menu «Machine\Alarms\Options» disable «Drain chambers BASO» alarm.
■ Run several racks filled with blood sample tubes.
BASO Chamber Temperature
Temperature
Measurement
■ During the cycle, the temperature in the 1s

BASO chamber is changing according to
this diagram. In each cycle, the mixure ABX
Basolyse/blood is dispensed in the
chamber.
■ When valve <17> ends its commutation
(bubbling stops) record displayed
Diluted Blood Input
temperature on the thermometer.

■ Adjust R69 in order to get 47.5°C +/-0,5°C
by the tenth cycle.
Counting
Bubbling
Rinsing
Drain
Time
Heating coil thermic inertia is very important. Wait at least until 3 cycles have gone before
making any judgments as to the results of an adjustment.
Drops coming down after the liquids are not taken into account.
■ Revalidate the «Drain chambers BASO» alarm from menu «Machine\Alarms\Options», re-install
BASO chamber’s cap.
Technical Manual
2. LMNE/RETIC/ERB chamber temperature

adjustment
This is mandatory to switch off the instrument as short circuits can occur while moving the
distribution board.
2.1. Temperature check

■ Release the Distribution board holding plate
unscrewing the two screws.
■ Move the Distribution board leftward and
make sure there is no contact between
metallic parts and electronic components.
■ Use a clamp to disconnect the tubing from

the heating chamber top.
■ Then plunge the sensor of the thermometer

in the heating chamber through the top
connector.
Technical Manual
■ Switch on the instrument.

■ Control the temperature after 20min. This one should be 37°C+/-0,2°C, otherwise proceed as follows.
■ Open the pneumatical door and dismantle the temperature board cover protection.
2.2. Heating power voltage
■ Connect a voltmeter between TP1 and TP2.

■ Verify that the Power voltage is +0,5V +/-0V. Adjust with R44.
■ If the power voltage has been re-adjusted, close the pneumatical door and wait for 1/4 hour and verify
the temperature again. See «Temperature check».
■ If the temperature is not within acceptable limits, adjust Reference Voltage: See «Reference Voltage».
2.3. Reference Voltage
■ Adjust the temperature to 37°C +/-0,2°C (See «Temperature verification») by means of the R51
potentiometer on the temperature board. Turn clockwise to increase temperature.
■ Close the door. Leave the temperature stabilize during 1/4 hour.
If the temperature is too high, turn gently R51 anticlockwise and run ERB cycles in order to
decrease the temperature faster.
Technical Manual
Technical Manual
RAS417A
Bubbling check & adjustment
■ Concerns

to adjust chamber’s bubblings and LMNE bubbling.
■ Required tools
■ Flat screwdriver
■ None
■ 15 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
1. LMNE Bubbling
LMNE chamber bubbling is factory adjusted to 3ml/mn with a flowmeter. A correct

adjustment can be performed visually.
■ Start the compressor from menu

1.5b
■ Drain the LMNE chamber by pressing valve 2.8b
<41>. Pressure LMNE
■ Disconnect the tube from valve <20> input
<2>, and connect a tube (length=15cm, 0.1b
Diam.=1.52) to this input. Compressor
■ Plunge the other end of the tube inside an P LMNE
empty sample tube filled with distilled water.
■ Push on the valve <20> and start the 20
stopwatch at the same time. Count 30 to 40 3ml/mm
bubbles during 20 seconds.
■ If necessary readjust the flowrate using a

flat screwdriver with the adjustable
restrictor of the LMNE chamber located on
the front panel.
■ When the value is correct, reconnect the
bubbling tube on the valve <20>.
Technical Manual
2. Chamber’s Bubbling
■ The following bubbling adjustments are done by a piece of tubing as shown below:
2.1. RBC/PLT Chamber
■ RBC/PLT chamber bubbling is factory adjusted to 35ml/mn with a flowmeter. Adjustment is done with
a piece of tubing Diam.=0.25; Length=110mm.
1.5b
2.8b
Pressure
RBC
0.1b
Compressor
P 0.25x110mm
35ml/mm
6 38
This flowrate value is given as a factory adjustment. This bubbling flowrate is important for
the repetability performances on the RBC/PLT parameters. Replace this 0.25 tube in case of
poor repeatability on these parameters.
Technical Manual
2.2. WBC/HGB Chamber
■ WBC/HGB chamber bubbling is factory adjusted to 25ml/mn with a flowmeter. Adjustment is done
with a piece of tubing Diam.=0.25; Length=154mm.
1.5b
2.8b
Pressure
WBC
HGB
0.1b
Compressor
P 0.25x154mm
25ml/mm
13 39
the repetability performances on the WBC/HGB parameters. Replace this 0.25 tube in case
of poor repeatability on these parameters.
2.3. BASO Chamber
■ BASO chamber bubbling is factory adjusted to 12ml/mn with a flowmeter. Adjustment is done with a
piece tubing Diam.=0.25; Length=324mm.
1.5b
2.8b
Pressure
BASO
0.1b
Compressor
P 0.25x324mm
12ml/mm
17 40
the repetability performances on the BASO parameter. Replace this 0.25 tube in case of poor
repeatability on this parameter.
Technical Manual
RAS418A
BASO result adjustment
■ Concerns
■ This procedure allows the technician to adjust

LMNE flowcell position in order to get the best LMNE
BASO results.
■ Required tools
■ Insulated screw driver
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Voltmeter
■ None
■ 45 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
BASO result adjustment
1. Threshold (Signal processor board)
■ The signal processor board is located on

the cardcage.
■ Ground on J1, adjust the BASO threshold to

+850mV +/-8mV on the middle point of
R45.
2. BASO resistive gain adjustment
Gain too low
■ As the matrix resistive gain adjustment, this

BASO resistive gain is done on cycles with
Correct Adjustment
fresh blood samples. (BASO result from
■ Adjust it with R27 on the signal processor 0.5% to 0.8%)
board according to the examples
Nucleus Basophils
Gain too high
Technical Manual
RAS419A
WBC Balance adjustment
■ Concerns
■ This procedure allows the technician to determine

the WBC balance coefficients in order to have a
perfect operation of the WBC balance flags. The
concerned coefficients are: coefficient WBC/BASO
and WBC/LMNE.
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Fresh whole blood samples
■ 30 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None
■ Calculate for each result the LMNE coefficient:
CLMNE=WBCmean/LMNEmean
■ A population of 10 LMNE coefficients is
obtained (CLMNE).
■ Calculate the mean value (CLMNE:mean) of all
the CLMNE.
■ Calculate the coefficient of variation (CV) of the
CLMNE.
■ Results obtained should be: 1.3<CLMNE:mean
< 2.0 and CV < 10%

the operations.
WBC Balance adjustment
■ Open menu «User\WBC balance».

■ Enter for «1» for each coefficient
(«Calibration coefficient BASO/WBC» and
«Calibration coefficient LMNE/WBC»).
■ Fill a 10 tube rack with fresh whole blood samples and place it into the rack loader, and run Start rack.
■ For each result, record the MGB, BAS and

LMNE raw values (these values are
displayed but not printed).
■ Calculate the MGB, BAS and LMNE means and calculate new coefficients:
New «Calibration coefficient BASO/WBC»=MGB/BASO
New «Calibration coefficient LMNE/WBC»=MGB/LMNE
■ Enter the new coefficients in menu «User\WBC balance»: «Calibration coefficient BASO/WBC» and
«Calibration coefficient LMNE/WBC».
Technical Manual
RAS420A
RETIC Flowcell adjustment
■ Concerns
■ This procedure allows the technician to replace and

to adjust the RETIC Flowcell position of the laser
bench.
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys.
■ LED PMT visualization tool XDBA361AS
■ Flowcell visualization tool XDA556AS
■ Adjustment knob XDA555AS
■ Fluorescent Alignement Material (FAM) LAD005AS
■ Fresh whole blood sample tubes
■ 45 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ TubingID=0.76 L=350mm
■ Connector plastic value 1.5/1.5

the operations.
1. Preliminary
The instrument’s laser is a class 3B-Medium power laser type whose beams are, by
definition, a safety hazard. Avoid viewing the beam directly, or as reflected by a mirror or other
polished surface.
■ When the flowcell alignment is completed, it is necessary to check the resistive gain as
described in the procedure RAS421A: RETIC Resistive gain adjustment.
■ After any intervention on the Laser bench, it is necessary to perform the procedure
RAS422B: RETIC Results & Correlation final adjustment.
■ The laser optical bench alignment of the instrument includes the following points:
1- Alignment of the laser beam: Factory adjusted only.
2- Positioning of the beam shapper gun: Factory adjusted only.
3- Flowcell position adjustment and fluorescence alignment.
4- PMT alignment: Factory adjusted only.
5- RETIC gain adjustments (RAS421A: RETIC Resistive gain adjustment).
6- RETIC results and correlation final adjustments (RAS422B: RETIC Results & Correlation final
adjustment).
Field service engineers are not allowed to proceed to any adjustment in the laser optical
bench which is not described into the following procedure.
2. Adjustment
■ Switch the instrument and the laser supply

OFF and remove their power supply cable.
■ Unscrew the gun fixation screw (STHC
M4x6) of the alignement tool (XDA556AS).
■ Pull the gun outside at the maximum

position.
■ Place the alignement tool in place of the
laser protection cover and the 2 lower
fixation screws.
Technical Manual
Be very carefull not to touch the flowcell with the alignment tool.
■ Disconnect the PMT supply.
■ Using a 2.5 hexagonal screw, unscrew

partially the 2 screws of the PMT holder.
The PMT is a very light sensitive device. It is mandatory to avoid the PMT exposure to
sunlight or excessive ambient light to prevent irreparable damage.
■ Remove the PMT holder and pull out the

PMT from its location.
■ Install
the LED PMT visualization tool (XBA361AS) instead of the PMT, re-install the PMT holder, then
connect the connector on J3 to the PCB optical bench.
■ Check that the flowcell is filled correctly without bubble.
■ Re-connect the laser power supply cable and the instrument supply cable. Switch the laser supply on
and also the instrument. The laser light on after one minute.
Technical Manual
■ Place a vial of FAM (Fluorescent Alignment

Material) into the receptcle of the sampling
valve.
■ Connect a tubing (Diam.=0.76 L=350mm +
connector 1.5/1.5 + diam.=1.52 L=15mm)
to the input 2 of valve <75> and plunge it
into the FAM vial
■ Position the optical alignment tool and the gun, to see the red light in the center of a circle. When the
best position has been found, tight the 2 screws of the optical alignment tool.
■ Move the focus gun to see precisly the laser beam (blue) crossing the red light. You should see in the
laser beam very bright small particles.
■ Select «Latex mode» from menu

«Assistance\Adjustment\Options». Exit
the function using Esc key.
■ Run several manual cycles, and during this
time: When the 5DIFF syringe rises you
should see the FAM flow crossing trough
the laser beam.
■ Adjust the position of the flowcell (left\right)

using the knob in order to center the flow in
the middle of the red circle.
■ Then using the knob move the flowcell

(forward\backward) in order to get
maximum brightness (green) at the point
where the laser and the FAM flow are
crossed.
■ Switch laser power supply off.

■ Remove the LED PMT visualization tool and put back the PMT.
■ Remove the alignment optical tool and put back the protection cover. Re-connect the input 2 of valve
<75>.
■ Follow the next procedure to adjust the flowcell with retex RAS421A: RETIC Resistive gain adjustment.
Technical Manual
RAS421A
RETIC Resistive gain adjustment
■ Concerns

to adjust the resistive gain of the laser optical bench,
if the flowcell alignment procedure has been carried
out previously (RAS420A RETIC Flowcell
adjustment).
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys.
■ Fluorescentand non-fluorescent latex with the reference
curves (RETEX) LAD004AS
■ 45 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request


the operations.
Before any adjustment, make sure that PMTvoltage value is 400, and F1 position value is 3.00
1. Installation of the RETEX vial
polished surface.
■ Switch the instrument and laser supplies off and remove their power cables.
■ Unscrew the fixation cover and lift up the instrument cover.
■ Place a vial of RETEX into the receptacle of

the sampling valve after having shaked it
thoroughly.
■ Connect a tygon tube (Diam.=0.76,
L=350mm) to a Plastic Value connector (1.5/
1.5) and a tygon tube (Diam.=1.52,
L=15mm) to the other end of the connector.
■ Connect this piece of tube to the input 2 of
the valve <75>.
■ Plunge the other end of the tube assy into
the RETEX vial.
The RETEX vial has to be mixed for 3 minutes thoroughly before each RETEX cycle. Mixing
failure will give incorrect results for the adjustments and will deteriorate the remaining RETEX
quantity into the vial.
■ Close the instrument cover, reconnect the power supply cables. Switch the laser supply and the
instrument on.
Technical Manual
2. Resistive gain adjustment

■ From menu «User\Type parametering\Thresholds», change the value 082 for R3 threshold to 100.
■ Select «RET» manual mode through the <TouchePlastron>worklist menu, then F4.
■ Select «Latex Mode» from menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Options».
■ Run a manual cycle after having mixed the RETEX vial.
■ Close the instrument cover.
■ Check on the CIS histogramme that the resistive population corresponds with the 100 threshold:
In case of problems (Poor matrix image, population wrongly positionned on the matrix) check
that there is no air bubble into the tube of the flowcell output.
R95
■ If
necessary, re-adjust R95 on the optical
preamplifier board (Clockwise increase the
gain, the population moves to the right).
■ Return to menu «User\Type parametering\Thresholds», change the value 100 for R3 threshold to
082 original value.
■ Open the instrument cover, disconnect the tubing assy from the valve <75>, reconnect the input 2 of
the valve, remove the RETEX vial from the sampling valve receptacle.
■ Run several «Rinse» cycles from menu «Other cycles».
Technical Manual
Technical Manual
RAS422B
RETIC Results & Correlation final adjustment
■ Concerns

to adjust the resistive gain of the laser optical bench.
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys.
■ Fluorescentand non-fluorescent latex with the reference
■ 45 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request


the operations.
1. Preliminary
polished surface.
This procedure can be performed only when procedures RAS420A: RETIC Flowcell
adjustment and RAS421A: RETIC Resistive gain adjustment have been carried out.
■ Reticulocyte parameters measured by the laser bench of the instrument are the percentage of
reticulocytes (RET%) and the mean fluorescence index (MFI).
■ The PIC is an index which allows to visualize the position of the curve for the non fluorescent
population.
■ The instrument software has an acceptation range for the PIC from 15 to 30 (default value). The PIC
value of the blood sample may change according to the membrane state, freshly drawn up normal
samples show normaly a PIC value between 19 to 24, erythrocytes having damaged membranes
(fixation,...) may reach higher PIC values. Erythrocytes contained into the control bloods normaly give
PIC values included in between 24 to 29.
■ This procedure allows a complete check of the RETIC results, the different steps are as follow:
1- Fine adjustment of the RETIC flowcell position using RETEX giving the best separation between the
fluorescent and non fluorescent populations and the best correlation percentage.
2- Adjustment of the PMT voltage.
3- F1 threshold adjustment.
2. Installation of the RETEX vial
■ Connect a tygon tube (Diam.=0.76,

L=350mm) to a Plastic Value connector (1.5/
1.5) and a tygon tube (Diam.=1.52,
L=15mm) to the other end of the connector.
■ Connect this tube to the input 2 of the valve
<75>.
■ Plunge the other end of the tube assy into
the RETEX vial.
■ Place a vial of RETEX into the receptacle of
the sampling valve after having shaked it
thoroughly at least for 3 minutes
The RETEX vial has to be mixed for 3 minutes thoroughly before each RETEX cycle. Mixing
failure will give incorrect results for the adjustments and will deteriorate the remaining RETEX
quantity into the vial.
Technical Manual
3. Fine adjustment of the flowcell position
■ Select«RET» manual mode through the

Worklist menu and F4 key.
■ Block in closed position the Cover switch.
■ Mixthe Retex vial for at least 3 minutes,
then run a manual cycle.
■ Using the adjustment knob, few degrees

clockwise or anti-clockwise should be
requested, in order to get:
- A correlation above 90%
- The best separation between the non-
fluorescent and the fluorescent populations.
■ Thisone must be calculated using the
below formula:
RETL x 100 / RBC < 3%
■ Example: (RETL) 67 x 100 / (RBC) 5203 =

1.29 which is <3%
During the adjustment, you have to readjust the PMT voltage to keep the «Pic» between 18
and 23.
■ At the end of the adjustment remove the tubing and the Retex vial. Release the Cover switch.
Technical Manual
4. RETIC adjustment with control blood

■ To adjust RETIC with control bloods, proceed as described in the following order:
PIC MFI% Another

RETIC See control RET%
Control Control RETIC
Control blood target
Level 1 Level 3 Control
value
Menu/Machine/laser Menu/Machine/laser Menu/Machine/laser Copy of F1

300<PMTVolt.<600 2.00<F1<4.00 300<PMTVolt.<600
position
Adjust by step of 10 Adjust by step of 0.1 Adjust by step of 1
to all types
(Displayed not printed) (Displayed not printed)
4.1. F1 threshold adjustment
■ Run a RETIC blood control level 1.

■ The F1 position adjustment can be done only if the PIC value has been previously adjusted.
■ Open «Menu\Machine\Laser».
■ When the RET% value is outside limits given on RETIC control sheet form, increase the F1 position
value by step of 0.1 to decrease the RET% value (or decrease the F1 value to increase the RET%) and
rerun the RETIC control until the RET% value is within acceptable limit.
■ Make sure the F1 position value is as follows: 2.00<F1<4.00.
■ Once the RET% value is within acceptable limits, perform fine adjustment of PMT voltage.
4.2. Adjustment of the PMT high voltage
■ Run a RETIC blood control level 3.

■ This PMT voltage adjustment can be done only if the F1 position has been previously adjusted.
■ Open «Menu\Machine\Laser».
■ When the MFI% value is outside limits given on RETIC control sheet form, increase the PMT voltage
value by step of 1 to increase the MFI% value (or decrease the PMT voltage to decrease the MFI%)
and rerun the RETIC control until the MFI% value is within acceptable limit.
■ Make sure the PMT voltage value is as follows: 300<PMT voltage<600.
■ Once the MFI% value is within acceptable limits, check the results with another level of RETIC control.
4.3. Operation check
■ Run the 3 levels of blood control and check that the parameters RET% and MFI% are within their target
value range.
Technical Manual
RAS423A
PMT Replacement & adjustment
■ Concerns
■ This procedure allows the technician to replace and

to adjust the PMT.
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys.
■ None
■ 45 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ PMT Assy XBA350AS

the operations.
1. PMT Replacement
■ The instrument’s laser is a class 3B-Medium power laser type whose beams are, by
definition, a safety hazard. Avoid viewing the beam directly, or as reflected by a mirror or
other polished surface.
■ This procedure must be followed by the PMT adjustment described in procedure RAS422B:
RETIC Results & Correlation final adjustment.
■ Field service enginneers are not allowed to proceed to any adjustment in the laser optical
bench which is not described into a procedure of the technical manual.
■ The PMT is a very light sensitive device. It is mandatory to avoid the PMT exposure to
sunlight or excessive ambient light to prevent irreparable damage.
■ Check that the instrument and the laser supply are off and disconnect their power supply cables.
■ Unscrew the 3 instrument cover screws and lift up the cover.
■ Unscrew the 7 fixation screws (CHC M4x6) of the laser bench protection cover.
■ Disconnect the PMT supply J3 and the

coaxial J6.
■ Using a 2.5 hexagonal key, unscrew

partially the 2 screws of the PMT holder.
■ Remove the PMT holder and pull out the

PMT from its location.
■ Install the new PMT assy in the reverse order.

■ Close the optical bench cover and the instrument cover. Reconnect the power supply cables and
switch on the laser supply, then the instrument.
Technical Manual
2. PMT value adjustment

■ Perform PMT value adjustment described in procedure RAS422B: RETIC Results & Correlation final
adjustment.
Technical Manual
Technical Manual
RAS424B
ERB adjustment
■ Concerns
■ Software specific settings

■ ERB latex adjustments
■ ERB adjustments on blood control
■ Required tools
■ None.
■ ERBlatex vial LAD008AS
■ Erytrol
blood control:
■ 2072204: Twin pack control 1 + control 2
■ 2072203: Twin pack 2x control 3
■ 30 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ Piece of tubing Diam.=1.52, L=20mm.

the operations.
ERB adjustment
1. Information
■A set of modification has been implemented on Pentra DX 120 in order to improve the definition of the
ERB measurement (see technical note RAN458).
■ The modified instruments can be visually identified by:
- a red sticker placed on the sticker holding the serial number.
- the HAU122A sticker located on the same plate.
HAU122A
or
The following procedure remains valid for modified and non modified instrument, exept two points:
■ 3.1.ERB Diffraction adjustment
- For non modified instruments, NR2=43
- For modified instruments, NR2=45
■ 3.2.ERB PMT and focus adjustments.
- For non modified instruments, NR2=43
- For modified instruments, NR2=45
2. Preliminary
This procedure should be done on a perfectly aligned Retic flowcell (see RAS420A: RETIC
Flowcell adjustment) and the RETIC resistive gain adjustment should have been carried out
previously (see RAS421A: RETIC Resistive gain adjustment).
1- Remove Erytrol vials from the fridge and allow to warm at ambient room temperature (18° to 29.5°C)
for 15 minutes before mixing.
2- Mix the ERB Latex vial with a Vortex for 3 minutes.
Technical Manual
ERB adjustment
3. ERB Adjustment
3.1. ERB Diffraction adjustment
definition, a safety hazard. Avoid viewing the beam directly, or as reflected by a mirror or
other polished surface.
■ Switch the instrument off and Laser supply, disconnect power supply cables.
■ Remove the Laser key and keep it with you.
J7
R97
■ Disconnect J7 flat cable and plug it in J8:

R64
J8
■ Switch the instrument and laser on.

■ Setup instrument to ERB manual cycle (Worklist+F4).
■ Disconnect blood detection cell from menu «Machine\Alarms\Options\Machine alarms».
■ Select the «Standard» type from menu «User\Type data capture\selection\Type».
■ Open menu «User\Type parametering\Thresholds», press the «Print» key to print the values setup
on the instrument.
■ Adjust
and valid the thresholds to the following values:
NR2=43 for NON modified instruments or 45 for modified instruments
NF1=164
NF2=170
Technical Manual
ERB adjustment
■ Connect with a Tygon tube 1.02x20mm/

EAB014A connector/Tygon tube
0.76x300mm to valve <75> inlet 2, and
plunge the other end into the latex vial.
■ Press simultaneously valves <75> and

<76> for a split second to prime ERB latex.
■ Diffraction (R64): Diffraction gain moves the matrix population vertically (Turn R64
clockwise to move down the matrix).
■ Resistive gain (R97): Moves the matrix population horizontally.
NR2
R64
■ Run a manual ERB analysis cycle, adjust
the ERB matrix in order to move it down
against the NF1 threshold by the mean of
R64. Meanwhile adjust R97 potentiometer
to have matrix population across the NR2
threshold. NF1
R97
■ Once adjustment is correct: Switch the instrument and Laser supply off, disconnect power supply
cables.
■ Disconnect J8 flat cable and reconnect it in J7 laser bench board.
Technical Manual
ERB adjustment
3.2. ERB PMT and focus adjustments
■ Make sure laser bench board connector is correctly connected.

■ From menu «Assistance\Adjustment\Options», select the «Raw counts» mode to display
correlation %.
■ Select the «Standard» type from menu «User\Type data capture/selection\Type».
■ Open menu «User\Type parametering\Thresholds», adjust and valid the thresholds to the following
values:
NR2=43 for NON modified instruments or 45 for modified instruments
NF1=80
NF2=170
NR2
■ Run a manual ERB analysis cycle, adjust
the ERB matrix in order to have the matrix
across the NF1 and the NR2 thresholds by NF1
PMT
adjusting PMT voltage value (When PMT

PMT & Focus
voltage is decreased: Matrix population is

gathered and moved down). If necessary
slightly adjust the focus to improve the
correlation %.
■ PMT voltage: Concentrates and moves the matrix population vertically.

■ Focus: Improve correlation % (Concentrate the matrix population).
■ Once adjustment is correct open «Menu\Type parametering\Thresholds» and adjust and valid the
thresholds to the previously printed values (factory values: NR2=61 NF1=25 NF2=105).
■ Disconnect Latex vial and reconnect tube to valve <75> inlet 2.
■ From menu «Machine\Alarms\Options\Machine alarms» select the blood detection cell alarm
option.
■ Run 2 blank cycle in roder to clean tubing from Latex.
Technical Manual
ERB adjustment
3.3. ERB Final adjustments
Check that the NR2 threshold has been changed according to the procedure «Initialisation
of a new ERYTROL LOT control» from the user manual.
■ Run an analysis cycle on ERYTROL control

2.
■ Compare the obtained result (ERB%) with
the target value given on the control sheet
(Supplied with the control pack).
■ If necessary gently increase/decrease the
ERB resistive gain by means of R97
potentiometer in order to approach the
target value.
■ Run two consecutive analyses with each blood control level. Results should remain within acceptable
limits given on control sheets.
■ From menu «Assistance\Adjustment\Options», deselect the «Raw counts» mode.
Technical Manual
RAS425A
Instrument decontamination
■ Concerns
■ This procedure allows the technician to rinse the

instrument before specific maintenance operation:
Cleaning suspected assemblies before maintenace
operations. Instrument rinse for an extended
shutdown.
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Clamps
■ Scalpel
■ Flat screw driver
■ Torx keys.
■ Fungicidal, bactericidal, virus killing detergent spray,
non corrosive for metals, non plastic altering.
■ Bleach solution 12°Cl
■ Deionize water
■ Absorbant paper
■ Distlled water
■2 h 15 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
1. Preliminary (20min.)
NEVER use BLEACH into the ABX Fluocyte circuit (flowcell, tubing, pump, valve, etc...).

■ Run a «Startup» cycle, then a Cleaning cycle by means of the «Other cycles» key.
■ Switch off the instrument and remove the supplying cable.
■ Open the instrument cover.
■ Spray the bactericidal cleaner on all assemblies that may provide biologic risks and wait for 10 minutes
(assemblies in contact with the operator such as instrument cover, racks, Shutter, keyboard, start key,
sampling needle neighboured assemblies...
2. Manual decontamination (25 min.)

■ Dilute the 12°cl bleach to 1 part of bleach for 4 of deionize water (1/5).
■ Instrument environment must be cleaned and decontaminated.
■ No sponge, nor cloth must be used. Only absorbant paper, thrown after use, in contamination bins,
can be employed. For small or weak assemblies use accurate drier papers.
■ All assemblies that is suspected to have contact with biologic product must be disinfected with the
diluted bleach (the stainless steel must bleached below 30°Celsius).
■ Blood stains or salt marks must be cleaned with spray detergent first.
■ Concerned assemblies:
- Outer surfaces of the instrument (perpex, covers, LCD, reagent tray, rack....)
- Keyboards
- Waste connector plug
- Liquid valve push
- Needle neighboured assemblies
- Manual cycle start key.
- Sampling valve outer surfaces
- Liquid overflow receptacles (remove the manual start key and move the piercing carriage towards the
rear of the instrument).
- Assemblies located on the front of the pneumatical door.
- Air filter located underneath instrument to be removed and sprayed before blown
- Outer barcode reader,
- Printer
■ Re-install all the assemblies and setup the instrument in its initial configuration.
Technical Manual
3. Analysis circuit decontamination (35 min)

■ Prepair 4 bottles and two receptacles containing a 6% bleach dilution:
- 2l for the ABX Diluent
- 50cl for the ABX Basolyse
- 20cl for ABX Cleaner, ABX Leucodiff, ABX Lyse
■ Switch on the instrument

■ From the «Machine\Alarms» menu, disable the reagents level control alarms, as well as chamber
drain control alarms.
■ From the «Machine\Automatic mode\Stopping conditions» menu, disable all the stopping
conditions.
■ From the «User\Re-run conditions» menu, validate the Incorrect sampling.
■ Replace the reagent bottles by the 6% bleach bottles (including ABX Basolyse and ABX Diluent).
■ Run a prime cycle for each reagent circuit pressing the «Other cycles» key.
■ Run a «Shut down» cycle. Leave the instrument in standby during ten minutes.
■ Run a «Startup» cycle.
■ Closed tube circuit
- Fill 5 sample tubes with 6% bleach dilution.
- Install them on a rack and load the rack.
- Press the Start rack key: two sample operations is carried out on each tube.
■ Open tube circuit

- Fill 1 sample tube with 6% bleach dilution.
- Run 10 manual analysis cycles on this dilution (if necessary fill the tube twice in order to have the ten
manual cycles).
Technical Manual
4. Drain and rinse (45 min)
The «DILUENT 1» circuit, specific to DIF and RET analyses, remains under ABX Diluent in
order to prevent the flowcells from optical quality drop down.
■ Remove the bottles containing the diluted bleach and the reagent straws from the ABX Basolyse and
ABX Diluent circuits (wrapp absorbant paper around them).
■ Prepair 4 bottles and two receptacles containing distilled water:

- 1l for the ABX Diluent
- 25cl for the ABX Basolyse
- 20cl for ABX Cleaner, ABX Leucodiff, ABX Lyse
■ Disconnect the «DILUENT 2» input connector.

■ Run a prime cycle for each reagent circuit pressing the «Other cycles» key (draining of the circuit).
■ Install the distilled water bottles on each reagent location (including ABX Basolyse and ABX Diluent).
■ Connect the «DILUENT 2» input connector back.
■ Disconnect the «DILUENT 1» input connector.
■ Run a prime cycle for each reagent circuit pressing the «Other cycles» key, then a «Rinse» cycle.
■ Load a rack in the rack loader.
■ From menu «Machine\Automatic mode\Security» disable the tube detection security.
■ From menu «User\Re-run conditions» disable «Incorrect sampling» option.
■ Press the «Cap piercing analysis» (rinse).
■ When the cycle is completed, remove the distilled water bottles and the ABX Basolyse reagent straw
(wrapp absorbant paper around it).
■ Re-install the ABX Diluent reagent straw into a ABX Diluent container. Disconnect the «DILUENT 2»
input connector.
■ Connect the «DILUENT 1» input connector back.
■ Run a prime cycle for each reagent circuit pressing the «Other cycles» (distilled water drain + DIF and
RET circuits diluent prime).
■ Setup the instrument in its initial software configuration.
■ Switch off the instrument.
■ Move the piercing carriage inside the instrument in order to protect the manual sampling needle.
In case the instrument must be parked, connect the «DILUENT 1» input and «WASTE» output
together by means of LUER connector equipped tube in order to prevent from leaks.
Technical Manual
RAS426A
Vacuum/Pressure tank maintenance
■ Concerns
■ This procedure allows the technician to drain the

Vacuum\Pressure tank.
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ None
■ 15 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
Vacuum/Pressure tank maintenance
■ Switch off the instrument and disconnect

the power supply cable.
■ Using hexagonal keys, open the instrument
rear cover
■ Remove the rubber band to free the tanks.

■ Shake them to check that there is no water
inside.
■ If necessary unscrew one of the tank tube

to remove the water.
■ Put back the instrument rear cover and
reconnect the power supply cable.
Technical Manual
RAS427A
External barcode reader setup
■ Concerns
■ This procedure allows the technician to setup and

check the Datalogic barcode readers.
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ None
■ 15 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
1. Installation
■ Connect the barcode reader to the instrument (see procedure RAS400B: Installation).
■ Perform the barcode reading test (2. Barcode reader reading test).
■ If necessary setup the reader.
2. Barcode reader reading test

■ Check the correct setup of the barcode by reading the following barcode reading test.
Interleaved 2 of 5
■ With C/D on label/Barcode checksum: Yes
1224488
Displayed 12244881 without checksum control.
■ Without C/D on label/Barcode checksum: No
121314151617
CODE 39
■ With C/D on label/Barcode checksum: Yes
12345ABCDE
Displayed 12345ABCDEW without checksum control
■ Without C/D on label/Barcode checksum: No
Technical Manual
CODE 128
■ Barcode checksum: No
CODABAR
■ Barcode checksum: No
37859
123456/$
Technical Manual
3. Barcode reader setup
3.1. Panasonic Barcode reader
Configuration table:
■ Read Barcode labels from the top to end:
Within 15 seconds after switch on:
(5 beeps)
Setup: Default setting
Parity : even
1 bit stop
Code identifier : no
Codabar : yes
No start/stop code
No STF
No C93
Exit
(5 beeps)
Technical Manual
3.2. Datalogic DLC6165-M1/Touch 65 Pro Barcode reader
$+$* Restore system default configuration
$+CP0$- RS232 interface
$+ Enter configuration environment
CA0CC1CE2 7 data bits, parity even, XON/XOFF
AZ0 Disable all family codes
AB11AB*0ll6 Code39, no C.D., 1 to 16

characters
AC110416 ITF, no C.D., 4 to 16 characters
AD111AD*0316 Codabar, no start/stop, 3 to 16

characters
AI11 Code128, C.D. control without
transmission
EA110DEC0 Terminator = CR, FIFO disabled
ED3 4 good reads before accepting code
$- Exit and save configuration
Technical Manual
3.3. Nitsuko Barcode reader
Configuration table
**DENSEI** MENU START
*A00*INITIALIZING
*A02*BARCODE SELECTION
*B004*CODE 39
Maximum Length
*1* *6* *Z*
*B031*UPC A Disable
*B033*UPC E Disable
*B061*EAN 13 DIGIT Disable
*B063*EAN 8 DIGIT Disable
*B101*CODABAR ST/SP not X'mit
*B093*CODABAR
Maximum Length
*1* *6* *Z*
*B122*ITF Minimum Length
*0* *4* *Z*
Technical Manual
*B123*ITF Maximum Length
*1* *6* *Z*
*B144*CODE 128
Check Digit Enable
*B161*CODE 93 Disable
*Z000*EXIT
*A03*TRANSMISSION
SELECTION (RS232C)
*C003*1 STOP bit
*C016*9600 Bauds
*C019* RTS/CTS Disable
*C111*Not X'mit Pre Amble
*C130*X'mit Post Amble
*0* *D* *Z*
*Z000*EXIT
*A05*SWITCH CONTROL
*E001*SW Portable
*Z000*EXIT
*A06*REDUNDANT
DATA CHECKING TIME
Technical Manual
*F004* 4 Times
*Z000*EXIT
*A99*MENU STOP
Technical Manual
3.4. Datalogic DLC6065-M0 Barcode reader (CBC002A)
CA0CC1CE2 7 data bits, parity even, XON/

XOFF handShaking
AB11AB*0ll6 Code39, no C.D., 1 to 16

characters
AC110416 ITF, no C.D., 4 to 16 char

characters

transmission
Technical Manual
3.5. Datalogic DLC6165-M0 Barcode reader (CBC006A)
configuration table:
CA0CC1CE2 7 data bits, parity even, XON/

XOFF handShaking
AB11AB*0ll6 Code39, no C.D. , 1 to 16

characters
AC110416 ITF, no C.D., 4 to 16 characters

characters

transmission
ED3 4 good reads before accepting code
AY5
BL1 Software focus level (High resolution code)
Technical Manual
RAS428B
LASER Optical bench replacement
■ Concerns
■ Thisprocedure allows the technician to replace the

Laser optical bench.
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■A clamp
■ Absorbant paper
■3 hours
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ Tool cable: XBA740AS
■ Laser bench XDA869BS

the operations.
polished surface.
1. Laser bench head test
1.1. Measurement tool
■ The measurement of the current in the laser

head allows to define, in the field and with
one measurement only, if the laser bench
should be changed or not. A tool cable
allows the measurement of the current in
the laser head.
■ The measurement of the consumed
intensity is carried out by measuring the
tension between pin 26 (current monitor +)
and pin 27 (current monitor -) of the
interface command connector. The scale is
0,1V/A (0.1V measured corresponds to 1A).
1.2. Procedure
■ Turn OFF the instrument and the laser

power supply.
■ Replace the command cable by the tool
cable (XBA740AS):
- Disconnect P3 from J3 on the
FLUOLOGIC board.
Technical Manual
- Disconnect P2 (remote interface

connector) from the laser power supply.
- Install the tool cable between J3 on the
FLUOLOGIC board and the laser power
supply.
■ Plug a voltmeter on the tool cable, between the red (+) and the black (-) banana connectors.
■ Turn ON the instrument and the laser power supply.
■ Enter: Menu/Assistance/Adjustments/Laser/Laser.
■ Check that the «Power read» is 20 mW +/-5%. If necessary, adjust the «Laser power» to obtain this
value.
■ Note down the value displayed on the voltmeter.
■ Multiply this value by 10 and use the following table to know the shelflife (theoretical) of the laser head.
■ Example:
- Value displayed on the voltmeter: 0,8V
- Measured current = 0,8 x 10 = 8A
While referring in the following table, for a consumed intensity of 8A, there remain approximately 43
months of operation.
Currently consumed Remaining theoretical Currently consumed Remaining theoretical

intensity months intensity months
5.5 63 8.3 23
6 61 8.4 16
6.5 59 8.5 11
7 55 8.6 8
7.5 51 8.7 5
7.8 47 8.8 2
8 43 8.9 0
8.1 41 9 H.S
8.2 35
■ Turn OFF the instrument and the laser power supply.

■ Remove the tool cable.
■ Position back the laser cable on the FLUOLOGIC board and on the laser power supply.
Technical Manual
2. Laser bench Replacement
2.1. Removing the old laser bench
■ Switch the instrument off and the laser supply.

■ Remove the power supply cables.
■ Remove the 3 cover fixation screws and lift up the cover.
■ Remove the 15 rear plate fixation screws,

11 screws CHC M4x6 and 4 CHC M4x8,
and remove the rear protection plate
located at the upper left part of the
instrument.
■ Remove the 2 fixation screws of the
grounding collars of the laser power cable
and the laser control cable.
■ Remove the 4 fixation screws (CHC M4x6)
of the holder plate and remove the holder
plate.
■ Unscrew the 7 laser protection cover

screws (CHC M4x6) and remove the cover.
■ Unscrew slightly the tube holder screws

(CHC M3x8) located below the flowcell and
remove the holder.
Technical Manual
■ Remove the screw (CHC M3x8) of the

grounding wires and the washer.
■ Disconnect the following tubes (place
absorbant paper when necessary):
- Shielded tube connected to the upper
anode.
- Tube of the external sleeving connected to
the «Y» connector.
- Tube connected to the injector (use a small
flat screwdriver).
- Tube connected to the input 1 of the valve
<77>
- Tube connected to the input 2 of the valve
<74>
■ Disconnect the coaxial plug connected to
the anode located next to the valve <73>
and remove the cable.
■ At this moment, make sure that the laser flowcell is no more connected to the valve assy
located below the laser bench.
■ The Laser bench on the illustrations beside is not fitted with the Laser beam shutter.
■ On the optical bench pc board:

- Disconnect the flat cable of the fluologic
pcb command (J5) and shutter.
- Disconnect the coaxial wire of the resistive
signal from the LMNE preamplifier pcb (J2).
- Disconnect the coaxial wire of the resistive
signal from the resistive-baso signal pcb
(J1).
- Disconnect the flat cable 10pts from the
signal processing pcb (J7).
■ Remove the fixation screw (CHC M4x6) and

the AZ washer from the grounding wire of
the fan support plate.
Technical Manual
■ Disconnect the molex connector 2pts of the

security switch on the fluologic pcb.
■ Remove the 4 screws of the fan support

plate.
■ Remove the fan and its support after having
disconnected the fan supply connector.
■ Push the piercer assy to the back of the

instrument in order to give access to the
front laser bench silent block. Remove the
silent block central screw (CHC M4x16) and
remove the grounding cable.
■ Open the pneumatical door to give access

to the silent block located next to the 1.5b
pressure manometer and remove the
central screw
■ Remove the central screws (CHC M4x16) of

the 2 silent blocks located at the rear of the
instrument.
■ Lift up slightly the laser bench and pull it out

to the rear of the instrument.
■ Beware of the cables connected to the laser
optical bench pcb.
Technical Manual
■ Reinstallthe ground wire of the liquid

sleeving under the flowcell.
■ Reinstall the flowcell tube holder.
■ Reinstall the bench protection cover.
2.2. Installing the new laser bench
■ Remove the new laser bench from the shipping box. Record the serial numbers of the laser and the
laser bench pcb.
■ Remove the fan of the new laser bench, and install it with the new connection instaed of the old fan.
Use the new laser bench shipping box to return the old bench to the HORIBA MEDICAL
representative service department.
■ Check that the laser protection aperture is

open.
■ Remove the vacuum/pressure tanks and

the cable going to the fluologic pcb.
Technical Manual
■ Hold the laser bench as shown on the

picture and introduce it into its location,
above the silent blocks.
■ Re-install the laser security switch wiring.
■ Reconnect the cable to the fluologic pcb

and re-install the vacuum/pressure tanks.
Beware not to clamp the tubes.
■ Open the pneumatical door and push the sampling carriage to the inside of the instrument.
■ Fix the laser bench using the screws (CHC M4x16) of the silent blocks, 2 in front, 2 at the rear of the
instrument. Note that some silent blocks do not receive any screw. Tighten the screws only when they
are all installed.
■ Reconnect the 2 grounding wires of the

instrument frame to the laser bench (1
below the bench and 1 at the rear top right).
■ Re-install the re-inforcement plate using the

4 screws CHC 4x6.
Technical Manual
■ Re-installthe laser supply cable holding

plate to the re-inforcement plate.
■ Connect the fan supply cable and the
security switch cable to the fluologic pcb.
■ Reinstall
the fan support plate using the 4
screws CHC 4x6.
■ Re-install the air deflector.
■ Connect the laser grounding cable on the

fan frame.
■ Open the laser protection cover and

reconnect the flowcell according to this
diagram.
■ Place absorbant paper below the flowcell to prevent any leakage of reagents.
■ Clamp the 2 tubes (1) and (2) of the loop. Disconnect and remove the fitting (3), cut the end of the 2
tubes.
■ Connect the tube (1) from the input 5 of the flowcell to the input 2 of the valve <74> (remove the
previous tube).
■ Connect the tube (2) from the input 7 of the flowcell to the input 1 of the valve <77> (remove the
previous tube).
■ Remove the clamps from the 2 tubes.
■ Disconnect the tube with the knot (4) below the «Y» connector and connect the ground fitting (5) to the
tube coming from the input 2 of the valve <73>.
■ Clamp the flowcell top output tube (6). Using a little flat screwdriver, disconnect the tube (7) from the
injector. Cut the end of the tube coming from the valves <76> and <78> and connect it to the injector.
Technical Manual
■ Remove the silicon tube (7) from the fitting (8) of the flowcell top tube (6). Beware not to touch the
optical windows of the flowcell.
■ Connect the flowcell top tube (6) and the ground fitting (8) to the tube going to the input 2 of the valve
<72>.
■ Connect the shielding wire (9) and the 2 others on the grounding screw.
■ Re-install the tube holder plate. Check that no tube or electrical wire can move into the optical
pathway.
■ Re-install the laser bench protection cover using the 7 screws.
■ Re-installthe instrument rear plate using the 15 rear plate fixation screws, 11 screws CHC M4x6 and
4 CHC M4x8 at the bottom of the plate.
■ Reconnect the power supply cables.
■ Follow the following procedures in order to check and adjust the laser bench:
Technical Manual
RAS429A
LMNE Flowcell replacement
■ Concerns
■ This
procedure allows the technician to replace the
LMNE Flowcell of the LMNE Optical bench.
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Little screw driver
■ Absorbant paper
■ 45 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ LMNE Flowcell XDA398GS

the operations.
polished surface.

■ Below the LMNE flowcell, disconnect the
tube of the external sheath at the level of the
«Y» distributor.
■ Disconnect the grounding connector of the

shield springs (Diag.2).
■ Place some absorbant paper below the
«Y».
■ At the top of the flowcell, disconnect the

tube at the level of the anode fitting using a
little flat screwdriver. The flowcell drains on
the paper, wait few seconds.
■ Remove the 2 screws CHC M4x12 below

the flowcell (Diag.4).
■ Disconnect successively:
Technical Manual
- The sample input tube on the injector

- The trident contact of the injector ground
- The internal sheath input tube
- The internal sheath aspiration tube
The tubes connected to the nipples of the flowcell have to be gently disconnected using a
little flat screwdriver in order to prevent any damage on these nipples.
■ Remove the flowcell.

■ Place the new flowcell on a piece of paper.
■ Gentlyremove the 2 tubes of the internal
sheath (A).
■ Remove the stopper placed on the «Y»
distributor of the sheath (B).
■ Remove the injector silicon tube (C).
■ Remove the straight connector 1.5/1.5 of
the tube (Diam.=1.52) going to the top
nipple of the flowcell (D).
■ Connect the flowcell to the 2 internal sheath
tubes, input and aspiration, of the
instrument.
■ Install the flowcell into its location and block the screw using the 2 screws CHC M4x12 at the bottom
of the flowcell.
■ Connect the «Y» distributor of the external sheath.
■ Connect the trident contact of the shield springs of the external sheath.
■ Connect the tube (1.52) coming from the

top nipple of the flowcell to the anode
fitting.
■ Re-install the sleeving.

■ Connect the trident contact of the injector grounding.
■ Start the instrument and run several ABX Diluent priming cycles and check for leaks.
Unscrew slightly the 2 fixation screws CHC M4x12 in order to place the light rectangle into
the best centered position (left/right) on the frosted glass window. Block the fixation screws
while holding the flowcell in its position.
■ Check that no air bubbles can be seen into the flowcell optical pathway.
■ Perform RAS415B: LMNE adjustments and RAS418A: BASO result adjustment.
Technical Manual
Technical Manual
RAS430A
LASER Optical bench board replacement
■ Concerns
■ his procedure allows the technician to replace and

to adjust the Optical bench board.
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Fluorescent and non florescent latex with the reference
■ 45 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ LMNE Optical bench board XAA380BS

the operations.
polished surface.
1. Laser bench board dismantling

■ Switch the instrument off and Laser supplies and disconnect power supply cables.
■ Remove the LASER key and keep it with you.
■ Unscrew the fixation screws of the instrument cover and lift it up.
■ Disconnect following connections:
- J3 PMT supply connector
- J6 Fluo signal coaxial wire coming from the PMT
- J5 Fluologic pcb flat cable
- J4 Security switch connector (laser bench cover)
- J9 Resistive signal coaxial wire
- J2 LMNE channel resistive signal coaxial wire
- J1 LMNE/RETIC resistive signal going to the RES/BASO board (XAA262)
- J7 OFL/FSL pcb flat cable going to the pulse processing board n°2 (XAA254)
- J10 Diffraction photodiode signal connector
J2 J1 J7 J9 J4 J5 J6 J3
B
A
J10
A
B
Diag.1
■ Unscrew the 2 rear board screws (B).
■ Unscrew the 2 front board screws (A) of the pcb support plate using a bent key.
■ Remove the pcb/support assy.
Technical Manual
2. Laser bench board installation

■ Put the board in position and screw the 4 fixation screws.
■ Plug back the 9 different connectors:
- J3 PMT supply connector
- J6 Fluo signal coaxial wire coming from the PMT
- J5 Fluologic pcb flat cable
- J4 Security switch connector (laser bench cover)
- J9 Resistive signal coaxial wire
- J2 LMNE channel resistive signal coaxial wire
- J1 LMNE/RETIC resistive signal going to the RES/BASO board (XAA262)
- J7 OFL/FSL pcb flat cable going to the pulse processing board n°2 (XAA254)
- J10 Diffraction photodiode signal connector
3. Laser bench board adjustments
3.1. Resistive gain adjustment
■ Perform procedure RAS421A: RETIC Resistive gain adjustment
3.2. Diffraction gain adjustment
■ Switch the instrument off and Laser supply, disconnect power supply cables.
J7
■ Disconnect J7 flat cable and plug it in J8.

R64
J8
Technical Manual
■ Do a RETEX cycle (as explained in

procedure).
■ Check that the points are well centered
apart the RET M area. If not turn R64 to
obtain the good location.
■ Do several cycles to have the correct
adjustment as shown.
■ On this diagram diffraction replaces
fluorescence that is normally shown.
■ Switch the instrument off and laser supply, and disconnect power supply cables.
■ Open the instrument cover, disconnect the tubing assy from the valve <75>, reconnect the input 2 of
the valve and remove the RETEX vial from the sampling valve receptacle.
■ Disconnect J8 flat cable and replug it in J7.
■ Restart the instrument.
3.3. ERB adjustment
■ Run a RAS424B: ERB adjustment procedure.
Technical Manual
RAS431A
Motor power board replacement
■ Concerns
■ Thisprocedure allows the technician to replace the

motor power board.
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Antistatic mat MZZ007A
■ None
■ 45 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ Motor power board XAA337

the operations.
■ Switch the Instrument off and the Laser power supply.

■ Open the Instrument cover: The motor power board is located at the back of the loading system.
■ Dismantle the laser fan support by

unscrewing the four fixation screws.
■ Tip up the fan assembly as shown:
■ Remove the terminals of the laser cover

detection switches from the bottom of the
fan support.
■ Unscrew the 7 laser protection cover
screws (CHC M4x6) and remove the cover.
■ Disconnect the fan ground wire and the fan
supplying wire.
■ Unscrew slightly the tube holder screws

(CHC M3x8) located below the flowcell and
remove the holder.
■ Remove the fan assembly.
■ Unscrew the thermic radiator of the board
(3 screws) from the right side of the
instrument as shown.
Technical Manual
■ Unscrew the fixation screw of the board

(from the inside of the board location.
■ Note the connector locations on the board.

■ Gentlypull the motor power board upward
disconnecting the wires and cables step by
step.
Beware not to damage the printed circuits of the board along the metal panels of the board
location.
■ Replace the board.

■ Reinstall the reverse order taking care of the connector location on the board.
■ Run an autocontrol cycle and check the correct operation of the instrument motors.
Technical Manual
Technical Manual
RAS432A
Membrane pump dismantling
■ Concerns
■ This procedure allows the technician to dismantle

the membrane pump.
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ Flat ruler
■ None
■ 15 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
Membrane pump dismantling
■ Remove the pre-amplifier boards (4

screws).
■ To remove one of the membrane pump,
unscrew both screws on the top of the
pump row, do not remove the screws.
■ Remove the straight bar to free the

membrane pumps.
■ Remove the pump.
■ Points on each side of the pump on the

front, shows the pump capacity:
2 points for 1.5ml pump,
4 points for 2.5ml pump.
■ To insert the straight bar more easily align

all the pumps with a flat ruler.
■ Tight the straight bar holding screws and check that all the tubes are connected to the pumps.
■ Re-install the pre-amplifier boards (4 screws).
■ Check that all the tubes are well connected before starting the instrument.
Technical Manual
RAS433B
RETIC Flowcell replacement
■ Concerns
■ This procedure explains how to replace the RETIC

Flowcell of the Laser bench.
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ None
■ 45 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ ERB/RETIC Flowcell XDA870AS

the operations.
polished surface.
1. Removing the old RETIC flowcell

■ Check that the instrument and the laser supply are off, and disconnect their power supply cables.
■ Unscrew the instrument cover screws and lift up the cover.
■ Unscrew the 7 fixation screws (CHC M4x6) of the laser bench protection cover.
■ Slightly unscrew the 2 screws (CHC M3x6)

of the tube holder and remove it (A).
■ Disconnect the following tubes:
- Valve <77>, input 1
- Valve <74>, input 2
- Common point of the «Y» of the external B
flowcell sleeving
- Injector tube
- Shielded tube connected to the ground
fitting (anode on the upper part of the
flowcell)
■ Unscrew the 2 support screws (CHC
M4x20) holding the flowcell on the carriage
(B).
A
■ Remove the old flowcell after having
removed the cathode wire (injector).
Depending on the instrument, a peelable spacer can be already installed under the flowcell
as shown below (C). It replaces the old one which was located under the carriage.
■ If you do not see the new spacer (C), it means that you have the previous version, located
under the carriage. Keep your configuration and follow this procedure.
■ If you see the new spacer (C), make sure it is placed correctly before installing the new
flowcell. A bad position could cause an erroneous transfer time.
Technical Manual
2. Installing the new RETIC flowcell

■ Remove the protection of the flowcell optical windows and install the new flowcell.
■ Connect the injection tube (middle position).
■ Follow the previous procedure backward to install the flowcell and connect the tubes.
When installing the new flowcell into its position, push on the flowcell holder while screwing
to keep it in a good position, as shown below.
■ Make sure that all tubes are properly installed and that they are not pinched nor clamped.
■ Reconnect the power supply cable of the instrument and switch it ON.
■ Runone ABX Diluent priming cycle in order to prime the flowcell and several RET manual cycles for a
complete priming.
■ Check that the flowcell is filled correctly without air bubbles, and make sure there is no leak.
■ Visualycheck that the flowcell is perfectly

centered regarding the PMT and the
reception gun (left to right / front to rear).
■ Run a RAS420A: RETIC Flowcell
adjustment.
Technical Manual
Technical Manual
RAS434A
Open/Close tube correlation
■ Concerns

to adjust the result correlation between Automatic
mode (Piercer) and Manual sampling mode.
■ Required tools
■ None
■ Fresh and normal whole blood samples.
■ 45 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ None

the operations.
Open/Close tube correlation
1. Preliminary
■ This correlation adjustment procedure is carried out on the following parameters: RBC, WBC, HGB,
PLT, HCT. The correlation is applied only in «Automatic mode», manual results are used as reference.
■ It is highly recommended to proceed to the correlation adjustment after any intervention on the
sampling valve.
■ Before starting Open\Close tube correlation adjustment, it is recommended to perform a cleaning
cycle and a test of repeatability.
■ Make sure that the printer is on and feed to get the results printouts.
2. Correlation check
■ Check coefficient set in the instrument (menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Human blood») before any
adjustment.
■ Run 5 tubes of whole blood samples without alarm on a DIF rack and run the analyses (Closed tube
mode).
■ Repeat the analyses in the manual mode (Open tube) and in the same order.
■ Calculate the mean for WBC, RBC, HGB, HCT and PLT parameters in each mode (OT and CT):
MeanParaOT= (ResultParaOT1+....+ResultParaOT5)/5
MeanParaCT=(ResultParaCT1+....+ResultParaCT5)/5
Difference=|MeanParaOT-MeanParaCT|
■ Difference must be less than:
Parameter Differrence
WBC 0.40
RBC 0.15
HGB 0.30
HCT 2.00
PLT 8.00
■ If not continue the procedure and adjust correlation.
3. Correlation adjustment
■ Install 10 tubes of whole blood samples without alarm on a DIF rack and run the analyses (Closed tube
mode).
■ From menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Human blood» record previous corrrelation coefficients.
■ Calculate for each parameter the new correlation coefficient without the worst result, using the
following formula:
New correlation coef.=((Mean value in manual mode)/(Mean value in piercer mode))x(Previous
coefficient)
■ From menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Human blood» enter the new correlation coefficient
calculated for each parameter.
■ Perform a Correlation check to check the new entered coefficients.
Technical Manual
RAS435B
Control blood Open/Close tube correlation
■ Concerns

to adjust the results correlation between Automatic
mode (Piercer) and Manual sampling mode for
calibrator and control bloods samples.
■ Required tools
■ None
■ Calibrator
■ Normal DIF Control blood
■ Normal RET Control blood
■ Normal ERB Control blood
■ 45 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ MINOCAL 2032002
■ DIFTROL(Normal) 2062203
■ MINOTROL RETIC (Normal) 2072201
■ ERYTROL (normal) 2072203

the operations.
This correlation adjustment procedure is carried out on the following parameters: RBC, WBC,
HGB, PLT, HCT, RET and ERB. The correlation is applied only in «Automatic mode», manual
results are used as reference.
It is highly recommended to proceed to the correlation adjustment after any intervention on
the sampling valve.
1. Preliminary
■ Before starting Control blood Open/Close tube correlation adjustment, it is recommended to perform
a cleaning cycle and a test of repeatability.
■ Make sure that the printer is on and feed to get the results printouts.
2. Correlation check
■ Check coefficient set in the instrument (menu Assistance\Adjustments\Control blood and
Assistance\Adjustments\Calibrator) before any adjustment.
■ Run 5 times the normal level of the MINOCAL, DIFTROL, MINOTROL RET, or ERYTROL blood, on a
DIF or RET Rack and run the analysis (Close tube mode, barre code label hidden).
■ Calculate the mean for WBC, RBC, HGB, HCT, PLT, RET and ERB parameters in each mode (OT and
CT):
MeanParaOT= (ResultParaOT1+....+ResultParaOT5)/5
MeanParaCT=(ResultParaCT1+....+ResultParaCT5)/5
Difference=|MeanParaOT-MeanParaCT|
■ Difference must be less than:
Parameter Difference
WBC 0.40
RBC 0.15
HGB 0.30
HCT 2.00
PLT 8.00
RET 0.30
ERB 0.50
■ If not continue the procedure and adjust correlation.
Technical Manual
3. Correlation adjustment
■ Enter menu «Quality control\Repetability\Close tube setup» choose 5 runs in the 1st position of
the rack.
■ Install a normal blood (DIF, RET or ERB) on the first position and run the analysis.
■ Run the same normal control blood (DIF, RET or ERB) 5 times in manual mode and calculate the mean
for each parameter ( WBC, RBC, HGB, HCT, PLT, RET and ERB).
■ From menu Assistance\Adjustments\Control blood and Assistance\Adjustments\Calibrator
record previous corrrelation coefficients.
■Calculate for each parameter the new correlation coefficient without the worst result, using the
following formula:
New correlation coef.= ((Mean value in manual mode)/(Mean value in piercer mode))x(Previous coefficient)
■ In menu «Assistance\Adjustments\Control blood and Assistance\Adjustments\Calibrator enter
the new correlation coefficient calculated for each parameter.
■ Perform a Correlation check to check the new entered coefficients.
Technical Manual
Technical Manual
RAS436A
Calibration
■ Concerns
■ This procedure allows the technician to calibrate

and check the correct calibration of the instrument.
■ Required tools
■ None
■ Normal DIF Control blood
■ 45 min.
■ Frequency
■ On request
■ At installation

■ Calibrator
■ Difftrol control blood

the operations.
Calibration
■ Calibration is an exceptional procedure that must be carried out only at instrument

installation or after maintenance intervention or when one or several control blood values
are out of limit.
■ The calibration should not be carried out to compensate a drift on a result due for example
to a clogging of the instrument.
■ Before starting the Calibration adjustment procedure it is necessary to be sure that the
instrument is in perfect condition for operations.
1. Preliminary
■ Before starting «Calibration» adjustment, perform an Autoconcentrated cleaning of the counting
chambers.
■ Perform 2 blank cycles to check the perfect cleanliness of the system («Other cycles\Blank
cycle\CBC»), check the results:
WBC < 0,2x103/mm3
RBC < 0,01x106/mm3
HGB = 0 g/dl
HCT < 0,7%
PLT < 5x103/mm3
■ Run 5 times the same human normal fresh blood, calculate the Coefficients of Variation (CV) and check
they are within acceptable CV limits.
■ Prepare the calibrator according to the specific instructions detailed in the notice.
2. Calibration
■ Enter «Menu\Calibration\Target values».
■ Select the calibrator to be used from the list (Create a new calibrator lot if necessary).
■ From «Analysis and calculations» run at least 6 times the calibrator (Unselect one of the result if
necessary).
■ Press F7 key and select «General calibration».
■ Enter a comment.
3. Calibration verfication
■ Enter the «Quality assurance\Quality control\Analysis and calculations» and run the 3 different
levels of Difftrol control blood.
■ Run analysis with normal fresh blood samples and check MCHC, MCV and MCH are within the
acceptable limits.
Technical Manual
RAS439A
Soft pneumatic
■ Concerns
■ This procedure allows to perform the whole

instrument soft pneumatic
■ Required tools
■ Hexagonal keys
■ 8 mm fork wrench
■ None
■ N/A
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ 1x FAA025A
■ 1x GAL074A
■ 1x FAA057A
■ 1x FAA058A
■ 1x FAA060A
■ 1x GBD689A
■ 3x FAA046A
■ 6x FAA049A
■ 3x XEA286AS

the operations.
Soft pneumatic
1. Manual sampling needle

1x FAA025A, 1x GAL074A
1
2
■ Disconnect the needle tubing (1) and

untight the needle screw (2).
■ Remove the needle by pulling it downward.

■ Open the rinsing block loosening the 2
screws (1). 1
■ Remove the teflon washer (2 - GAL074A)
inside the rinsing block, and replace it, and
also the O’ring (3 - FAA025A). 2
■ Re-assemble the rinsing block without
tightening the 2 screws (they must be
tightened only when the needle is inside the
3
O’ring).
■ Install a new needle at around 5mm. from
the top of the tightening part.
■ Screw the 2 rinsing block screws until they

quarter and a half turn (Needle inside the
rinsing block). 0.5mm.
■ Make sure the needle guide (white part of
the rinsing block) is parallel to the rinsing
block body.
■ Adjust needle position, start the instrument

and run menu «Machine/Alarms/
Adjustments/Vacuum-pressure
function». Press valve <53> to make rinsing
block go down.
■ The needle bottom aperture must

correspond to the rinsing channel.
■ If the needle position is not correct,
unloosen the probe holding screw and
readjust it.
Technical Manual
Soft pneumatic
2. Automatic sampling needle
2.1. Maintenance
1x FAA057A, 1x FAA058A, 1x FAA060A, 1x GBD689A
■ Remove the sampling start bar.
■ Install
the piercer security device (A) on the
piercing needle block.
■ Lift
the locker and remove the piercing
needle block.
■ Disconnect the needle channel tubings and
the rinsing block tubing as well. A
Be carefull when manipulating the piercer, not to prick your fingers. Always manipulate the
piercer hands besides, and never in the needle axis, as shown below:
Technical Manual
Soft pneumatic
3 1
■ Unscrew the needle nut (1) then the axis
support screws (2).
■ Remove the needle support (3) and the
spring.
2
■ Unscrew the rinsing block screws and

remove the needle.
■ Ifthe needle is partially blocked connect a syringe to it by means of transmission tubing

and flush it several times with distilled water.
■ Check the good general state of needle.
■ Replace needle O’ring (FAA057A).
1 2

■ Remove the «Furon seal» (2).
Be carefull the «Furon seal» is a very fragile part and must be installed perfectly parallel into
its support.
■ Turn the «Furon seal» (FAA058A) over the

threads then push it gently with the
tightening plate into its support.
Technical Manual
Soft pneumatic
■ Make sure the «Furon seal» is properly

installed.
■ Replace the rubber foam (GBD689A).
■ Re-assemble the rinsing block on the

needle, screw the nut along the needle on
its upper position, install the spring. Screw
the needle support.
■ Present the piercing needle assy in front of
its location.
Before handle the piercing assy, install the protection.
When the needle heigth adjustment has to be performed, it is mandatory to have the
compressor running during the procedure as the heigth maximum value is given when the air
cylinder is pushed at the bottom by the air pressure.
Technical Manual
Soft pneumatic
2.2. Needle height adjustment
■ Screw or unscrew the needle on its support

to adjust the heigth of the rinsing block: This
one, on its upper position, must exactly fit in
the location.
■ Turn the needle anti clockwise to the
maximum possible (A).
■ Tight the nut (B) to fix the needle. A
■ Install the piercer and connect the tubings.
■ When installing the piercer fitted with

rubber foam, use a flat ruler as shown on
this diagram
Technical Manual
Soft pneumatic
3. Commutation valve
3.1. Valve dismantling
■ Run a «Rinse» cycle from menu «Other

cycles», before any manipulation.
■ Switchoff the instrument and release the
pressure by pressing several times valve
<53>.
■ Using a small tool (hexagonal key for
example), unblock the valve tightening
screw.
■ Unscrew the valve tightening screw.
■ Remove the tightening screw and the front

part of the valve. Disconnect the tubes from
the valve. Beware as some liquids may flow
from the valve apertures.
Technical Manual
Soft pneumatic
3.2. Valve cleaning
■ Using a little syringe and distilled water,

flush the valve aperture to remove any
blockage.
■ Put the valve into ABX Minoclair for half an
hour, then rinse toroughly with distilled
water.
■ Gently wipe the 2 parts of the valve and
apply a thin film of Versilube grease on the
parts which come into contact. Make sure
not to block the ceramic apertures.
■ Clean the screw and grease it gently with

Versilube grease (Only on the pointed area
shown
Make sure not to block the ceramic apertures.
3.3. Valve re-assembling
■ Check that the commutation aperture

(indicated on diagram) is perfectly cleaned.
■ Reassemble the valve in the reverse order,
beware of the tube positions when
reconnecting them.
■ Tighten and block the fixation screw.
■ Switch on the instrument and run a «Vacuum/Pressure» function from menu

■ Press several times on the pneumatic switch <58> to check the correct operation of the valve.
■ Run several manual cycles and check for no leak.
Technical Manual
Soft pneumatic
4. Sampling valve
4.1. Sampling valve dismantling
■ Open the cover.

■ Drawa line across the sampling valve
ceramic parts.
■ Holding the valve with one hand pull out the

lever and the position knob to remove the
valve.
When you open the valve diluent may leaks from outlets 9 et 10, use absorbant paper to clean
and sweep leakages.
■ Gently slide the valve parts in order to open

it .
■ Remove the central part of the sampling
valve.
Technical Manual
Soft pneumatic
4.2. Valve cleaning
■ Immerse the central part in a recipient

containing ABX Minoclair and let them soak
for 10 minutes.
■ Rinse it thoroughly with distilled water.
4.3. Unblocking the apertures
■ Ifone of the aperture is blocked by a piece of tube top or a clot. Try to locate the clot or the piece of
tube top and disconnect the tygon tube from the aperture connector (Do not disconnect all the tubes
at the same time from sampling valve).
■ Use a syringe to push out the clot from the valve.
■ Reconnect the tygon tube on the connector and reassemble the valve as described below.
4.4. Re-assembling
■ Apply a thin film of Versilube grease on your glove then on the valve parts which come into contact.
■ Make sure not to block the ceramic apertures.
4.5. Valve tightening pressure adjustment
This adjustment has to be carried out only in case of a blockage or leaks problems on the
customer site.
■ Incase of leak problems, proceed as follow:

Make sure that the ceramical parts of the valve have been cleaned according to the procedure above.
Make sure that the inputs and outputs of the valve are not blocked.
Release the pressure lever and check that the valve is not tightened.
Technical Manual
Soft pneumatic
■A slight action on the toothed wheel will considerably change the tightening pressure
applied on the ceramical parts (see below).
■ The authorized adjustment on the toothed wheel is factory adjusted to +/- 10°.
■ At the end of the adjustment operation, it is mandatory to observe the functionning of the
sampling valve for one hour during routine work operation.
■ Before adjustment unscrew the screw (2).

■ The valve tightening torque is factory
adjusted (9.3cm/kg) but this one should not
be adjusted on the field. A mark on the
toothed wheel indicates the factory
adjustment.
■ Each graduation on the toothed wheel (1)
indicates 10°. 1
■ Turning the wheel (previously adjusted to
210N) 2
- 10° clockwise will raise the strength of
15N.
- 10° anticlockwise will decrease the
strength of 30N.
■ Turn the toothed wheel clockwise or
anticlockwise a maximum to one graduation
from the origin.
■ Check the valve operation. Too much
pressure will block its operation, too low
pressure will give leaks.
■ Tight the screw (2).
Technical Manual
Soft pneumatic
5. WBC/HGB chamber
5.1. Chamber dismantling and cleaning
■ Remove the WBC chamber cover.
■ Disconnect the Hgb photocell coaxial cable

from the plug located on the pneumatic
door (1) and disconnect the HGB LED 4
supply (2).
■ Disconnectthe grounding wire (3) and
unscrew the counting head grounding (4). 2
■ Record the position of the hydraulic tubes 1
and disconnect them (Remove the cap).
Make sure that no liquid will flow down
inside the spectrophotometer.
■ Remove the WBC/HGB chamber assy from
its clip, beware of the WBC coaxial cable 3
which is still connected to the instrument.
■ Unscrew the 2 screws of the electrode on

the back of the WBC chamber and seperate
the electrode from the chamber.
■ Remove the counting head fixation screws.
Remove gently the counting head, beware
of the O’ring and the aperture which may be
stuck on the counting head.
■ Unscrew on both side of the

spectrophotometer the fixation screws and
carefully remove it from the chamber.
■ Using a soft brush or air pressure, clean the
window of the photocell and the HGB LED.
Make sure there is no trace of liquid on the
optical window.
Technical Manual
Soft pneumatic
Beware to spectrophotometer O’rings (on both side) when re-installing spectrophotometer.
■ Clean the chamber with ABX Cleaner (or ABX Minoclair), do not introduce any sharp instruments inside
so as to avoid damaging the inside of the chamber and the apertures.
■ Dry the exterior of the chamber with a soft paper.
■ Clean the counting head with liquid soap, do not introduce any sharp instruments inside.
■ Using a little syringe flush the counting head inlets with distilled water.
■ Dry the exterior of the counting head with a soft paper.
■ When the counting head is removed replace the O’ring (FAA049A).

■ Re-assemble the chamber in reverse order (Counting head screws tightening torque: 100mN.m).
■ Toreplace the electrode O’rings, use a

previously cut micropipette tip as shown.
■ Replacethe O’ring (FAA046A) and re-

Technical Manual
Soft pneumatic
6. RBC chamber maintenance

■ Record the tube positions before

dismantling the chamber.
■ Disconnect the chamber tubes.
■ Remove the electrode holding clip and
carefully remove the electrodes.
■ Clean the chamber with Cleaner (or
Minoclair), do not introduce any sharp
instruments inside so as to avoid damaging
the inside of the chamber and the apertures.
■ Drythe exterior of the chamber with a soft
paper.
■ Unscrew the counting head and replace the

O’ring (FAA049A).
Technical Manual
Soft pneumatic
■ Usea previously cut micropipette tip to

change the electrode O’rings (FAA046A) as
shown.
■ Replacethe O’rings (FAA046A) and re-

Beware to coaxial orientation when reassembling the chamber.
1mm
■ Check the correct location for the RBC 15mm
injection tube.
■ Make sure that the flow does not come into
contact with the electrode or the aperture.
3mm
Check on several analysis that at the end of the injection of the blood into the RBC chamber:
NO BLOOD DROP IS STUCK BETWEEN THE RBC CHAMBER AND THE INJECTION TUBE.
Technical Manual
Soft pneumatic
7. BASO chamber maintenance

■ Perform
BASO chamber maintenance the
same way as for RBC chamber.
8. Waste chamber
3x XEA286AS
■ Remove the waste chambers from their

support.
■ Remove the waste chambers cap (4
screws).
■ Replace the joints and the washers.
■ Replace all the tubings under the each
cover.
Be carefull not to disconnect tubings from the caps.
9. Check up after intervention

■ Perform procedure RAS440A: Check up after intervention.
Technical Manual
RAS440A
Check up after intervention
■ Concerns
■ This procedure allows to perform the check up of

the instrument: Autoconcentrated cleaning,
Repeatability, Control, Calibration.
■ Required tools
■ 5ml syringe
■ 4° chloride of sodium hypochloryde solution
■1 hour
■ Frequency
■ On request

■ Control bloods
■ Calibrator

the operations.
1. Concentrated cleaning
Concerns:
■ RBC chamber cleaning
■ WBC\HGB chamber cleaning
■ BASO chamber cleaning
1.1. Preliminary
■ Open «Menu\Machine\Alarms\Options\Modification» window and unvalid the Drain chambers

BASO, WBC and RBC flags.
■ Open the instrument cover.
4
2
1.2. RBC chamber cleaning
■ Press the «other cycles» key and run a Drain chambers cycle.
■ Remove the cap of the RBC chamber (2). Do not disconnect any of the tubes from the cap.
■ Pour 5ml of the chloride solution into the RBC chamber.
■ Reinstall the cap on the chamber.
■ Simulate a count by pressing the liquid valve <22> for 15 seconds.
■ Provide a backflush into the RBC aperture by simultaneously pressing valves <42> and <22> for 10
seconds.
■ Leave the instrument in stand-by mode for 10 minutes.
■ Press the «start up» key to check the cleanliness of the instrument.
■ Open «Menu\Machine\Alarms\Options\Modification» window and valid the Drain chambers
■ Run a blood control. Calibrate only if results are out-of-range.
Technical Manual
1.3. WBC chamber cleaning
■ Loosen the 2 screws (4) in order to remove the WBC/HGB chamber cover.
■ Remove the cap of the WBC/HGB chamber. Do not disconnect any of the tubes from the cap.
■ Pour 2ml of the chloride solution into the WBC/HGB chamber (1).
■ Simulate a counting by pressing the liquid valve <23> for 15 seconds.
■ Provide a backflush into the WBC aperture by simultaneously pressing valves <42> and <23> for 5
seconds.
■ Leave the instrument in stand-by mode for 10 min.
■ Reinstall the WBC/HGB chamber cover.
■ Press the»start up» key to check the cleanliness of the instrument.
■ Open «Menu\Machine\Alarms\Options\Modification» window and valid the Drain chamber BASO,
WBC and RBC flags.
■ Run a blood control. Calibrate only if results are out-of-range.
1.4. BASO chamber cleaning
■ Remove the cap of the BASO chamber (3). Do not disconnect any of the tubes from the cap.
■ Fill the BASO chamber with the chloride solution (around 5 ml).
■ Press the valve <40> to drain it to the 3/4.
■ Simulate a count by pressing the liquid valve <24> for 15 seconds.
■ Provide a backflush into the BASO aperture by simultaneously pressing valves <42> and <24> for 10
seconds.
■ Leave the chloride solution into the BASO chamber for 10 min.
■ Press the «start up» key to check the cleanliness of the instrument.
■ Open «Menu\Machine\Alarms\Options\Modification» window and valid the Drain chambers
Technical Manual
2. Repeatability
■ The repeatability check is done on consecutive runs of a fresh whole blood sample. Repeatability
includes the 34 parameters.
■ Open «Menu\Quality assurance\Repeatability».
2.1. Repeatability in open tube mode
■ The Repeatability check is available in all of the analysis types (CBC, DIF, RET, DIR or CBR).
■ From «Analyses and calculations» window press F4 key.
■ Move the cursor to the analysis type.
■ Run the analysis from «Analyses and calculations» menu pressing the sampling bar.
■ The results are displayed in the table. Rerun the sample as many times as desired.
2.2. Repeatability in piercing mode
■ The analysis type is given by the identification of the rack where the sample is positioned.
■ As for the open tube mode, a priming cycle may be carried out if the analysis type is different from the
previous ones.
■ The sample can be loaded on a rack, to the position indicated on «Menu\Quality
assurance\Repeatability\Closed tube setup».
■ Run the sample from the «Analyses and calculations» menu.
2.3. Results
■ CV calculations and deletion operations are also available from the F7 pop-up menu.
■ Result printout is available from the F10 pop-up menu.
Technical Manual
3. Control blood
■ Prepare the control blood according to the specific instructions detailed in the notice.
■ Enter «Menu\Quality assurance\Quality control».
■ Select the control blood to be used from the list, create a new lot if necessary (See user manual
chapter: Instrument configuration).
■ Perform 2 blank cycles to check the perfect cleanliness of the system («Other cycles\Blank
cycle\CBC»), check the results:
WBC < 0,2x103/mm3
RBC < 0,01x106/mm3
HGB = 0 g/dl
HCT < 0,7%
PLT < 5x103/mm3
■ Run control blood and check results are within limits.
4. Calibration
■ Prepare the calibrator according to the specific instructions detailed in the notice.
■ Enter «Menu\Calibration\Target values».
■ Select the calibrator to be used from the list (Create a new calibrator lot if necessary).
■ From «Analysis and calculations» run at least 6 times the calibrator (Unselect one of the result if
necessary).
■ Press F7 key and select «General calibration».
■ Enter a comment.
5. Open/Closed tube correlation

■ See procedure RAS434A: Open/Close tube correlation.
Technical Manual
Technical Manual
Exploded views
9 - Exploded views
1. Pneumatical door assy .........................................................................................4
2. Counting chambers ..............................................................................................5
3. Regulated and waste chambers ..........................................................................6
6. Waste chamber assy .............................................................................................9
7. Vacuum filters ......................................................................................................10
8. Optical bench ......................................................................................................11
9. Pneumatical door chain ......................................................................................11
10. LMNE Heater .....................................................................................................12
11. BASO Heater ......................................................................................................12
12. Heating and cell boards ....................................................................................13
13. Waste tray ..........................................................................................................13
14. Dispenser assy ..................................................................................................14
15. Liquid valves ......................................................................................................15
16. Regulators assy .................................................................................................16
17. Bubbling kit ........................................................................................................16
18. RBC Chamber ....................................................................................................17
19. BASO chamber ..................................................................................................17
20. WBC/HGB chamber ..........................................................................................18
21. HGB coaxial connector .....................................................................................18
22. BASO Chamber electrode assy .......................................................................19
23. RBC Chamber electrode assy ..........................................................................19
24. WBC/HGB Chamber assy .................................................................................20
25. WBC/HGB Chamber cover ...............................................................................20
26. LMNE syringes ..................................................................................................21
27. Syringe motor assy ...........................................................................................22
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9-1
Exploded views
28. Syringe assy .......................................................................................................23
29. Flowcell output shielding .................................................................................23
30. LMNE Chamber coaxe ......................................................................................24
31. Preamplifier board ............................................................................................25
32. Electro-pneumatic switch ................................................................................25
33. Piercer assy .......................................................................................................26
34. Manual sampling ...............................................................................................27
35. Distribution board .............................................................................................28
36. Piercing air cylinder ..........................................................................................28
37. Barcode assy .....................................................................................................29
38. Tube detection assy ..........................................................................................29
39. Sampling valve ..................................................................................................30
40. Commutation valve assy ..................................................................................30
41. Grabber ..............................................................................................................31
42. Grabber mechanism assy .................................................................................31
43. Piercer motor .....................................................................................................32

44. Rotation mechanism assy ................................................................................32
45. Rotation motor assy .........................................................................................33
46. Ejection motor assy ..........................................................................................33
47. Loading assy ......................................................................................................34
48. Compressor .......................................................................................................35
49. Compressor fan .................................................................................................36
50. Pressure Regulators .........................................................................................36
51. Vacuum regulator ..............................................................................................37
52. Manometer assy ................................................................................................37
53. HP filter ..............................................................................................................38
54. Tankers ..............................................................................................................38
Technical Manual
9-2 RAA027BEN
Exploded views
55. Connection plate ...............................................................................................39
56. Power supply .....................................................................................................40
57. Detection cell .....................................................................................................41
58. Laser bench board ............................................................................................41
59. Hard disk ............................................................................................................42
60. Optical distribution board ................................................................................42
61. Instrument cover ...............................................................................................43
62. Manual sampling needle protection ................................................................44
63. Waste straw .......................................................................................................44
64. Diluent straws ....................................................................................................45
65. External barcode reader ...................................................................................46
66. PMT ....................................................................................................................46
67. Flange connector tubings (Pentra DX 120) .....................................................47
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9-3
Exploded views
Pneumatical door assy
1. Pneumatical door assy
2
3
1
x4
4 x3
Index P/n Designation

1 XCA167A CHAMBER, ISOLATOR (SMALL)
2 XDA500BS SYRINGE, BLOCK ASSY P120
3 GBC015A CLIP, MIX CH. HOLDER MIC/P120
4 GAL087A CLIP, CHAMBER HOLDER
Technical Manual
9-4 RAA027BEN
Exploded views
Counting chambers
2. Counting chambers

1 XDA507B CHAMBER, RBC 50µ CPTE P120
2 XDA376AS CHAMBER, BASO CPTE 5D/P120
3 XDA508A CHAMBER, WBC/HGB 100µ CPTE P120
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9-5
Exploded views
Regulated and waste chambers
3. Regulated and waste chambers
3
1

1 XDA503B CHAMBER, REG. VAC. 5PINS P120
2 XBA319B SENSOR, IR WASTE AG/HE+SYR.MIC
4 XDA501B CHAMBER, WASTE CHAMBER P120
5 XCA165A FILTER, VACUUM (ORANGE SPONGE)
Technical Manual
9-6 RAA027BEN
Exploded views
Regulated Vacuum chamber #1 assy
4. Regulated Vacuum chamber #1 assy
2
1
9
8
6

1 XDA540AS CHAMBER, WASTE COVER 5 PIN P120
2 KAA004A Screw CHC M3x10
3 EAE009AS TUBING, TYGON 2,29 (0,090) L=2M
4 GAC006AS FILTER, ORANGE SPONGE WASTE CH.
5 GAT048B O'RING, SILICON WASTE CHAMBER
6 INSERT JOINT WASHER
7 GAL093A CHAMBER, REGUL. VACU. W/O COVER
9 XEA286AS KIT, O'RING + WASHER
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9-7
Exploded views
Regulated Vacuum chamber #2 assy
5. Regulated Vacuum chamber #2 assy
2
1
9
8
6

1 XDA539AS CHAMBER, WASTE COVER 3 PIN P120
7 GAL093A CHAMBER, REGUL. VACU. W/O COVER
Technical Manual
9-8 RAA027BEN
Exploded views
Waste chamber assy
6. Waste chamber assy
2
1
9
8
6

1 XDA541AS CHAMBER, WASTE COVER P120
7 GAL094A CHAMBER, WAST.P120/DIL TANK
8 XDA501B CHAMBER, WASTE CHAMBER P120
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9-9
Exploded views
Vacuum filters
7. Vacuum filters
1

1 XCA165A FILTER, VACUUM (ORANGE SPONGE)
Technical Manual
9 - 10 RAA027BEN
Exploded views
Optical bench
8. Optical bench

1 XDA377CS OPTICAL, BENCH CPTE P120/ PDX
9. Pneumatical door chain

1 FBR007A CARRIAGE, 13 LINK CHAIN P120
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9 - 11
Exploded views
LMNE Heater
10. LMNE Heater

XDA881C CHAMBER, NEW LMNE CHAMBER PDX
1
XDA961B CHAMBER, NEW LMNE CHAMBER PDF
11. BASO Heater

1 XDA499B HEATER ,BASO CPT+T° SWITCH P120
Technical Manual
9 - 12 RAA027BEN
Exploded views
Heating and cell boards
12. Heating and cell boards
1 3
2

XAA350A PCB,TEMPERATURE BOARD P120
1
XAA350B PCB, TEMPERATURE BOARD DX
2 DAD098A FLAT CABLE ADAPT. JCM340/5DIFF
3 XAA343BS PCB, CELLS BOARD P120
13. Waste tray

1 GBD282A CUP, OVERFLOW VALVE ASSY P120
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9 - 13
Exploded views
Dispenser assy
14. Dispenser assy
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
3
2
1

1 XDA505C PUMP, DISPENSER 1ML CPTE P120
2 XDA506A PUMP, DISPENSER 0,5ML CPTE P120
3 XDA504A PUMP, DISPENSER 5ML CPTE P120
4 XDA553A PUMP, DISPENSER 2,5ML RETIX
Technical Manual
9 - 14 RAA027BEN
Exploded views
Liquid valves
15. Liquid valves

10 9 9
2 4
1
3
9 9
6
8
5
7
11

1 XDB135A 2 ways NC without coil
2 XDB041A 2 ways NC
3 XDB137A 2 ways NO without coil
4 XDB140A 2 ways NO
5 XDB136A 3 ways without coil
6 XDB042A 3 ways 24v 4w
7 XDB142A 3 ways 4 pins without coil
8 XDB141A 3 ways 4 pins 4w
9 EAZ006A VALVE, SOLENOID 24V 4W
10 Clip
11 XEA422BS KIT, NEW VALVE 7 P120
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9 - 15
Exploded views
Regulators assy
16. Regulators assy

1
2
3

1 XCA183AS REGULATOR, 0-30 PSI P120
2 EAL002B REGULATOR, FOR ADJUSTABLE FLOW
3 XCA184AS REGULATOR, 0-10 PSI P120
4 XEC088AS KIR, REGULATOR, FOR ADJUSTABLE FLOW
17. Bubbling kit

1 XEA382AS KIT, TUBINGS FOR BUBBLING P120
Technical Manual
9 - 16 RAA027BEN
Exploded views
RBC Chamber
18. RBC Chamber
2 3 4

2 FAK001A CHAMBER, RBC 50µ CPTE P120
3 FAA049A O'RING, APERTURE
4 XDA309A CHAMBER, COUNTING HEAD
19. BASO chamber
6
3
5
4

1 XDA442AS CHAMBER, BASO TOP 5DIFF/P120
2 FAA023A O'RING, RBC/WBC CHAMB.CAP.
4 XDA309A CHAMBER, COUNTING HEAD
5 FAK003A CHAMBER, APERTURE 80µm
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9 - 17
Exploded views
WBC/HGB chamber
20. WBC/HGB chamber
4
3
5
1
2

1 FAK002A CHAMBRE, APERTURE 100µm
3 FAA023A O'RING, RBC/WBC CHAMB.CAP.
4 XDA543AS CHAMBER, WBC/HGB TOP P120
21. HGB coaxial connector

1 CBY009A CONNECTOR, HGB COAX CPTE P120
Technical Manual
9 - 18 RAA027BEN
Exploded views
BASO Chamber electrode assy
22. BASO Chamber electrode assy
1
2

2 XBA173A CABLE, COAX BASO + RBC 5D/P120
3 GAU179A CLIP, COAXIAL CLIP BASO CHAMBER
4 FAA046A O'RING, COAXIAL CABLE
23. RBC Chamber electrode assy
1
2
4
3

2 XBA173A CABLE, COAX BASO + RBC 5D/P120
3 GAU179A CLIP, COAXIAL CLIP BASO CHAMBER
4 FAA046A O'RING, COAXIAL CABLE
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9 - 19
Exploded views
WBC/HGB Chamber assy
24. WBC/HGB Chamber assy

4
3
x2

2 XBA289AS PHOTOMETER, HGB CPTE P120
3 FAA059A O'RING, HGB CHAMBER P120
4 XBA314A CABLE, COAX WBC VEC
25. WBC/HGB Chamber cover

1 GBD534A COVER, WBC/HB CH. METAL P120
Technical Manual
9 - 20 RAA027BEN
Exploded views
LMNE syringes
26. LMNE syringes
9
2
8 3
7
1
10
4
5
6
11
12
13

1 XDA437AS PUMP, SYRINGE 5.65ML 5DIFF CPTE
2 XDA199AS PUMP, 127µL SYRINGE CPT 5D/P120
3 FAA036A O'RING, FLOW CELL+LYSE DISP.MIC
4 FAA026A O'RING, AUTO SAMPLER NEEDLE
5 GAH024A O'RING, TEFLON SYRINGE 127µL
6 GAH015A SYRINGE, 127µL NEEDLE GUIDE
7 GBD629A SYRINGE, 127µL LOWER BODY
8 GAG058A NEEDLE, 127µL SYRINGE 5D/P120
9 GBD628A SYRINGE, 127µL UPPER BODY
10 GAT192A SYRINGE, BODY 5.65ML 5DIFF
11 FAA040A O'RING, 5DIFF SYRINGE D=12,1
12 GAT016A SYRINGE, PISTON GUIDE 5.65ML 5D
13 GAT014A SYRINGE, PISTON 5.65ML 5DIFF
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9 - 21
Exploded views
Syringe motor assy
27. Syringe motor assy
1 5

1 FAD003A BEARING, SYRINGE 5D/VE,8X16X6
2 FBR001A BELT, SYRINGE BLOCK 5DIFF/P120
3 FAD001A BEARING, SMALL D=3X8X3
4 FBE003A COVER, SYRINGE MOTOR 5D/P120
5 XBA226A SENSOR, IR SYRINGE 5DIFF CPTE
Technical Manual
9 - 22 RAA027BEN
Exploded views
Syringe assy
28. Syringe assy

1 XAA306AS PCB, MOTOR FILTER BOARD 5D/P120
2 XDA500BS SYRINGE, BLOCK ASSY P120
29. Flowcell output shielding

1 XBA201A TUBING, SHIELD REPARTIT 5D/P120
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9 - 23
Exploded views
LMNE Chamber coaxe
30. LMNE Chamber coaxe

1 XBA308B CABLE, NEW COAX LMNE FLOWCELL
Technical Manual
9 - 24 RAA027BEN
Exploded views
Preamplifier board
31. Preamplifier board

1 XAA269BS PCB, OPTIC PREAMP BOARD + MECA
32. Electro-pneumatic switch
1 2

1 XCA167A CHAMBER, ISOLATOR (SMALL)
2 XCA166A CHAMBER, ISOLATOR (LONG)
3 GBD669A VALVE, ELECTROV. 5O/2P 24V P120
4 EAC001A FITTING, PLASTIC CAP 10/32X4.5
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9 - 25
Exploded views
Piercer assy
33. Piercer assy
2 or 2*
3
1
or 1*
4 or 4*

1 XDA497ES Sampling, piercing block P120 2 channels
1* XDA786CS Sampling,piercing block P120 3 channels
2 HAU075A Sticker, piercer block P120
2* GBD689A Rinsing tank cover
3 GBD688B Needle, pierc. rinse block P120
4 GBD270B Needle piercer 2 channels P120
4* GBD685B Needle, sampling 3 holes SPS
5 FAA057A O’ring 5x1
6 FAA060A O’ring 2.1x1.6
7 FAA058A Furon seal
Technical Manual
9 - 26 RAA027BEN
Exploded views
Manual sampling
34. Manual sampling
4 7
5

1 XCA185AS AIR CYLINDER, MANUAL SAMPL.P120
2 GBD200AS NEEDLE, SAMPLING MANUAL P120
3 GAL017A NEEDLE, SAMPLING MANUAL P120
4 GAL074A O'RING, TEFLON MANUAL NEEDLE
5 FAA025A O'RING, SAMP. NEED. NEW CARR.
6 GAL018A NEEDLE, MANUAL RINSING BLOCK
7 GAG030AS NEEDLE, STIRRUP MANUAL NEEDLE
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9 - 27
Exploded views
Distribution board
35. Distribution board

1 XAA362BS PCB, DISTRIBUTION BOARD P120
36. Piercing air cylinder

1 XCA188BS AIR CYLINDER, SAMPL.NEEDLE P120
Technical Manual
9 - 28 RAA027BEN
Exploded views
Barcode assy
37. Barcode assy
1 2

1 CBC005AS PCB, BARCODE READER P120
2 GBD329A PCB, BARCODE PROTECTION P120
38. Tube detection assy

1 XBA337BS SENSOR, TUBE DETECTION P120
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9 - 29
Exploded views
Sampling valve
39. Sampling valve
1 2

1 XDA549AS VALVE, SHEAR CERAMIC DX
2 XDA515AS VALVE, SHEAR CERAMIC DF
40. Commutation valve assy
4
3
1 2

1 XDA516B VALVE, COMMUTATION VALVE P120
2 XDA548AS VALVE, COMMUTATION AXIS P120
3 XCA186AS AIR CYLINDER, COMMUT VALVE P120
4 XDA495C VALVE, COMMUTATION ASSY VEC/VER
Technical Manual
9 - 30 RAA027BEN
Exploded views
Grabber
41. Grabber

1 XEA467AS KIT, INST. NEW GRABBER P120
42. Grabber mechanism assy

1 XDA534AS SAMPLING, GRABBER ASSY P120
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9 - 31
Exploded views
Piercer motor
43. Piercer motor
2 x4

1 XBA300BS MOTOR, PIERC BLOCK ASSY VEC/VER
2 FAL001A SILENT BLOC, COMPRESSOR/MOTOR
44. Rotation mechanism assy
4 1 x8
2 2
3
5 x4

1 FZZ009AS CLIP, SMALL RUBBER BUMPER
2 FZZ060A REFLECTIVE BAND . L=215 +/-0,5 x25mm
3 HAU072A STICKER, ROTATIVE BARCODE "1"
4 FZZ061A REFLECTIVE BAND . L=195 +/-0,5 x25mm
5 GBD015B CLIP, SPRING TO HOLD THE RACK
6 HAU071A STICKER, ROTATIVE BARCODE "0"
Technical Manual
9 - 32 RAA027BEN
Exploded views
Rotation motor assy
45. Rotation motor assy
1 2 x4

1 XBA298BS MOTOR, ROTATION ASSY P120
46. Ejection motor assy
1 2 x4

1 XBA328AS MOTOR, CASSETTE EJECTION P120
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9 - 33
Exploded views
Loading assy
47. Loading assy

1 XBA299AS MOTOR, CASSETTE LOAD. ASSY P120
2 XBA342AS SENSOR, ASSY MOTOR P120
3 GBD037B SAMPLING, LOADING ROD
4 XDB096A ASSY, RIGHT LOADING CAM
XDB095A ASSY, LEFT LOADING CAM
Technical Manual
9 - 34 RAA027BEN
Exploded views
Compressor
48. Compressor
3
1
x2
x2
x2
x2
x2
2
x4

1 XCA179CS COMPRESSOR, CPTE P120
2 FAL008A SILENT BLOC, COMPR. VEC/VER
3 XEA425AS KIT, MAINTENANCE COMP. P120
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9 - 35
Exploded views
Compressor fan
49. Compressor fan

1 XBA327AS Fan
50. Pressure Regulators
1 2

1 XCA177AS REGULATOR, 1,5-7 BAR CPTE P120
2 XCA176AS REGULATOR, 0-2 BAR CPTE P120
Technical Manual
9 - 36 RAA027BEN
Exploded views
Vacuum regulator
51. Vacuum regulator
3
1 x2

1 EBB053A FILTER, SILENCER 1/8 FESTO
2 EAA006A FITTING, STRAIGHT I=3X19.5
3 XCA175B REGULATOR, VACUUM REG. VEC/VER
52. Manometer assy

1 EAX001A REGULATOR, MANOMETER PRESSURE
2 EAX003A REGULATOR, MANOMETER VACUUM
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9 - 37
Exploded views
HP filter
53. HP filter

1 XEA929BS KIT, NEW HP CHAMBER P120/DX/DF
3 EAU014B HP Filter + metal connector
54. Tankers

1 XCA178B Tanker
Technical Manual
9 - 38 RAA027BEN
Exploded views
Connection plate
55. Connection plate

4 x4
3 x2 8 x7 6 x7
5
x7
7
2 x3

1 XCA180C REAGENT, CONNECT PLATE DX/DF120
2 GBD275A FITTING, METAL BUSHING P120
3 EAC010A FITTING, LUER FEMALE I=3MM
4 EAC004A FITTING, LUER FEMALE I=2,5MM
5 EAC008A FITTING, ANTI ROTATION WASHER
6 EAC007A FITTING, LUER OUTSIDE SCREW
7 EAC009A FITTING, LUER MALE I=3MM
8 EAC005A FITTING, LUER MALE I=2,5MM
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9 - 39
Exploded views
Power supply
56. Power supply

1 XBA303D PCB, POWER SUPPLY BLOCK P120
2 XAA327B PCB, POWER SUPPLY BOARD P120
3 XAA328BS PCB,VAC./PRES. DETECT. BD P120
Technical Manual
9 - 40 RAA027BEN
Exploded views
Detection cell
57. Detection cell

3

1 XBA304A SENSOR, BLOOD DETECTION P120
2 XBA619A SENSOR,IR L=360
3 XEA748BS SENSOR, IR KIT WASTE CHAMBER
58. Laser bench board

1 XAA380BS PCB, LASER BOARD DX
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9 - 41
Exploded views
Hard disk
59. Hard disk

1 XAA533HS Hard disk kit Pentra DX/DF 120 + V2.2.0
60. Optical distribution board

1 XAA257DS PCB, OPTIC SIGNAL PROC. 5D/P120
Technical Manual
9 - 42 RAA027BEN
Exploded views
Instrument cover
61. Instrument cover
2 or 2*
1 or 1*

1 XDA884C COVER, EQUIPPED PENTRA DX
1* XDA956C COVER, EQUIPPED PENTRA DF
2 XEA993AS COVER, KIT FOR PDX
2* XEA994AS COVER,KIT FOR PDF
3 EBD009A COVER, AIR CYLINDER P120/PDX (250N, left side)
4 EBD010A COVER, AIR CYLINDER P120/PDX (150N, right side)
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9 - 43
Exploded views
Manual sampling needle protection
62. Manual sampling needle protection

4 GBD248AS KIT, DOOR MANUAL SAMPLING P120
63. Waste straw

1 XBA322D SENSOR, WASTE DETECTION P120/80
Technical Manual
9 - 44 RAA027BEN
Exploded views
Diluent straws
64. Diluent straws
1 2

1 XBA321C REAGENT, STRAW DOUBLE DIL. P120 (20 L)
2 XBA785A REAGENT, STRAW DOUBLE DIL. P120 (10 L)
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9 - 45
Exploded views
External barcode reader
65. External barcode reader

1 XBA509B PCB, BARCODE HAND READER
66. PMT

1 XBA350BS PHOTOMETER, PMT ASSY VER
Technical Manual
9 - 46 RAA027BEN
Exploded views
Flange connector tubings (Pentra DX 120)
67. Flange connector tubings (Pentra DX 120)

1 2 3 4 10 11
5 6 7 8 9

1 XCA201A Flange connector tubing V79S2/LMNE
2 XCA202A Flange connector tubing V79S3/DIS.H
3 XCA203A Flange connector tubing V65S2/LMNE
4 XCA204A Flange connector tubing V65S3/DIS.J
5 XCA205AS Flange connector tubing FLUOREAG/PC4
6 XCA206AS Flange connector tubing FLUOATM/AIR
7 XCA207AS Flange connector tubing FLUOATMO
8 XCA208AS Flange connector tubing FLUOREAG
9 XCA209AS Flange connector tubing T/PC4
10 XCA210A Flange connector tubing T/V65S1
11 XCA211A Flange connector tubing T/V79S1
Technical Manual
RAA027BEN 9 - 47
Exploded views
Flange connector tubings (Pentra DX 120)
Technical Manual
9 - 48 RAA027BEN

Pentra DX 120-Raa027ben

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pentra DX 120-Raa027ben

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical manual

HORIBA ABX SAS

2. Legal Information ..................................................................................................3

3. Operational Conditions .........................................................................................5

4. Instrument’s labels ................................................................................................9

5. Instrument general cleaning ..............................................................................12

6. Warning and precautions ...................................................................................13

8. Instrument description & technology (Pentra DX 120) ....................................18

9. Reagent specifications .......................................................................................19

10. Printer .................................................................................................................20

2 - Hydraulic & pneumatic principles

1. Pneumatic circuit ..................................................................................................2

3. Membrane pump ...................................................................................................3

4. Air cylinders ...........................................................................................................4

5. Liquid valves ..........................................................................................................7

6. Hydraulic circuit ..................................................................................................11

7. Hydraulic specifications (Pentra DX 120 only) ..................................................27

8. Pneumatic diagrams ...........................................................................................28

3 - Electric & Electronic principles

1. Power supply module ...........................................................................................3

2. Electronic boards ................................................................................................10

3. Electronic boards description ............................................................................11

4. Flat cables list ......................................................................................................58

6. Electronic principles ...........................................................................................88

4 - Analysis cycle technology

2. Analysis cycle description ....................................................................................4

4. Mechanic principles & description ....................................................................25

1. Software versions and compatibilities ................................................................2

2. Technical notes .....................................................................................................5

3. «Assistance» menu description ...........................................................................7

4. Command interpreter (Shell) ................................................................................9

1. Connection between Analyzer and Pentra ML ...................................................2

2. Connection to laboratory .....................................................................................6

2. Error message file .................................................................................................6

1. Maintenance procedures .....................................................................................2

2. Service technician maintenance & adjustments ................................................3

1. Pneumatical door assy .........................................................................................4

2. Counting chambers ..............................................................................................5

3. Regulated and waste chambers ..........................................................................6

4. Regulated Vacuum chamber #1 assy ..................................................................7

5. Regulated Vacuum chamber #2 assy ..................................................................8

6. Waste chamber assy .............................................................................................9

7. Vacuum filters ......................................................................................................10

8. Optical bench ......................................................................................................11

9. Pneumatical door chain ......................................................................................11

10. LMNE Heater .....................................................................................................12

11. BASO Heater ......................................................................................................12

12. Heating and cell boards ....................................................................................13

13. Waste tray ..........................................................................................................13

14. Dispenser assy ..................................................................................................14

15. Liquid valves ......................................................................................................15

16. Regulators assy .................................................................................................16

17. Bubbling kit ........................................................................................................16

18. RBC Chamber ....................................................................................................17

19. BASO chamber ..................................................................................................17

20. WBC/HGB chamber ..........................................................................................18

21. HGB coaxial connector .....................................................................................18

22. BASO Chamber electrode assy .......................................................................19

23. RBC Chamber electrode assy ..........................................................................19

24. WBC/HGB Chamber assy .................................................................................20

25. WBC/HGB Chamber cover ...............................................................................20

26. LMNE syringes ..................................................................................................21

27. Syringe motor assy ...........................................................................................22